[go: up one dir, main page]

US20200085790A1 - Baclofen and acamprosate based therapy of neurological disorders - Google Patents

Baclofen and acamprosate based therapy of neurological disorders Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20200085790A1
US20200085790A1 US16/694,231 US201916694231A US2020085790A1 US 20200085790 A1 US20200085790 A1 US 20200085790A1 US 201916694231 A US201916694231 A US 201916694231A US 2020085790 A1 US2020085790 A1 US 2020085790A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
acamprosate
baclofen
combination
drug
disease
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US16/694,231
Inventor
Daniel Cohen
Ilya Chumakov
Serguei Nabirochkin
Emmanuel Vial
Mickael Guedj
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Pharnext SA
Original Assignee
Pharnext SA
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Pharnext SA filed Critical Pharnext SA
Priority to US16/694,231 priority Critical patent/US20200085790A1/en
Assigned to PHARNEXT reassignment PHARNEXT ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: COHEN, DANIEL, VIAL, EMMANUEL, CHUMAKOV, ILYA, NABIROCHKIN, SERGUEI, GUEDJ, MICKAEL
Publication of US20200085790A1 publication Critical patent/US20200085790A1/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/435—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/44—Non condensed pyridines; Hydrogenated derivatives thereof
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/185—Acids; Anhydrides, halides or salts thereof, e.g. sulfur acids, imidic, hydrazonic or hydroximic acids
    • A61K31/19—Carboxylic acids, e.g. valproic acid
    • A61K31/195—Carboxylic acids, e.g. valproic acid having an amino group
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/185—Acids; Anhydrides, halides or salts thereof, e.g. sulfur acids, imidic, hydrazonic or hydroximic acids
    • A61K31/19—Carboxylic acids, e.g. valproic acid
    • A61K31/195—Carboxylic acids, e.g. valproic acid having an amino group
    • A61K31/197—Carboxylic acids, e.g. valproic acid having an amino group the amino and the carboxyl groups being attached to the same acyclic carbon chain, e.g. gamma-aminobutyric acid [GABA], beta-alanine, epsilon-aminocaproic acid or pantothenic acid
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/13—Amines
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/13—Amines
    • A61K31/135—Amines having aromatic rings, e.g. ketamine, nortriptyline
    • A61K31/137—Arylalkylamines, e.g. amphetamine, epinephrine, salbutamol, ephedrine or methadone
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/13—Amines
    • A61K31/135—Amines having aromatic rings, e.g. ketamine, nortriptyline
    • A61K31/138—Aryloxyalkylamines, e.g. propranolol, tamoxifen, phenoxybenzamine
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/13—Amines
    • A61K31/145—Amines having sulfur, e.g. thiurams (>N—C(S)—S—C(S)—N< and >N—C(S)—S—S—C(S)—N<), Sulfinylamines (—N=SO), Sulfonylamines (—N=SO2)
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/16—Amides, e.g. hydroxamic acids
    • A61K31/164—Amides, e.g. hydroxamic acids of a carboxylic acid with an aminoalcohol, e.g. ceramides
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/185—Acids; Anhydrides, halides or salts thereof, e.g. sulfur acids, imidic, hydrazonic or hydroximic acids
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/185—Acids; Anhydrides, halides or salts thereof, e.g. sulfur acids, imidic, hydrazonic or hydroximic acids
    • A61K31/19—Carboxylic acids, e.g. valproic acid
    • A61K31/195—Carboxylic acids, e.g. valproic acid having an amino group
    • A61K31/196—Carboxylic acids, e.g. valproic acid having an amino group the amino group being directly attached to a ring, e.g. anthranilic acid, mefenamic acid, diclofenac, chlorambucil
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/21—Esters, e.g. nitroglycerine, selenocyanates
    • A61K31/27—Esters, e.g. nitroglycerine, selenocyanates of carbamic or thiocarbamic acids, meprobamate, carbachol, neostigmine
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/325—Carbamic acids; Thiocarbamic acids; Anhydrides or salts thereof
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/40—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. sulpiride, succinimide, tolmetin, buflomedil
    • A61K31/403—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. sulpiride, succinimide, tolmetin, buflomedil condensed with carbocyclic rings, e.g. carbazole
    • A61K31/404—Indoles, e.g. pindolol
    • A61K31/4045—Indole-alkylamines; Amides thereof, e.g. serotonin, melatonin
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/41—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with two or more ring hetero atoms, at least one of which being nitrogen, e.g. tetrazole
    • A61K31/42—Oxazoles
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/41—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with two or more ring hetero atoms, at least one of which being nitrogen, e.g. tetrazole
    • A61K31/425—Thiazoles
    • A61K31/428—Thiazoles condensed with carbocyclic rings
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/435—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/44—Non condensed pyridines; Hydrogenated derivatives thereof
    • A61K31/445—Non condensed piperidines, e.g. piperocaine
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/55—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having seven-membered rings, e.g. azelastine, pentylenetetrazole
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/64—Sulfonylureas, e.g. glibenclamide, tolbutamide, chlorpropamide
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K45/00—Medicinal preparations containing active ingredients not provided for in groups A61K31/00 - A61K41/00
    • A61K45/06—Mixtures of active ingredients without chemical characterisation, e.g. antiphlogistics and cardiaca
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K9/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
    • A61K9/0012—Galenical forms characterised by the site of application
    • A61K9/0053—Mouth and digestive tract, i.e. intraoral and peroral administration
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P21/00—Drugs for disorders of the muscular or neuromuscular system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P21/00—Drugs for disorders of the muscular or neuromuscular system
    • A61P21/02—Muscle relaxants, e.g. for tetanus or cramps
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/14—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating abnormal movements, e.g. chorea, dyskinesia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/14—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating abnormal movements, e.g. chorea, dyskinesia
    • A61P25/16—Anti-Parkinson drugs
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/28—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system, e.g. nootropic agents, cognition enhancers, drugs for treating Alzheimer's disease or other forms of dementia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P29/00—Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/10—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system for treating ischaemic or atherosclerotic diseases, e.g. antianginal drugs, coronary vasodilators, drugs for myocardial infarction, retinopathy, cerebrovascula insufficiency, renal arteriosclerosis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K2300/00—Mixtures or combinations of active ingredients, wherein at least one active ingredient is fully defined in groups A61K31/00 - A61K41/00
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K9/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
    • A61K9/20—Pills, tablets, discs, rods
    • A61K9/2004—Excipients; Inactive ingredients

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to combinations and methods for the treatment of neurological diseases and disorders. More specifically, the present invention relates to novel combinatorial therapy of neurological disorders, based on baclofen and acamprosate combination.
  • AD Alzheimer's disease
  • dysphasia language disorder in which there is an impairment of speech and of comprehension of speech
  • dyspraxia disability to coordinate and perform certain purposeful movements and gestures in the absence of motor or sensory impairments
  • agnosia ability to recognize objects, persons, sounds, shapes, or smells attributable to involvement of the cortical association areas.
  • Special symptoms such as spastic paraparesis (weakness affecting the lower extremities) can also be involved [1-4].
  • AD Alzheimer's disease
  • AD is at present the most common cause of dementia. It is clinically characterized by a global decline of cognitive function that progresses slowly and leaves end-stage patients bound to bed, incontinent and dependent on custodial care. Death occurs, on average, 9 years after diagnosis [5]
  • Memory impairment is the early feature of the disease and involves episodic memory (memory for day-today events). Semantic memory (memory for verbal and visual meaning) is involved later in the disease. By contrast, working memory (short-term memory involving structures and processes used for temporarily storing and manipulating information) and procedural memory (unconscious memory that is long-term memory of skills and procedure) are preserved until late. As the disease progresses, the additional features of language impairment, visual perceptual and spatial deficits, agnosias and apraxias emerge.
  • AD amyloid plaques containing beta-amyloid (Abeta), neurofibrillary tangles (NFT) containing Tau and neuronal and synaptic dysfunction and loss [9-11].
  • Abeta beta-amyloid
  • NFT neurofibrillary tangles
  • Tau Tau
  • neuronal and synaptic dysfunction and loss [9-11].
  • Amyloid cascade hypothesis states that the neurodegenerative process is a series of events triggered by the abnormal processing of the Amyloid Precursor Protein (APP) [12]
  • APP Amyloid Precursor Protein
  • neuroneuronal cytoskeletal degeneration hypothesis [13] proposes that cytoskeletal changes are the triggering events.
  • AD amyloid cascade hypothesis
  • AD researchers have mainly focused on determining the mechanisms underlying the toxicity associated with Abeta proteins.
  • Microvascular permeability and remodeling, aberrant angiogenesis and blood-brain barrier (BBB) breakdown have been identified as key events contributing to the APP toxicity in the amyloid cascade [17].
  • BBB blood-brain barrier
  • Tau protein has received much less attention from the pharmaceutical industry than amyloid, because of both fundamental and practical concerns.
  • synaptic density change is the pathological lesion that better correlates with cognitive impairment than the two others.
  • Glutamate is the most abundant excitatory neurotransmitter in the mammalian nervous system. Under pathological conditions, its abnormal accumulation in the synaptic cleft leads to glutamate receptor overactivation [18]. Abnormal accumulation of glutamate in synaptic clefts leads to the overactivation of glutamate receptors that results in pathological processes and finally in neuronal cell death. This process, named excitotoxicity, is commonly observed in neuronal tissues during acute and chronic neurological disorders.
  • Two kinds of medication are used for improving or slowing down symptoms of AD which lay on some acetylcholinesterase modulators and a blocker of NMDA glutamate receptors, memantine [22, 23].
  • NMDAR antagonists that target various sites of this receptor have been tested to counteract excitotoxicity.
  • Uncompetitive NMDAR antagonists target the ion channel pore, thus reducing calcium entry into postsynaptic neurons. Some of them reached the approval status.
  • memantine is currently approved in moderate to severe Alzheimer's disease. It is clinically tested in other indications that include a component of excitotoxicity such as alcohol dependence (phase II), amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (phase III), dementia associated with Parkinson's disease (phase II), epilepsy, Huntington's disease (phase IV), multiple sclerosis (phase IV), Parkinson's disease (phase IV) and traumatic brain injury (phase IV).
  • WO2009133128, WO2009133141, WO2009133142 and WO2011054759 disclose drug combinations for use in the treatment of AD.
  • the present invention provides new treatments for such neurological diseases of the central nervous system (CNS) and the peripheral nervous system (PNS).
  • CNS central nervous system
  • PNS peripheral nervous system
  • the invention relates to compositions and methods for treating neurological disorders related to glutamate and/or amyloid beta (A ⁇ ) toxicity, based on a combination of baclofen and acamprosate.
  • a ⁇ amyloid beta
  • the invention stems, inter alia, from the unexpected discovery, by the inventors, that the combination of baclofen and acamprosate provides substantial and unexpected benefit to patients with Alzheimer's disease. Moreover, the inventors have surprisingly discovered that this combination provides substantial and unexpected protection of neuronal cells against various injuries encountered in neurological disorders including glutamate toxicity. Thus, this combination of baclofen and acamprosate constitutes an efficient treatment for patients suffering from, predisposed to, or suspected to suffer from neurological disorders. The inventors have found that combinations of the invention are efficient in counteracting the toxic cellular effects of A ⁇ peptides and in correcting the cognitive impairments in relation with such toxicity. The invention further demonstrates that baclofen and acamprosate administration does improve memory functions in aged subjects as well as cognitive functions, in particular by correcting cognition-related electro-physiological features in mild AD patients.
  • An object of this invention therefore relates to compositions comprising a combination of baclofen and acamprosate for use in the treatment of a neurological disorder, particularly AD and related disorders, multiple sclerosis (MS), amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), Parkinson's disease (PD), neuropathies (for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy), frontotemporal dementia (FTD), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, Huntington's disease (HD) and spinal cord injury.
  • MS multiple sclerosis
  • ALS amyotrophic lateral sclerosis
  • PD Parkinson's disease
  • neuropathies for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy
  • FTD frontotemporal dementia
  • alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal Huntington's disease (HD) and spinal cord injury.
  • HD Huntington's disease
  • compositions of the invention may contain baclofen and acamprosate as the only active ingredients.
  • the compositions may comprise additional active ingredient(s).
  • a further object of this invention relates to a composition comprising a combination of baclofen, acamprosate, and at least one third compound selected from sulfisoxazole, methimazole, prilocaine, dyphylline, quinacrine, carbenoxolone, aminocaproic acid, cabergoline, diethylcarbamazine, cinacalcet, cinnarizine, eplerenone, fenoldopam, leflunomide, levosimendan, sulodexide, terbinafine, zonisamide, etomidate, phenformin, trimetazidine, mexiletine, ifenprodil, moxifloxacin, bromocriptine or torasemide, for use in the treatment of neurological disorders in a
  • the compounds in a combinatorial therapy of the invention may be administered simultaneously, separately, sequentially and/or repeatedly to the subject.
  • the invention also relates to any pharmaceutical composition per se comprising a combination of at least two compounds as defined above.
  • compositions of the invention typically further comprise one or several pharmaceutically acceptable excipients or carriers.
  • the compounds as used in the present invention may be in the form of a salt, hydrate, ester, ether, acid, amide, racemate, or isomer. They may also be in the form of sustained-release formulations. Prodrugs or derivatives of the compounds may be used as well.
  • a compound is used as such or in the form of a salt, hydrate, ester, ether or sustained release form thereof.
  • a particularly preferred salt for use in the present invention is acamprosate calcium.
  • a prodrug or derivative is used.
  • a further object of this invention is a method of preparing a pharmaceutical composition, the method comprising mixing baclofen and acamprosate, in a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient or carrier.
  • Another object of this invention relates to a method for treating a neurological disorder in a mammalian subject in need thereof, preferably a human subject in need thereof, the method comprising administering to said subject an effective amount of a combination of the invention.
  • a further object of this invention relates to a method for treating Alzheimer's disease (AD) or a related disorder in a mammalian subject in need thereof, preferably a human subject in need thereof, the method comprising administering to said subject an effective amount of a combination of the invention.
  • AD Alzheimer's disease
  • a preferred object of this invention relates to a method for treating a neurological disorder in a mammalian subject in need thereof, preferably a human subject in need thereof, the method comprising simultaneously, separately or sequentially administering to said subject an effective amount of baclofen and acamprosate.
  • a particular object of this invention relates to a method of treating Frontotemporal Dementia (FTD) in a mammalian subject in need thereof, preferably a human subject in need thereof, the method comprising administering to said subject an effective amount of a combination of the invention.
  • FTD Frontotemporal Dementia
  • a more preferred object of this invention relates to a method for treating AD or a related disorder in a mammalian subject in need thereof, preferably a human subject in need thereof, the method comprising simultaneously, separately or sequentially administering to said subject an effective amount of baclofen and acamprosate.
  • Another particular object of this invention relates to a method of treating Age Associated Memory Impairment (AAMI) in a mammalian subject in need thereof, preferably a human subject in need thereof, the method comprising administering to said subject an effective amount of a combination of the invention.
  • AAMI Age Associated Memory Impairment
  • the invention may be used for treating a neurological disorder in any mammalian subject, preferably in any human subject, at any stage of the disease.
  • the compositions of the invention are able to ameliorate the pathological condition of said subjects.
  • FIG. 1 Validation of the experimental model of human beta-amyloid toxicity on endothelial cells used for drug screening.
  • FIGS. 2A-2C Effect of baclofen (BCL) and acamprosate (ACP) combination therapy on the total length of capillary network in beta-amyloid intoxicated HBMEC cultures.
  • the human amyloid peptide (A ⁇ 1-42 2.5 ⁇ M) produces a significant intoxication, above 40%, compared to vehicle-treated cells. This intoxication is significantly prevented by the combination of acamprosate and baclofen ( FIG. 2A ) whereas, at those concentrations, acamprosate ( FIG. 2B ) and baclofen ( FIG. 2C ) alone have no significant effect on intoxication.
  • p ⁇ 0.05 significantly different from A ⁇ 1-42 intoxication
  • * p ⁇ 0.05, significantly different from vehicle
  • “ns” no significant effect (ANOVA+Dunnett Post-Hoc test).
  • FIG. 3 Effect of baclofen (BCL) and terbinafine (TBN) combination therapy on the total length of capillary network in beta-amyloid intoxicated HBMEC cultures.
  • the human amyloid peptide (A ⁇ 1-42 2.5 ⁇ M) produces a significant intoxication, above 40%, compared to vehicle-treated cells. This intoxication is prevented by the combination of terbinafine and baclofen.
  • FIG. 4 Validation of the experimental model of human beta amyloid toxicity on neuronal cells used for drug screening.
  • FIGS. 5A-5C Effect of acamprosate (ACP) and baclofen (BCL) combination therapy on LDH release in human A ⁇ 1-42 toxicity on rat primary cortical cells.
  • the human amyloid peptide (A ⁇ 1-42 10 ⁇ M) produces a significant intoxication compared to vehicle-treated neurons. This intoxication is significantly prevented by the combination of acamprosate and baclofen ( FIG. 5A ) whereas, at those concentrations, acamprosate ( FIG. 5B ) and baclofen ( FIG. 5C ) alone have no significant effect on intoxication.
  • FIG. 6 Effect of cinacalcet (CNC) and sulfisoxazole (SFX) combination therapy on LDH release in human A ⁇ 1-42 toxicity on rat primary cortical cells.
  • the human amyloid peptide (A ⁇ 1-42 10 ⁇ M) produces a significant intoxication compared to vehicle-treated neurons. This intoxication is prevented by the combination of cinacalcet and sulfisoxazole.
  • * p ⁇ 0.05, significantly different from vehicle (ANOVA+Dunnett Post-Hoc test).
  • FIG. 7 Effect of acamprosate (ACP) and baclofen (BCL) combination therapy on the total length of neurite network in beta-amyloid intoxicated cortical neurons.
  • the human amyloid peptide (A ⁇ 1-42 2.5 ⁇ M) produces a significant intoxication, above 15%, compared to vehicle-treated cells. This intoxication is significantly prevented by the combination of acamprosate and baclofen whereas, at those concentrations, acamprosate and baclofen alone have no significant effect on intoxication.
  • FIG. 8 Effect of acamprosate and baclofen combination therapy on behaviour as defined by Y-maze test.
  • the amyloid peptide produces a significant decrease in cognition as measured by percentage of alternation (53.8% versus 73.5%). This deleterious effect is significantly prevented (48.2% protection) by the combination of acamprosate (0.2 mg/kg bid) and baclofen (3 mg/kg bid).
  • ⁇ p ⁇ 0.05, significantly different from A ⁇ 25-35 intoxication
  • * p ⁇ 0.05, significantly different from control (ANOVA+Dunnett Post-Hoc test).
  • FIG. 9 Effect of acamprosate and baclofen combination therapy on memory as defined by passive avoidance (escape latency).
  • the amyloid peptide produces a significant decrease in memory performances as measured by escape latency compared to control. This deleterious effect is significantly prevented (complete protection) by the combination of acamprosate (0.2 mg/kg bid) and baclofen (3 mg/kg bid).
  • ⁇ p ⁇ :0.05, significantly different from A ⁇ 25-35 intoxication
  • * p ⁇ 0.05, significantly different from control (ANOVA+Dunnett Post-Hoc test).
  • FIG. 10 Effect of acamprosate and baclofen combination therapy on memory as defined by passive avoidance (step-through latency).
  • the amyloid peptide produces a significant decrease in memory performance as measured by step-through latency, above 44%, compared to control.
  • This deleterious effect is significantly prevented (78.8% protection) by the combination of acamprosate (0.2 mg/kg bid) and baclofen (3 mg/kg bid) whereas, at those concentrations, acamprosate and baclofen alone have a lower effect on intoxication.
  • ⁇ p ⁇ 0.05, significantly different from A ⁇ 25-35 intoxication
  • * p ⁇ 0.05, significantly different from control (ANOVA+Dunnett Post-Hoc test).
  • FIG. 11 Effect of acamprosate and baclofen combination therapy on neuron's density in the hippocampus.
  • the amyloid peptide produces a significant decrease in neuronal density as measured by the number of neurons per millimeter in the hippocampus, above 21%, compared to control.
  • This neuronal injury is significantly prevented (63.2% of injured neurons are protected) by the combination of acamprosate (0.2 mg/kg bid) and baclofen (3 mg/kg bid).
  • ⁇ p ⁇ 0.05, significantly different from A ⁇ 25-35 intoxication
  • * p ⁇ 0.05, significantly different from control (ANOVA+Dunnett Post-Hoc test).
  • FIG. 12 Effect of acamprosate and baclofen combination therapy on the blood-brain barrier (BBB) integrity.
  • the amyloid peptide affects the blood-brain barrier, inducing a significant increase of its permeability, above 51%, compared to control. Those damages on the blood-brain barrier are significantly prevented (66.6% of the integrity restored) by the combination of acamprosate (0.2 mg/kg bid) and baclofen (3 mg/kg bid).
  • ⁇ p ⁇ 0.05, significantly different from A ⁇ 25-35 intoxication, *. p ⁇ 0.05, significantly different from control (ANOVA+Dunnett Post-Hoc test).
  • FIG. 13 Effect of acamprosate and baclofen combination therapy on synaptic density as reflected by the synaptophysin concentration.
  • the amyloid peptide affects synapse function, inducing a significant decrease in the synaptophysin concentration in the brain, above 34%, compared to control.
  • Those damages on the synaptic density are significantly prevented (76%) by the combination of acamprosate (0.2 mg/kg bid) and baclofen (3 mg/kg bid).
  • ⁇ p ⁇ 0.05, significantly different from A ⁇ 25-35 intoxication
  • * p ⁇ 0.05, significantly different from control (ANOVA+Dunnett Post-Hoc test).
  • FIG. 14 Protective effect of acamprosate and baclofen combination therapy on oxidative stress in the hippocampus.
  • the amyloid peptide induces a significant increase in oxidative stress in the hippocampus as measured by lipid peroxydation, above 59%, compared to control. This oxidative stress is significantly prevented (65.9%) by the combination of acamprosate (0.2 mg/kg bid) and baclofen (3 mg/kg bid).
  • ⁇ p ⁇ 0.05, significantly different from A ⁇ 25-35 intoxication
  • * p ⁇ 0.05, significantly different from control (ANOVA+Dunnett Post-Hoc test).
  • FIG. 15 Effect of baclofen and acamprosate combination therapy against glutamate toxicity on neuronal cortical cells. Glutamate intoxication is significantly prevented by the combination of baclofen (400 nM) and acamprosate (1.6 nlM) whereas, at those concentrations, baclofen and acamprosate alone have no significant effect on intoxication.
  • ⁇ p ⁇ 0.001, significantly different from glutamate intoxication; (ANOVA+Dunnett Post-Hoc test).
  • FIG. 16 Effect of donepezil, acamprosate and baclofen combination therapy on behaviour and cognitive performance as defined by the Y-maze test.
  • the amyloid peptide produces a significant decrease in cognition as measured by percentage of alternation (51.5% versus 71.8%). This deleterious effect is significantly prevented (98% protection) by the combination of donepezil (0.25 mg/kg/day), acamprosate (32 ⁇ g/kg bid) and baclofen (480 ⁇ g/kg bid), whereas at those concentrations the drugs alone have no significant effect.
  • ⁇ p ⁇ 0.01, significantly different from A ⁇ 25-35 intoxication
  • * p ⁇ 0.01, significantly different from control (ANOVA+Dunnett Post-Hoc test).
  • FIG. 17 Comparison of protective effect of acamprosate and its derivative homotaurine pre-treatment in human A ⁇ 1-42 toxicity assays on rat primary cortical cells.
  • a ⁇ 1-42 produces a significant intoxication compared to vehicle-treated neurons. The intoxication is equally significantly prevented by homotaurine and acamprosate (99%, 8 nM).
  • ⁇ p ⁇ 0.0001: significantly different from A ⁇ 1-42 intoxication (ANOVA+Dunnett Post-Hoc test).
  • FIG. 18 Effect of acamprosate and baclofen combination therapy on the development of chronic progressive experimental autoimmune encephalomyelitis (EAE) as defined by clinical score. Immunization induces a significant decrease in physical features as measured by clinical score. This deleterious effect is significantly prevented (p-value ⁇ 0.01) by the combination of acamprosate (2 mg/kg/day) and baclofen (30 mg/kg/day).
  • EAE chronic progressive experimental autoimmune encephalomyelitis
  • FIG. 19 Effect of memantine, acamprosate and baclofen combination therapy on behaviour and cognitive performances as defined by Y-maze test.
  • the amyloid peptide produces a significant decrease in cognition as measured by percentage of alternation (57.7% versus 69.7%). This deleterious effect is significantly prevented (79.2% protection) by the combination of memantine (0.5 mg/kg/day), acamprosate (32 ⁇ g/kg bid) and baclofen (480 ⁇ g/kg bid), whereas at those concentrations the drugs alone have no significant effect.
  • ⁇ p ⁇ 0.01, ⁇ : p ⁇ 0.05, significantly different from A ⁇ 25-35 intoxication; *: p ⁇ 0.05, significantly different from control (ANOVA+Dunnett Post-Hoc test).
  • FIG. 20 Baclofen (BCL)-acamprosate (ACP) combination protects synapse integrity from A ⁇ 1-42 toxicity.
  • a ⁇ 1-42 0.3 ⁇ M intoxication induces a loss in synaptic junctions between hippocampal neurons (almost 34%), as determined by quantification of colocalization of PSD93 and synaptophysin proteins (black bar). This effect is significantly reversed upon treatment with BCL and ACP combination (80 nM and 0.32 nM respectively) by up to 62% (light grey bar).
  • FIGS. 21A-21D Baclofen-acamprosate combination reduces A ⁇ 1-42 -induced changes within neurones in vitro.
  • FIG. 21A A ⁇ 1-42 intoxication induces oxidative stress as shown by the increase of 18% of MetO residues within the cells cultured in the presence of A ⁇ 1-42 compared to control.
  • FIG. 21A A ⁇ 1-42 intoxication induces oxidative stress as shown by the increase of 18% of MetO residues within the cells cultured in the presence of A ⁇ 1-42 compared to control.
  • Baclofen (0.32 nM) and acamprosate (80 nM) treatment significantly lowers A ⁇ 1-42 induced oxidative stress as reported by a drop of 60% of MetO residues in treated, intoxicated cells.
  • a ⁇ 1-42 intoxication results in the triggering of apoptotic events as the increase of cytoplasmic cytochrome C (Cyto C) released from mitochondria (above 150% control). Baclofen and acamprosate combination significantly reduces by more than 30% the release of mitochondrial Cyto C in intoxicated cells.
  • FIG. 21C A ⁇ 1-42 intoxication results in an increase of 46% of phosphorylated Tau protein (pTau Ser212/Thr214 ) within the cells, compared to control, non-intoxicated cells. Quantity of phosphorylated Tau protein in A ⁇ 1-42 intoxicated neurons is significantly reduced by more than 90% upon treatment with baclofen and acamprosate.
  • FIGS. 22A-22D Acamprosate (ACP) acts through GABA A , glycine and metabotropic glutamatergic receptor signaling.
  • a ⁇ 1-42 (10 ⁇ M) produces a significant intoxication of cells (-, black bars, up to 40% of death) compared to vehicle-treated neurons (control, white bars). This intoxication is efficiently prevented by acamprosate 8 nM (grey bars, up to 71% improvement).
  • Muscimol a GABA A receptor agonist ( FIG. 22A ), strychnine, a glycine receptor antagonist ( FIG. 22B ), DHPG, a mGluR1/5 agonist ( FIG.
  • FIG. 22C 22C and (2R,4R)-APDC, a mGluR2/3 agonist ( FIG. 22D ) all block ACP protection of rat primary neuronal cells. Values are mean ⁇ s.e.m. ***: p ⁇ 0.001 versus A ⁇ , or ACP pretreated and A ⁇ intoxicated cells (ANOVA+Dunnett Post-Hoc test). “Control”: non-A ⁇ intoxicated non treated cells; “-”: A ⁇ intoxicated cells. mGluR1/5 and mGluR2/3: metabotropic glutamate group I and II receptors respectively.
  • FIG. 23 Simultaneous activity on three main features of AD within given concentration ranges, i.e., baclofen: from 80 nM to 1 ⁇ M and acamprosate: from 320 pM to 4 nM.
  • Baclofen-acamprosate combination has been found to be neuroprotective and to improve, at the same time, synapse function (neuron plasticity) and endothelial cell function (angiogenesis).
  • S drug concentrations at which the combination exerts a synergistic effect in the corresponding in vitro models.
  • FIGS. 24A-24B A one-month treatment with baclofen-acamprosate combination (acamprosate 0.2 mg/kg bid and baclofen 3 mg/kg bid) is effective in improving cognition in hAPPS L mice of 8 months, when compared to non-treated transgenic mice both during the acquisition phase or the test phase.
  • FIG. 24A On day 4 the latency observed for treated transgenic mice is significantly different from that exhibited by non-treated transgenic mice.
  • FIG. 24B Escape latency for swim 1 and swim 2 in treated transgenic mice is significantly different from non-treated transgenic mice. Globally performances of all treated transgenic mice are better than those of non-treated transgenic mice and similar to those of non-transgenic animals. Values are mean ⁇ s.e.m.
  • treated transgenic animals are different from non-treated transgenic animals (ANOVA+Dunnett Post-Hoc test); ⁇ : p ⁇ 0.001. Performances of baclofen-acamprosate-treated animals are globally significantly different from performances of non-treated transgenic animals (ANOVA+Dunnett Post-Hoc test).
  • FIG. 25 Baclofen-acamprosate combination efficiently reduces scopolamine-induced cognitive impairments in humans.
  • Raw data scores in Groton Maze Learning Test (GMLT) are plotted along the vertical scale. An increase in the score corresponds to an impairment of performance in GMLT.
  • Scopolamine administered at H3 induces a rapid decrease in cognitive performance in placebo-treated subjects (circles, dotted line) which lasts for approximately 6 hours (H9) after scopolamine injection.
  • Baclofen-acamprosate mix (squares, grey/solid line) is efficient over this period in reducing the deleterious effects of scopolamine on cognitive performance.
  • a significant improvement in cognitive scores is observed in the time window corresponding to the higher plasmatic concentrations of baclofen and acamprosate (shaded bar below the horizontal scale, dark: higher plasmatic concentrations, light: lower plasmatic concentrations).
  • FIG. 26 ADAS-cog (Alzheimer's Disease Assessment Scale Cognitive Subscale) score evolution (change from baseline) during single blind Challenge-De-challenge-Re-challenge (CDR) clinical trial on 24 mild AD subjects.
  • ADAS-cog score is evaluated at the beginning and the end of each period during visits to the neurophysiologist (V).
  • the efficiency of baclofen-acamprosate mix is supported by the clear succession of improvement, worsening and improvement phases in correlation with the challenge (plain line), de-challenge (dotted line) and re-challenge phases (plain line).
  • Data are obtained from the gathering of the whole data from dose 1 and dose 2 administered patients. Cognition is significantly improved considering the whole duration of the study (V1 versus V4 score comparison, p ⁇ 0.05); a significant improvement is also noticed at the end of the challenge phase (V1 versus V2 score comparison, p ⁇ 0.01).
  • FIG. 27 Records of P300 wave all along the Challenge-De-challenge-Re-challenge (CDR) study, in a subject suffering from mild AD treated with 0.4 mg acamprosate and 6 mg baclofen, each bid. Baclofen-acamprosate combination is efficient in correcting the electrophysiological mechanisms underlying cognitive processes in AD patients. ERPs were recorded at each visit (V1-V4) to the neurophysiologist. Each curve is a modelling of the whole recordings from the different electrodes. It clearly appears that, from V2 to V4, the P300 subcomponent waves consistently shift to the left during all the duration of the study, thereby showing a decrease in latency. An improvement of amplitude is also observed (Student's T-test on paired data).
  • FIG. 28 A 17-week treatment with baclofen-acamprosate combination efficiently improves working memory performances of aged mice (more than 28 months). Percentage of alternation in T-maze test is significantly improved (by more than 50%) in treated aged mice when compared to non-treated mice. Values are mean ⁇ s.e.m. ***p ⁇ 0.001, treated aged animals are significantly different from non-treated aged animals (ANOVA+Dunnett Post-Hoc test).
  • the present invention provides new methods and compositions for treating neurological disorders.
  • the invention discloses novel drug combinations which allow an effective correction of such diseases and may be used in any mammalian subject.
  • the invention is suited for treating any neurological disorder, whether central or peripheral, particularly disorders wherein nerve or neuron injuries, 3 amyloid, BBB breakdown or glutamate excitotoxicity are involved.
  • neurological disorders include neurodegenerative diseases, neuropathies, spinal cord injury, and substance abuse such as alcoholism.
  • Neurodegenerative disorders refers to diseases, such as Alzheimer's disease (AD) and related disorders, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), multiple sclerosis (MS), Parkinson's disease (PD), and Huntington's disease (HD), encompassing a progressive loss of function and death of neurons.
  • AD Alzheimer's disease
  • MS multiple sclerosis
  • PD Parkinson's disease
  • HD Huntington's disease
  • Neuropathies refers to conditions where nerves of the peripheral nervous system are damaged; this includes damage of the peripheral nervous system provoked by genetic factors, inflammatory disease, or chemical substance including drugs (vincristine, oxaliplatin, ethyl alcohol).
  • the treatment of neuropathies also includes the treatment of neuropathic pain.
  • the invention is particularly suited for treating AD and related disorders.
  • the term “related disorder” includes senile dementia of AD type (SDAT), frontotemporal dementia (FTD), vascular dementia, mild cognitive impairment (MCI) and age-associated memory impairment (AAMI).
  • treatment includes the therapy, prevention, prophylaxis, retardation or reduction of symptoms provoked by or of the causes of the above diseases or disorders.
  • treatment includes in particular the control of disease progression and associated symptoms.
  • treatment particularly includes i) a protection against the toxicity caused by amyloid beta, or a reduction or retardation of said toxicity, and/or ii) a protection against glutamate excitotoxicity, or a reduction or retardation of said toxicity, in the treated subjects.
  • treatment also designates an improvement of cognitive symptoms or a protection of neuronal cells.
  • a specific drug or compound is meant to include not only the specifically named molecule, but also any pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, derivative, isomer, racemate, conjugate, prodrug or derivative thereof of any chemical purity.
  • ком ⁇ онент designate a treatment wherein at least baclofen and acamprosate are co-administered to a subject to cause a biological effect.
  • the at least two drugs may be administered together or separately, at the same time or sequentially.
  • the at least baclofen and acamprosate may be administered through different routes and protocols. As a result, although they may be formulated together, the drugs of a combination may also be formulated separately.
  • prodrug refers to any functional derivatives (or precursors) of a compound of the present invention, which, when administered to a biological system, generate said compound as a result of, e.g., spontaneous chemical reaction(s), enzyme catalysed chemical reaction(s), and/or metabolic chemical reaction(s).
  • Prodrugs are usually inactive or less active than the resulting drug and can be used, for example, to improve the physicochemical properties of the drug, to target the drug to a specific tissue, to improve the pharmacokinetic and pharmacodynamic properties of the drug and/or to reduce undesirable side effects.
  • prodrug design examples include, but are not limited to, carboxylic, hydroxyl, amine, phosphate/phosphonate and carbonyl groups.
  • Prodrugs typically produced via the modification of these groups include, but are not limited to, esters, carbonates, carbamates, amides and phosphates. Specific technical guidance for the selection of suitable prodrugs is general common knowledge [27-31]. Furthermore, the preparation of prodrugs may be performed by conventional methods known by those skilled in the art. Methods which can be used to synthesize other prodrugs are described in numerous reviews on the subject [28, 32-38].
  • arbaclofen placarbil is listed in the ChemID plus Advance database (website: chem.sis.nlm.nih.gov/chemidplus/) and arbaclofen placarbil is a well-known prodrug of baclofen [39, 40].
  • derivatives of a compound includes any molecule that is functionally and/or structurally related to said compound, such as an acid, amide, ester, ether, acetylated variant, hydroxylated variant, or alkylated (C1-C6) variant of such a compound.
  • derivative also includes structurally related compounds having lost one or more substituent as listed above. For example, homotaurine is a deacetylated derivative of acamprosate.
  • Preferred derivatives of a compound are molecules having a substantial degree of similarity to said compound, as determined by known methods.
  • Tanimoto similarity index greater than 0.4, preferably greater than 0.5, more preferably greater than 0.6, even more preferably greater than 0.7 with a parent drug.
  • the Tanimoto similarity index is widely used to measure the degree of structural similarity between two molecules.
  • Tanimoto similarity index can be computed by software such as the Small Molecule Subgraph Detector [41, 42] available online (see Worldwide Website: ebi.ac.uk/thornton-srv/software/SMSD/).
  • Preferred derivatives should be both structurally and functionally related to a parent compound, i.e., they should also retain at least part of the activity of the parent drug, more preferably they should have a protective activity against A ⁇ or glutamate toxicity.
  • derivative also includes metabolites of a drug, e.g., molecules which result from the (biochemical) modification(s) or processing of said drug after administration to an organism, usually through specialized enzymatic systems, and which display or retain a biological activity of the drug. Metabolites have been disclosed as being responsible for much of the therapeutic action of the parent drug.
  • a “metabolite” as used herein designates a modified or processed drug that retains at least part of the activity of the parent drug, preferably that has a protective activity against A ⁇ toxicity or glutamate toxicity.
  • salt refers to a pharmaceutically acceptable and relatively non-toxic, inorganic or organic salt of a compound of the present invention.
  • Pharmaceutical salt formation consists of pairing an acidic, basic or zwitterionic drug molecule with a counterion to create a salt version of the drug.
  • a wide variety of chemical species can be used in neutralization reactions.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the invention thus include those obtained by reacting the main compound, functioning as a base, with an inorganic or organic acid to form a salt, for example, salts of acetic acid, nitric acid, tartaric acid, hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, phosphoric acid, methane sulfonic acid, camphor sulfonic acid, oxalic acid, maleic acid, succinic acid or citric acid.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the invention also include those in which the main compound functions as an acid and is reacted with an appropriate base to form, e.g., sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, ammonium, or choline salts.
  • salt selection is now a common standard operation in the process of drug development as taught by H. Stahl and C. G. Wermuth in their handbook [43].
  • the designation of a compound is meant to designate the compound per se, as well as any pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, isomer, racemate, ester or ether thereof.
  • the designation of a compound is meant to designate the compound as specifically designated per se, as well as any pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • a sustained-release formulation of the compound is used.
  • the invention relates to particular drug combinations which have a strong unexpected effect on several biological processes involved in neurological disorders. These drug combinations therefore represent novel approaches for treating neurological disorders, such as Alzheimer's disease and related disorders, multiple sclerosis, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Parkinson's disease, Huntington's disease, neuropathies (for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, and spinal cord injury. More specifically, the invention discloses compositions, comprising baclofen in combination with acamprosate, which provide a significant effect in vivo on neurological disorders.
  • the invention shows, in the experimental part, that combination therapies comprising baclofen and acamprosate can substantially improve the condition of patients afflicted with neurological disorders.
  • baclofen and acamprosate combinations have a strong, unexpected effect on the length of the capillary network, on LDH release in beta-amyloid intoxicated nervous cells as well as on the length of the neurite network, and represent new therapeutic approaches for AD. They have also discovered that baclofen-acamprosate combinations are efficient in lowering the A ⁇ induced oxidative stress, apoptosis, glutamate release and phosphorylated Tau accumulation in neuronal cells.
  • baclofen may be effective at a dose of 80 nM or less
  • acamprosate may be effective at a dose of 1 nM or less.
  • the present invention therefore proposes a novel therapy for neurological disorders, based on baclofen and acamprosate compositions. More particularly, the present invention therefore proposes a novel therapy for Alzheimer's disease and related disorders, multiple sclerosis, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Parkinson's disease, Huntington's disease, neuropathies (for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, and spinal cord injury, based on baclofen and acamprosate combinations.
  • a novel therapy for Alzheimer's disease and related disorders multiple sclerosis, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Parkinson's disease, Huntington's disease, neuropathies (for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, and spinal cord injury, based on baclofen and acamprosate combinations.
  • the invention relates to a composition comprising baclofen and acamprosate.
  • the invention relates to a composition comprising baclofen and acamprosate for use in the treatment of AD, AD-related disorders, MS, PD, ALS, HD, neuropathies (for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, or spinal cord injury.
  • a composition comprising baclofen and acamprosate for use in the treatment of AD, AD-related disorders, MS, PD, ALS, HD, neuropathies (for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, or spinal cord injury.
  • the invention relates to the use of baclofen and acamprosate for the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of AD, AD-relateddisorders, MS, PD, ALS, HD, neuropathies (for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, or spinal cord injury.
  • AD AD-relateddisorders
  • MS PD
  • ALS ALS
  • HD high-density lipoprotein
  • neuropathies for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy
  • alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal or spinal cord injury.
  • Table 1 Illustrative CAS numbers for baclofen and acamprosate are provided in Table 1 below. Table 1 cites also, in a non-limitative way, common salts, racemates, prodrugs, metabolites or derivatives for these compounds used in the compositions of the invention.
  • prodrugs of baclofen are given in Hanafi et al. [44], particularly baclofen esters and baclofen ester carbamates, which are of particular interest for CNS targeting. Hence such prodrugs are particularly suitable for compositions of this invention.
  • Arbaclofen placarbil as mentioned before is also a well-known prodrug and may thus be used instead of baclofen in compositions of the invention.
  • Other prodrugs of baclofen can be found in the following patent applications: WO2010102071, US2009197958, WO2009096985, WO2009061934, WO2008086492, US2009216037, WO2005066122, US2011021571, WO2003077902, and WO2010120370.
  • Useful prodrugs for acamprosate such as pantoic acid ester neopentyl sulfonyl esters, neopentyl sulfonyl ester prodrugs of acamprosate or masked carboxylate neopentyl sulfonyl ester prodrugs of acamprosate are notably listed in WO2009033069, WO2009033061, WO2009033054, WO2009052191, WO2009033079, US 2009/0099253, US 2009/0069419, US 2009/0082464, US 2009/0082440, and US 2009/0076147.
  • compositions of the invention may further comprise at least one compound selected from sulfisoxazole, methimazole, prilocaine, dyphylline, quinacrine, carbenoxolone, aminocaproic acid, cabergoline, diethylcarbamazine, cinacalcet, cinnarizine, eplerenone, fenoldopam, leflunomide, levosimendan, sulodexide, terbinafine, zonisamide, etomidate, phenformin, trimetazidine, mexiletine, ifenprodil, moxifloxacin, bromocriptine or torasemide.
  • Illustrative CAS numbers for each of these compounds are provided in Table 2 below:
  • the invention relates to the use of this combination for treating AD or a related disorder in a subject in need thereof.
  • the invention relates to the use of this combination for treating an AD-related disorder selected from senile dementia of AD type (SDAT), frontotemporal dementia (FTD), vascular dementia, mild cognitive impairment (MCI) and age-associated memory impairment (AAMI).
  • SDAT senile dementia of AD type
  • FDD frontotemporal dementia
  • MCI mild cognitive impairment
  • AAMI age-associated memory impairment
  • a particular object of this invention relates to a method of treating frontotemporal dementia (FTD) in a mammalian subject in need thereof, preferably a human subject in need thereof, the method comprising administering to said subject an effective amount of a combination of the invention.
  • FDD frontotemporal dementia
  • the invention relates to the use of this combination for treating MS, PD, ALS, HD, neuropathies (for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, or spinal cord injury in a subject in need thereof.
  • neuropathies for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy
  • alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal or spinal cord injury in a subject in need thereof.
  • composition therapies using at least baclofen and acamprosate have a strong unexpected effect on biological processes leading to neuronal injuries. Furthermore, these combinations also showed in vivo a very efficient ability to correct symptoms of neurological diseases. These combinations therefore represent novel approaches for treating neurological disorders, such as AD, MS, ALS, PD, HD, neuropathies (for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, and spinal cord injury. These compositions efficiently prevent toxicity of amyloid ⁇ (A ⁇ ) peptide or glutamate excitotoxicity in neuronal cells.
  • a ⁇ amyloid ⁇
  • these compositions are efficient at counteracting, simultaneously, the detrimental effects of intoxication by A ⁇ oligomers at the synaptic, neuronal and endothelial levels.
  • Such combination of effects is particularly advantageous and leads to a significant improvement of the disease both in several in vivo models for AD and in clinical trials. Indeed, in vivo, these compositions lead to an improvement of several cognitive symptoms as well as to protection of neuronal cells.
  • compositions are also efficient at i) synergistically protecting in vitro neuronal cells from glutamate excitotoxicity, and ii) conferring clinical benefit in in vivo models for diseases related to glutamate excitotoxicity.
  • compositions of the invention may comprise 2, 3, 4 or 5 distinct drugs, more preferably 2, 3 or 4 distinct drugs for combinatorial treatment of Alzheimer's disease (AD), AD-related disorders.
  • the drugs of the invention are used in combination(s) for combined, separate or sequential administration, in order to provide the most effective effect.
  • compositions of the invention for use in the treatment of a neurological disorder such as Alzheimer's disease (AD), AD-related disorders, MS, PD, ALS, HD, neuropathies (for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, or spinal cord injury, comprise one of the following drug combinations, for combined, separate or sequential administration:
  • AD Alzheimer's disease
  • MS PD
  • ALS ALS
  • HD neuropathies
  • alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal or spinal cord injury
  • combinatorial therapies of the invention provide substantial therapeutic and biological effects to improve Alzheimer's disease or related disorders in both animal model and human subjects. They induce a strong neuroprotective effect against AB toxicity, notably through the inhibition of A ⁇ -induced apoptosis and oxidative stress. They also give positive results in behavioural performances and biochemical assays in rodents. Results show that compositions of the invention in vivo: (i) efficiently correct molecular pathways triggered by AD oligomers, and (ii) lead to an improvement of neurophysiological impairments observed in diseased animals as neuron survival or synapse integrity.
  • compositions of the invention efficiently restore the blood-brain barrier (BBB) and prevent, retard, or lessen apoptosis triggering, which are known to be impaired in several neurological diseases.
  • Combinatorial therapies are also efficient at correcting memory impairment in aged animals. Results from clinical trials in human subjects also show an activity on cognitive performances of AD patients.
  • the results presented show that the above combinations therapies have an important synergistic neuroprotective effect against glutamate excitotoxicity ( FIG. 15 ), a pathway which is implicated in various neurological diseases such as AD, MS, PD, ALS, HD, neuropathies (for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, or spinal cord injury.
  • These therapies give positive results in in vivo or in vitro models for these diseases.
  • the particularly high synergistic interaction observed for these two drugs through the combinatorial treatment of the invention allows the use of drug concentrations showing no effect when used in single-drug treatment.
  • the baclofen and acamprosate combination causes an enhanced therapeutic benefit in treating Alzheimer's disease compared to other therapeutic combinations.
  • An object of this invention thus also resides in a composition as defined above for treating a neurological disorder such as AD, AD-related disorders, MS, PD, ALS, HD, neuropathies (for instance alcoholic neuropathy or neuropathic pain), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, or spinal cord injury.
  • a neurological disorder such as AD, AD-related disorders, MS, PD, ALS, HD, neuropathies (for instance alcoholic neuropathy or neuropathic pain), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, or spinal cord injury.
  • the compounds or drugs may be formulated together or separately, and administered together, separately or sequentially.
  • a further object of this invention resides in the use of a composition as defined above for the manufacture of a medicament for treating a neurological disorder such as Alzheimer's disease (AD), AD-related disorders, MS, PD, ALS, HD, neuropathies (for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, or spinal cord injury.
  • a neurological disorder such as Alzheimer's disease (AD), AD-related disorders, MS, PD, ALS, HD, neuropathies (for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, or spinal cord injury.
  • the invention further provides a method for treating a neurological disorder such as Alzheimer's disease (AD), AD-related disorders, MS, PD, ALS, HD, neuropathies (for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, or spinal cord injury, comprising administering to a subject in need thereof an effective amount of a composition as disclosed above.
  • a neurological disorder such as Alzheimer's disease (AD), AD-related disorders, MS, PD, ALS, HD, neuropathies (for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, or spinal cord injury.
  • a further object of the invention is a method of treating a neurological disorder such as Alzheimer's disease (AD), AD-related disorders, MS, PD, ALS, HD, neuropathies (for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, or spinal cord injury, the method comprising simultaneously, separately or sequentially administering to a subject in need thereof an effective amount of a composition as disclosed above.
  • a neurological disorder such as Alzheimer's disease (AD), AD-related disorders, MS, PD, ALS, HD, neuropathies (for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, or spinal cord injury
  • the invention relates to a method of treating a neurological disorder such as Alzheimer's disease (AD), AD-related disorders, MS, PD, ALS, HD, neuropathies (for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, or spinal cord injury in a subject in need thereof, comprising administering simultaneously, separately or sequentially to the subject an effective amount of baclofen and acamprosate.
  • a neurological disorder such as Alzheimer's disease (AD), AD-related disorders, MS, PD, ALS, HD, neuropathies (for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, or spinal cord injury.
  • compositions of the invention typically comprise one or several pharmaceutically acceptable carriers or excipients.
  • the drugs or compounds are usually mixed with pharmaceutically acceptable excipients or carriers.
  • a further object of this invention is a method of preparing a pharmaceutical composition, the method comprising mixing the above compounds in an appropriate excipient or carrier.
  • the method comprises mixing baclofen and acamprosate in an appropriate excipient or carrier.
  • the compounds are used as such or in the form of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, prodrug, derivative, or sustained release formulation thereof.
  • the combination therapy of the invention may further be used in conjunction, association or combination with additional drugs or treatments beneficial to the treated neurological condition in the subject.
  • Other therapies used in conjunction with drug(s) or drug(s) combination(s) according to the present invention may comprise one or more drug(s) that ameliorate symptoms of Alzheimer's disease, an AD-related disorder, MS, PD, ALS, HD, neuropathies (for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, or spinal cord injury, or drug(s) that could be used for palliative treatment of these disorders.
  • AD-related disorder for instance, MS, PD, ALS, HD
  • neuropathies for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy
  • alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal or spinal cord injury
  • drug(s) that could be used for palliative treatment of these disorders may be used for palliative treatment of these disorders.
  • results also show that the above combination therapies have an important synergistic neuroprotective effect when combined with donepezil ( FIG. 16 ) or memantine ( FIG. 19 ), thereby allowing the use of low doses of said compounds and avoiding or lessening side effects.
  • illustrative therapies which can be used with combinations of the invention are donepezil (CAS: 120014-06-4), galantamine (CAS: 357-70-0), gabapentine (CAS: 478296-72-9; 60142-96-3), rivastigmine (CAS: 123441-03-2) or memantine (CAS: 19982-08-2).
  • the above CAS numbers are only given in an illustrative way, and common salts, enantiomeric forms, racemates, prodrugs, metabolites or derivatives of the above compounds should be also considered.
  • the drug(s) or compositions according to the present invention may be further combined with Ginkgo Biloba extracts.
  • suitable extracts include, without limitation, Ginkgo biloba extracts, improved Ginkgo biloba extracts (for example enriched in active ingredients or lessened in contaminants) or any drug containing Ginkgo biloba extracts.
  • the drug(s) or compositions according to the present invention may be further combined with drugs or compounds which are currently under phase III clinical trial for AD.
  • drugs or compounds include Epigallocatechin-3-gallate, Human neutral insulin, Idalopirdine, Vanutide cridificar, Durin-Leuprolide acetate, Gantenerumab, Latrepirdine hydrochloride, Solanezumab, Masitinib mesylate, Encenicline hydrochloride, Leuco methylthioninium salt, IGIV, Lu-AE-58-054, VP4896, INM-176, R04909832, SK-PCB70M, AC-1204, and MK8931.
  • this invention relates to a combination of baclofen with a drug having an antagonist activity on GABA A receptors, as well as on Group I and II metabotropic receptors, and an agonist activity on glycinic receptors.
  • the invention relates to a combination of baclofen with a combination of drugs, said combination of drugs having an antagonistic activity toward GABA A receptors and Group I and II metabotropic receptors, as well as an agonistic activity toward glycinic channels.
  • Said combination of drugs used as an alternative to acamprosate can comprise 2, 3, 4, 5 or even 6 drugs in order to mimic the pleiotropic activity of acamprosate.
  • some of the drugs used in said composition act on several of the targets identified by the inventors. More preferably some of the drugs used in said composition act on 2, or 3 or 4 of the targets identified by the inventors.
  • the combination of drugs used as an alternative to acamprosate comprises 2, 3 or 4 drugs.
  • An agonistic or antagonistic activity toward a receptor/channel refers to a direct action on said receptor/channel or to an indirect action leading to the activation or inhibition of said receptor/channel.
  • An agonistic or antagonist activity also refers to a positive or negative allosteric modulation, respectively.
  • Drugs suitable to elaborate such a combination of drugs are listed in Table 4 below with their corresponding CAS number, IUPAC name or related articles, for illustrative purposes only.
  • said combination of drugs used as an alternative to acamprosate comprises at least one compound selected from ⁇ 5 TA, beta-Cce, beta-Ccm, beta-Cct, bicuculline, BTS-72-664, cicutoxin, clarithromycin, DMCM, FG71-42, FGIN-1-27, FGIN-1-44, flumazenil, gabazine, L-655708, lorediplon, MK0777, oenanthotoxin, pentetrazol, picrotoxin, pitrazepin, PWZ-029, R04882224, RO15-3505, Ro15-4513, RO-4938581, RU-5135, RY-023, RY-024, RY-024, RY-80, S8510, sarmazenil, SR-42641, SR-95103, thiocolchicoside, thujone, TP003, US-1010, or ZK-93423, which are known
  • said combination of drugs used as an alternative to acamprosate comprises thiocolchicoside.
  • antagonists or inverse agonists of the GABA A receptors of use can be, but are not limited to, one of those described in WO2011/153377, WO2012/059482, EP2457569, and WO2011/024115, which are herein incorporated by reference.
  • antagonists of the Group I metabotropic receptors that can be used in a combination of drugs used as an alternative to acamprosate may be, but are not limited to, one of those disclosed in WO2004014370A2, WO2004014881A2, WO2004014902A2, WO2005080356A1, WO2005080363A1, WO2005080386A1, WO2006014185A1, WO2007021574A1, WO2007021575A2, WO2007130825A2, WO2009051556A1, WO2009054785A1, WO2009054786A1, WO2009054789A1, WO2009054790A1, WO2009054791A1, WO2009054792A1, WO2009054793 A1, WO2009054794A1, WO2010123451A1, WO02068417A2, WO2005066155A1, WO2004000316A1, WO2005080379A1, WO2005080397A2, WO2007040982A
  • Antagonists of the Group I metabotropic receptors have been the focus of numerous research programs in drug discovery which are summarized by Jaeschke et al (2007) [50], Carroll (2008) [51] and Emmitte (2013) [52]. All the antagonists of the Group I metabotropic receptors disclosed in these reviews are incorporated herein by reference and can be considered to be used in a combination of drugs used as an alternative to acamprosate.
  • said combination of drugs used as an alternative to acamprosate comprises at least one compound selected from AIDA, A-794278, A-794282, A-841720, A-850002, Bay-36-7620, FTIDC, JNJ-16259685, LY-367385, RO0711401, YM-202074, YM-230888, YM-298198, ADX 10059, AZD-2066, AZD6538, AZD9272, basimglurant, dipraglurant, fenobam, GRN529, LY-344545, mavoglurant, MPEP, MRZ-8676, MTEP, rufinamide, SIB-1757, and SIB-1893, which are known as (direct or indirect) antagonists of the Group I metabotropic receptors.
  • said combination of drugs used as an alternative to acamprosate comprises rufinamide.
  • said combination of drugs used as an alternative to acamprosate comprises a compound selected from AIDA, A-794278, A-794282, A-841720, A-850002, Bay-36-7620, FTIDC, JNJ-16259685, LY-367385, RO0711401, YM-202074, YM-230888, YM-298198 and a compound selected from ADX 10059, AZD-2066, AZD6538, AZD9272, basimglurant, dipraglurant, fenobam, GRN529, LY-344545, mavoglurant, MPEP, MRZ-8676, MTEP, rufinamide, SIB-1757, and SIB-1893.
  • said combination of drugs used as an alternative to acamprosate comprises a compound acting as an antagonist of both mGluR1 and mGluR5 receptors.
  • combination of drugs used as an alternative to acamprosate comprises a drug that acts as an antagonist or negative allosteric modulator of mGluR2 or mGluR3 (group II) metabotropic glutamate receptors.
  • combination of drugs used as an alternative to acamprosate comprises a drug that acts as an antagonist or negative allosteric modulator of mGluR2 and mGluR3 (group II) metabotropic glutamate receptors.
  • Antagonists of group 11 metabotropic glutamate receptors comprise, but are not limited to, EGLU, APTCA, LY-341495, BCI-632 or its prodrugs BCI-1038, BCI-1206, BCI-1283, BCI-838, or one of the 2-amino-bicyclo [3.1.0] hexane-2,6-dicarboxylic ester derivatives disclosed in WO2005000791, US2012028982, US2012004232, US2010298561, US2009306408. US2007021394, or 5H-thiazolo (3,2-a) pyrimidine derivatives disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,958,931, which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • Negative allosteric modulators of the Group II metabotropic receptors that can be used in a combination of drugs used as an alternative to acamprosate comprise, but are not limited to, DT-2228 as disclosed in Froestl et al (2012) [53] and incorporated herein by reference, RG-1578, R04432717, RO4491533, dihydrobenzo [1,4] diazepin-2-one derivatives disclosed in Hempstapat et al 2007 [54] and incorporated herein by reference, and compounds described in WO 2014/064028, WO 01/29011, WO 01/29012, WO 02/083652, WO 02/083665, WO 02/098864, WO 03/066623, WO 2005/014002, WO 2005/040171, WO2005/123738, WO 2006/084634, WO 2006/099972, WO 2007/039439, WO 2007/110337 and WO 2008/119689 and incorporated herein by reference.
  • said combination of drugs used as an alternative to acamprosate comprises a drug that acts as an agonist or positive allosteric modulator of the glycinic channels.
  • said combination of drugs comprises anandamide, cycloserine, dimethylglycine, dronabinol, enflurane, glycine, halothane, HU 210, hypotaurine, isoflurane, milacemide, sarcosine, serine, sevoflurane, taurine, trimethylglycine, D and/or L alanine, or ⁇ alanine, which are known as agonists or positive allosteric modulators of the glycinic channels.
  • agonists or positive allosteric modulators of the glycinic channels that can be used in said combination of drugs comprise propofol derivatives described in WO 2010/067069, which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • Agonists or positive allosteric modulators of the glycinic channels also comprise, but are not limited to, tropines and nortropines which are described in Maksay el al. (2007) [55] and are also herein incorporated by reference, as well as those listed in Yevenes & Zeilhofer [56].
  • Therapy according to the invention may be provided at home, the doctor's office, a clinic, a hospital's outpatient department, or a hospital, so that the doctor can observe the therapy's effects closely and make any adjustments that are needed.
  • the duration of the therapy depends on the stage of the disease being treated, age and condition of the patient, and how the patient responds to the treatment.
  • the dosage, frequency and mode of administration of each component of the combination can be controlled independently. For example, one drug may be administered orally while the second drug may be administered intramuscularly.
  • Combination therapy may be given in on-and-off cycles that include rest periods so that the patient's body has a chance to recover from any as yet unforeseen side effects.
  • the drugs may also be formulated together such that one administration delivers all drugs.
  • each drug of the combination may be by any suitable means that results in a concentration of the drug that, combined with the other component, is able to ameliorate the patient's condition or efficiently treat the disease or disorder.
  • compositions include those suitable for oral, rectal, topical (including transdermal, buccal and sublingual), or parenteral (including subcutaneous, intramuscular, intravenous and intradermal) administration.
  • the invention further includes a pharmaceutical formulation, as herein before described, in combination with packaging material suitable for said formulation.
  • a formulation for the combination treatment can be inferred by instructions, facilities, provisions, adaptations and/or other means to help use the formulation most suitably for the treatment.
  • Such measures make a patient pack specifically suitable for and adapted for use for treatment with the combination of the present invention.
  • the drug may be contained, in any appropriate amount, in any suitable carrier substance.
  • the drug may be present in an amount of up to 99% by weight of the total weight of the composition.
  • the composition may be provided in a dosage form that is suitable for the oral, parenteral (e.g., intravenous, intramuscular), rectal, cutaneous, nasal, vaginal, inhalant, skin (patch), or ocular administration route.
  • the composition may be in the form of, e.g., tablets, capsules, pills, powders, granulates, suspensions, emulsions, solutions, gels including hydrogels, pastes, ointments, creams, plasters, drenches, osmotic delivery devices, suppositories, enemas, injectables, implants, sprays, or aerosols.
  • compositions may be formulated according to conventional pharmaceutical practice (see, e.g., Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy (20th ed.), ed. A. R. Gennaro, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2000 and Encyclopedia of Pharmaceutical Technology, eds. J. Swarbrick and J. C. Boylan, 1988-1999, Marcel Dekker, New York).
  • compositions according to the invention may be formulated to release the active drug substantially immediately upon administration or at any predetermined time or time period after administration.
  • the controlled release formulations include (i) formulations that create a substantially constant concentration of the drug within the body over an extended period of time; (ii) formulations that after a predetermined lag time create a substantially constant concentration of the drug within the body over an extended period of time, (iii) formulations that sustain drug action during a predetermined time period by maintaining a relatively constant, effective drug level in the body with concomitant minimization of undesirable side effects associated with fluctuations in the plasma level of the active drug substance; (iv) formulations that localize drug action by, e.g., spatial placement of a controlled release composition adjacent to or in the diseased tissue or organ; and (v) formulations that target drug action by using carriers or chemical derivatives to deliver the drug to a particular target cell type.
  • Administration of drugs in the form of a controlled release formulation is especially preferred in cases in which the drug has (i) a narrow therapeutic index (i.e., the difference between the plasma concentration leading to harmful side effects or toxic reactions and the plasma concentration leading to a therapeutic effect is small; in general, the therapeutic index, TI, is defined as the ratio of median lethal dose (LD50) to median effective dose (ED50)); (ii) a narrow absorption window in the gastrointestinal tract; or (iii) a very short biological half-life so that frequent dosing during a day is required in order to sustain the plasma level at a therapeutic level.
  • a narrow therapeutic index i.e., the difference between the plasma concentration leading to harmful side effects or toxic reactions and the plasma concentration leading to a therapeutic effect is small
  • the therapeutic index, TI is defined as the ratio of median lethal dose (LD50) to median effective dose (ED50)
  • LD50 median lethal dose
  • ED50 median effective dose
  • a narrow absorption window in the gastrointestinal tract or
  • Controlled release may be obtained by appropriate selection of various formulation parameters and ingredients, including, e.g., various types of controlled release compositions and coatings.
  • the drug is formulated with appropriate excipients into a pharmaceutical composition that, upon administration, releases the drug in a controlled manner (single or multiple unit tablet or capsule compositions, oil solutions, suspensions, emulsions, microcapsules, microspheres, nanoparticles, patches, and liposomes).
  • Solid Dosage Forms for Oral Use Formulations for oral use include tablets containing the composition of the invention in a mixture with non-toxic pharmaceutically acceptable excipients.
  • excipients may be, for example, inert diluents or fillers (e.g., sucrose, microcrystalline cellulose, starches including potato starch, calcium carbonate, sodium chloride, calcium phosphate, calcium sulfate, or sodium phosphate); granulating and disintegrating agents (e.g., cellulose derivatives including microcrystalline cellulose, starches including potato starch, croscarmellose sodium, alginates, or alginic acid); binding agents (e.g., acacia, alginic acid, sodium alginate, gelatin, starch, pregelatinized starch, microcrystalline cellulose, carboxymethylcellulose sodium, methylcellulose, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, ethylcellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone, or polyethylene glycol); or lubricating agents, gli
  • the tablets may be uncoated or they may be coated by known techniques, optionally to delay disintegration and absorption in the gastrointestinal tract and thereby provide a sustained action over a longer period.
  • the coating may be adapted to release the active drug substance in a predetermined pattern (e.g., in order to achieve a controlled release formulation) or it may be adapted not to release the active drug substance until after passage of the stomach (enteric coating).
  • the coating may be a sugar coating, a film coating (e.g., based on hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, methylcellulose, methyl hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, carboxymethylcellulose, acrylate copolymers, polyethylene glycols and/or polyvinylpyrrolidone), or an enteric coating (e.g., based on methacrylic acid copolymer, cellulose acetate phthalate, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose phthalate, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose acetate succinate, polyvinyl acetate phthalate, shellac, and/or ethylcellulose).
  • a time delay material such as, e.g., glyceryl monostearate or glyceryl distearate may be employed.
  • the solid tablet compositions may include a coating adapted to protect the composition from unwanted chemical changes, (e.g., chemical degradation prior to the release of the active drug substance).
  • the coating may be applied on the solid dosage form in a similar manner to that described in Encyclopedia of Pharmaceutical Technology.
  • Drugs may be mixed together in the tablet, or may be partitioned.
  • a first drug is contained on the inside of the tablet, and a second drug is on the outside, such that a substantial portion of the second drug is released prior to the release of the first drug.
  • Formulations for oral use may also be presented as chewable tablets, or as hard gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with an inert solid diluent (e.g., potato starch, microcrystalline cellulose, calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate or kaolin), or as soft gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with water or an oil medium, for example, liquid paraffin or olive oil. Powders and granulates may be prepared using the ingredients mentioned above under tablets and capsules in a conventional manner.
  • an inert solid diluent e.g., potato starch, microcrystalline cellulose, calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate or kaolin
  • an oil medium for example, liquid paraffin or olive oil.
  • Controlled release compositions for oral use may, e.g., be constructed to release the active drug by controlling the dissolution and/or the diffusion of the active drug substance.
  • Dissolution or diffusion-controlled release can be achieved by appropriate coating of a tablet, capsule, pellet, or granulated formulation of drugs, or by incorporating the drug into an appropriate matrix.
  • a controlled release coating may include one or more of the coating substances mentioned above and/or, e.g., shellac, beeswax, glycowax, castor wax, carnauba wax, stearyl alcohol, glyceryl monostearate, glyceryl distearate, glycerol palmitostearate, ethylcellulose, acrylic resins, dl-polylactic acid, cellulose acetate butyrate, polyvinyl chloride, polyvinyl acetate, vinyl pyrrolidone, polyethylene, polymethacrylate, methylmethacrylate, 2-hydroxymethacrylate, methacrylate hydrogel, 1,3 butylene glycol, ethylene glycol methacrylate, and/or polyethylene glycol.
  • the matrix material may also include, e.g., hydrated methylcellulose, carnauba wax and stearyl alcohol, carbopol 934, silicone, glyceryl tristearate, methyl acrylate-methyl methacrylate, polyvinyl chloride, polyethylene, and/or halogenated fluorocarbon.
  • a controlled release composition containing one or more of the drugs of the claimed combinations may also be in the form of a buoyant tablet or capsule (i.e., a tablet or capsule that, upon oral administration, floats on top of the gastric content for a certain period of time).
  • a buoyant tablet formulation of the drug(s) can be prepared by granulating a mixture of the drug(s) with excipients and 20-75% w/w of hydrocolloids, such as hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, or hydroxypropylmethylcellulose. The obtained granules can then be compressed into tablets. On contact with the gastric juice, the tablet forms a substantially water-impermeable gel barrier around its surface. This gel barrier takes part in maintaining a density of less than one, thereby allowing the tablet to remain buoyant in the gastric juice.
  • Powders, dispersible powders, or granules suitable for preparation of an aqueous suspension by addition of water are convenient dosage forms for oral administration.
  • Formulation as a suspension provides the active ingredient in a mixture with a dispersing or wetting agent, suspending agent, and one or more preservatives.
  • Suitable suspending agents are, for example, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose, sodium alginate, and the like.
  • the pharmaceutical composition may also be administered parenterally by injection, infusion or implantation (intravenous, intramuscular, subcutaneous, or the like) in dosage forms, formulations, or via suitable delivery devices or implants containing conventional, non-toxic pharmaceutically acceptable carriers and adjuvants.
  • injection, infusion or implantation intravenous, intramuscular, subcutaneous, or the like
  • suitable delivery devices or implants containing conventional, non-toxic pharmaceutically acceptable carriers and adjuvants.
  • compositions for parenteral use may be provided in unit dosage forms (e.g., in single-dose ampoules), or in vials containing several doses and in which a suitable preservative may be added (see below).
  • the composition may be in form of a solution, a suspension, an emulsion, an infusion device, or a delivery device for implantation or it may be presented as a dry powder to be reconstituted with water or another suitable vehicle before use.
  • the composition may include suitable parenterally acceptable carriers and/or excipients.
  • the active drug(s) may be incorporated into microspheres, microcapsules, nanoparticles, liposomes, or the like for controlled release.
  • the composition may include suspending, solubilizing, stabilizing, pH-adjusting, and/or dispersing agents.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions according to the invention may be in a form suitable for sterile injection.
  • the suitable active drug(s) are dissolved or suspended in a parenterally acceptable liquid vehicle.
  • acceptable vehicles and solvents that may be employed are water, water adjusted to a suitable pH by addition of an appropriate amount of hydrochloric acid, sodium hydroxide or a suitable buffer, 1,3-butanediol, Ringer's solution, and isotonic sodium chloride solution.
  • the aqueous formulation may also contain one or more preservatives (e.g., methyl, ethyl or n-propyl p-hydroxybenzoate).
  • a dissolution enhancing or solubilizing agent can be added, or the solvent may include 10-60% w/w of propylene glycol or the like.
  • Controlled release parenteral compositions may be in form of aqueous suspensions, microspheres, microcapsules, magnetic microspheres, oil solutions, oil suspensions, or emulsions.
  • the active drug(s) may be incorporated in biocompatible carriers, liposomes, nanoparticles, implants, or infusion devices.
  • Materials for use in the preparation of microspheres and/or microcapsules are, e.g., biodegradable/bioerodible polymers such as polygalactin, poly-(isobutyl cyanoacrylate), and poly(2-hydroxyethyl-L-glutamine).
  • Biocompatible carriers that may be used when formulating a controlled release parenteral formulation are carbohydrates (e.g., dextrans), proteins (e.g., albumin), lipoproteins, or antibodies.
  • Materials for use in implants can be non-biodegradable (e.g., polydimethyl siloxane) or biodegradable (e.g., poly(caprolactone), poly(glycolic acid) or poly(ortho esters)).
  • suitable dosage forms for a composition include suppositories (emulsion or suspension type) and rectal gelatin capsules (solutions or suspensions).
  • the active drug(s) are combined with an appropriate pharmaceutically acceptable suppository base such as cocoa butter, esterified fatty acids, glycerinated gelatin, and various water-soluble or dispersible bases like polyethylene glycol.
  • an appropriate pharmaceutically acceptable suppository base such as cocoa butter, esterified fatty acids, glycerinated gelatin, and various water-soluble or dispersible bases like polyethylene glycol.
  • additives, enhancers, or surfactants may be incorporated.
  • compositions may also be administered topically on the skin for percutaneous absorption in dosage forms or formulations containing conventionally non-toxic pharmaceutical acceptable carriers and excipients including microspheres and liposomes.
  • the formulations include creams, ointments, lotions, liniments, gels, hydrogels, solutions, suspensions, sticks, sprays, pastes, plasters, and other kinds of transdermal drug delivery systems.
  • the pharmaceutically acceptable carriers or excipients may include emulsifying agents, antioxidants, buffering agents, preservatives, humectants, penetration enhancers, chelating agents, gel-forming agents, ointment bases, perfumes, and skin protective agents.
  • the preservatives, humectants, and penetration enhancers may be parabens, such as methyl or propyl p-hydroxybenzoate, benzalkonium chloride, glycerin, propylene glycol, urea, etc.
  • compositions described above for topical administration on the skin may also be used in connection with topical administration onto or close to the part of the body that is to be treated.
  • the compositions may be adapted for direct application or for application by means of special drug delivery devices such as dressings or, alternatively, plasters, pads, sponges, strips, or other forms of suitable flexible material.
  • the drugs of the combination may be administered concomitantly, either in the same or different pharmaceutical formulation or sequentially. If there is sequential administration, the delay in administering the second (or additional) active ingredient should not be such as to lose the benefit of the efficacious effect of the combination of the active ingredients.
  • a minimum requirement for a combination according to this description is that the combination should be intended for combined use with the benefit of the efficacious effect of the combination of the active ingredients. The intended use of a combination can be inferred by facilities, provisions, adaptations and/or other means to help use the combination according to the invention.
  • Therapeutically effective amounts of the drugs in a combination of this invention include, e.g., amounts that are effective for reducing Alzheimer's disease symptoms, halting or slowing the progression of the disease once it has become clinically manifest, or preventing or reducing the risk of developing the disease.
  • the active drugs of the present invention may be administered in divided doses, for example two or three times daily, a single daily dose of each drug in the combination is preferred, with a single daily dose of all drugs in a single pharmaceutical composition (unit dosage form) being most preferred.
  • Administration can be one to several times daily for several days to several years, and may even be for the life of the patient. Chronic or at least periodically repeated long-term administration is indicated in most cases.
  • unit dosage form refers to physically discrete units (such as capsules, tablets, or loaded syringe cylinders) suitable as unitary dosages for human subjects, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active material or materials calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect, in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier.
  • the amount of each drug in a preferred unit dosage composition depends upon several factors including the administration method, the body weight and the age of the patient, the stage of the disease, and the risk of potential side effects considering the general health status of the person to be treated. Additionally, pharmacogenomic (the effect of genotype on the pharmacokinetic, pharmacodynamic or efficacy profile of a therapeutic) information about a particular patient may affect the dosage used.
  • the preferred dosage of each drug in the combination will usually lie within the range of doses not above the dosage usually prescribed for long-term maintenance treatment or proven to be safe in phase 3 clinical studies.
  • each compound may be used at low doses in a combination therapy, while producing, in combination, a substantial clinical benefit to the patient.
  • the combination therapy may indeed be effective at doses where the compounds individually have little or no effect.
  • a particular advantage of the invention lies in the ability to use sub-optimal doses of each compound, i.e., doses which are lower than therapeutic doses usually prescribed, preferably 1 ⁇ 2 of therapeutic doses, more preferably 1 ⁇ 3, 1 ⁇ 4, 1 ⁇ 5, or even more preferably 1/10 of therapeutic doses.
  • doses as low as 1/20, 1/30, 1/50, 1/100, or even lower, of therapeutic doses are used.
  • the compounds would exhibit no side effects, while the combination(s) according to the invention are fully effective in treating Alzheimer's disease or AD related diseases.
  • a preferred dosage corresponds to amounts from 1% up to 50% of those usually prescribed for long-term maintenance treatment.
  • the most preferred dosage may correspond to amounts from 1% up to 10% of those usually prescribed for long-term maintenance treatment.
  • composition comprises, as active ingredients, only baclofen and acamprosate
  • these two compounds may be used in different ratios, e.g., at a weight ratio of acamprosate/baclofen comprised from between 0.05 to 1000 (W:W), preferably between 0.05 to 100 (W:W), more preferably between 0.05 to 50 (W:W).
  • the above compounds in the therapies of the invention can be used as specifically designated per se, as well as any pharmaceutically acceptable salts, enantiomers, racemates, prodrugs, metabolites or derivatives thereof.
  • combinatorial therapies of the invention comprise administering between 0.4 mg and 50 mg acamprosate and 6 mg to 15 mg baclofen, twice daily.
  • combinatorial therapies of the invention comprise administering 0.4 mg acamprosate and 6 mg baclofen, twice daily.
  • combinatorial therapies of the invention comprise administering 1 mg acamprosate and 15 mg baclofen, twice daily.
  • combinatorial therapies of the invention comprise administering 10 mg acamprosate and 6 mg baclofen, twice daily.
  • combinatorial therapies of the invention comprise administering 20 mg acamprosate and 12 mg baclofen, twice daily.
  • combinatorial therapies of the invention comprise administering 40 mg acamprosate and 12 mg baclofen, twice daily.
  • therapies of the invention also comprise administering donepezil or memantine either at their usual dose and regimen (i.e., as an add-on therapy) or even at a lower dose, from 1% up to 50% of those usually prescribed for the treatment of AD.
  • combinatorial therapies of the invention further comprise administering 0.6 mg donepezil twice daily.
  • combinatorial therapies of the invention comprise administering between 0.4 mg and 50 mg of acamprosate, 6 mg to 15 mg baclofen, and 0.6 mg donepezil, twice daily.
  • combinatorial therapies comprise administering 0.4 mg acamprosate, 6 mg baclofen, and 0.6 mg donepezil, twice daily.
  • combinatorial therapies of the invention comprise administering 1 mg acamprosate, 15 mg baclofen, and 0.6 mg donepezil, twice daily.
  • combinatorial therapies of the invention comprise administering 20 mg acamprosate, 12 mg baclofen, and 0.6 mg donepezil, twice daily.
  • combinatorial therapies of the invention comprise administering 40 mg acamprosate, 12 mg baclofen, and 0.6 mg donepezil, twice daily.
  • the compounds in a combinatorial therapy of the invention may be administered simultaneously, separately, sequentially and/or repeatedly to the subject.
  • the above dosing regimens can be simultaneously orally administered using suitable tablets.
  • a particular object of this invention relates to a tablet comprising acamprosate and baclofen, suitable for the dosing regimen of a dose of acamprosate between 0.4 and 50 mg and a dose of baclofen between 6 and 15 mg, to be administered twice daily.
  • a further particular object of this invention relates to a tablet comprising acamprosate and baclofen, suitable for the dosing regimen of 0.4 mg acamprosate and 6 mg baclofen, twice daily.
  • Another particular object of this invention relates to a tablet comprising acamprosate and baclofen, suitable for the dosing regimen of 1 mg acamprosate and 15 mg baclofen, twice daily.
  • Another particular object of this invention relates to a tablet comprising acamprosate and baclofen, suitable for the dosing regimen of 20 mg acamprosate and 12 mg baclofen, to be administered twice daily.
  • a particular object of this invention relates to a tablet comprising acamprosate and baclofen, suitable for the dosing regimen of 40 mg acamprosate and 12 mg baclofen, to be administered twice daily.
  • An even more particular object of this invention relates to a tablet comprising baclofen, acamprosate and donepezil, said tablet being suitable for any of the above mentioned dosages of baclofen and acamprosate and also for the dosing regimen of 0.6 mg donepezil, twice daily.
  • a more particular object of the invention is a scored tablet suitable for the administration of any of the above dosing regimens, said tablet being cleavable in 2, 3 and/or 4 part as a function of the dose to be administered at each taking.
  • combinations of the invention can be provided in the form of a unit dosage package, such unit dosage package being configured to hold a first unit dosage comprising acamprosate and a second unit dosage comprising baclofen.
  • unit dosages are tablets.
  • the first unit dosage comprises between 0.4 and 50 mg of acamprosate and the second unit dosage comprises between 6 and 15 mg baclofen.
  • the first unit dosage is suitable for the dosing regimen of 0.4 mg acamprosate, twice daily.
  • the first unit dosage is suitable for the dosing regimen of 1 mg acamprosate, twice daily.
  • the first unit dosage is suitable for the dosing regimen of 20 mg acamprosate, twice daily.
  • the first unit dosage is suitable for the dosing regimen of 40 mg acamprosate, twice daily.
  • the first unit dosage is suitable for the dosing regimen of 1 mg acamprosate, twice daily.
  • the second unit dosage is suitable for the dosing regimen of 6 mg baclofen, twice daily.
  • the second unit dosage is suitable for the dosing regimen of 12 mg baclofen, twice daily.
  • the second unit dosage is suitable for the dosing regimen of 15 mg baclofen, twice daily.
  • the above mentioned unit dosage package comprises a third unit dosage comprising donepezil.
  • this third unit dosage is suitable for the dosing regimen of 0.6 mg donepezil, twice daily.
  • said unit dosage package contains a number of unit dosages suitable for 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 days of treatment or even more, preferably several weeks of treatment.
  • the amount of the drug actually administered will be determined by a physician, in light of the relevant circumstances including the condition to be treated, the exact composition to be administered, the age, weight, and response of the individual patient, the severity of the patient's symptoms, and the chosen route of administration. Therefore, the above dosage ranges are intended to provide general guidance and support for the teachings herein, but are not intended to limit the scope of the invention.
  • a ⁇ 1-42 is the full-length peptide that constitutes aggregates found in biopsies from human patients afflicted with AD. The effect is determined on various cell types, to further document the activity of the combinations in in vitro models which illustrate different physiological features of AD. In vivo studies are also performed in a mouse model for AD, confirming this protective effect by evaluating the effect of the combinations on i) the cognitive performance of the animals and ii) molecular hallmarks (apoptosis induction, oxidative stress induction, inflammation pathway induction) of AD. Clinical results show that baclofen and acamprosate-based compositions are actually efficient in improving cognitive performance, as well as in correcting electrophysiological disturbances observed in patients diagnosed with mild AD.
  • HBMEC Human Brain Microvascular Endothelial Cells
  • HBMEC cultures were used to study the protection afforded by candidate compound(s) on A ⁇ 1-42 toxicity.
  • HBMEC (ScienCell Ref: 1000, frozen at passage 10) were rapidly thawed in a water bath at +37° C. The supernatant was immediately put in 9 ml Dulbecco's modified Eagle's medium (DMEM; Pan Biotech ref: P04-03600) containing 10% fetal calf serum (FCS; GIBCO ref 10270-106). Cell suspension was centrifuged at 180 ⁇ g for 10 min at +4° C. and the pellets were suspended in CSC serum-free medium (CSC serum-free medium.
  • DMEM Dulbecco's modified Eagle's medium
  • FCS 10% fetal calf serum
  • a ⁇ 1-42 peptide (Bachem, ref: H1368 batch 1010533) was reconstituted in defined culture medium at 20 ⁇ M (mother solution) and was slowly shaken at +37° C. for 3 days in the dark.
  • the control medium was prepared in the same conditions.
  • human amyloid peptide was used on HBMEC at 2.5 ⁇ M diluted in control medium (optimal incubation time).
  • the A ⁇ 1-42 peptide was added 2 hours after HBMEC seeding on matrigel for 18 hours incubation.
  • test compounds and VEGF-165 were solved in culture medium (+0.1% DMSO) and then pre-incubated with HBMEC for 1 hour before the A ⁇ 1-42 application (in a final volume per culture well of 100 ⁇ l).
  • test compounds or VEGF incubation two hours after cell seeding on matrigel
  • 1001l of A ⁇ 1-42 peptide was added to a final concentration of 2.5 ⁇ M diluted in control medium in the presence of test compounds or VEGF (in a 200 ⁇ l total volume/well), in order to avoid further drug dilutions
  • VEGF-165 known to be a pro-angiogenic isoform of VEGF-A, was used for all experiments in this study as reference compound.
  • VEGF-165 is one of the most abundant VEGF isoforms involved in angiogenesis.
  • VEGF was used as reference test compound at 10 nM ( FIG. 1 ).
  • the baclofen-acamprosate combination gives a significant protective effect against toxicity of human A ⁇ 1-42 peptide in an HBMEC model (a reduction of 24% of A ⁇ 1-42 peptide injury is observed), as shown in FIG. 2 .
  • baclofen and terbinafine affords a weaker protection (a reduction of 15% of A ⁇ 1-42 peptide injury is observed) against A ⁇ 1-42 ( FIG. 3 ).
  • baclofen-acamprosate clearly stands out. Indeed, these drugs at concentrations having no effect alone allow significant protection of human HBMEC against A ⁇ 1-42 when used in combination. Furthermore, the baclofen-acamprosate combination is more effective than the baclofen-terbinafine combination. Such an effect of baclofen and acamprosate represents a remarkable improvement, by 60%, in comparison to, e.g., the effect of the combination of baclofen-terbinafine.
  • the concentration of baclofen used in the baclofen-acamprosate combination is much lower than the concentration of baclofen used in the baclofen-terbinafine combination (25-fold reduction).
  • Rat cortical neurons were cultured as described by Singer et al. [58]. Briefly pregnant female rats of 15 days gestation were killed by cervical dislocation (Rats: Wistar) and the foetuses were removed from the uterus. The cortex was removed and placed in ice-cold medium of Leibovitz (L15) containing 2% of Penicillin 10,000 U/ml and Streptomycin 10 mg/ml and 1% of bovine serum albumin (BSA). Cortices were dissociated by trypsin for 20 min at 37° C. (0.05%). The reaction was stopped by the addition of Dulbecco's modified Eagle's medium (DMEM) containing DNaseI grade II and 10% of foetal calf serum (FCS).
  • DMEM Dulbecco's modified Eagle's medium
  • Cells were then mechanically dissociated by 3 serial passages through a 10 ml pipette and centrifuged at 515 ⁇ g for 10 min at +4° C. The supernatant was discarded and the pellet of cells was re-suspended in a defined culture medium consisting of Neurobasal supplemented with B27 (2%), L-glutamine (0.2 mM), 2% of PS solution and 10 ng/ml of BDNF. Viable cells were counted in a Neubauer cytometer using the trypan blue exclusion test.
  • the cells were seeded at a density of 30,000 cells/well in 96-well plates (wells were pre-coated with poly-L-lysine (10 ⁇ g/ml)) and were cultured at +37° C. in a humidified air (95%)/CO 2 (5%) atmosphere.
  • a ⁇ 1-42 peptide was reconstituted in defined culture medium at 40 ⁇ M (mother solution) and was slowly shaken at +37° C. for 3 days in the dark.
  • the control medium was prepared in the same conditions.
  • test compounds were solved in culture medium (+0.1% DMSO) and then pre-incubated with neurons for one hour before the A ⁇ 1-42 application (in a final volume per culture well of 100 ⁇ l).
  • 100 ⁇ l of A ⁇ 1-42 peptide was added to a final concentration of 10 ⁇ M diluted in the presence of the drug(s), in order to avoid further test compound(s) dilutions.
  • Cortical neurons were intoxicated for 24 h. Three separate cultures were performed per condition, 6 wells per condition.
  • BDNF 50 ng/ml
  • Estradiol- ⁇ 150 nM
  • Estradiol- ⁇ at 150 nM was used as a positive control ( FIG. 4 ).
  • Estradiol- ⁇ was solved in culture medium and pre-incubated for 1 h before the amyloid- ⁇ 1-42 application.
  • baclofen and acamprosate induces a significant protective effect against the toxicity of human A ⁇ 1-42 peptide (improvement of 34% of cell survival) in primary cortical neuron cells, as shown in FIG. 5 .
  • baclofen-acamprosate stands out clearly. Indeed, at concentrations having no effect alone, the drugs cause a significant protection of primary cortical neuron cells against A ⁇ 1-42 when used in combination. Furthermore, the baclofen-acamprosate combination is much more effective than the sulfisoxazole-cinacalcet combination Such an effect of baclofen and acamprosate represents a remarkable improvement by 60% in comparison to, e.g., the effect of the combination of sulfisoxazole and cinacalcet.
  • baclofen-acamprosate combinations in several in vitro models of Alzheimer's disease.
  • the effect observed is highly superior to that provoked by other baclofen-based combination therapies (e.g., baclofen-terbinafine), or other active combination therapies (sulfisoxazole-cinacalcet).
  • baclofen-based combination therapies e.g., baclofen-terbinafine
  • active combination therapies sulfisoxazole-cinacalcet
  • Mitochondrial dysfunction is thought to play a critical role in AD by producing two major cellular consequences: oxidative stress and cell death by apoptosis.
  • the effect of baclofen-acamprosate treatment on oxidative stress and apoptosis generated by A ⁇ oligomers has been assessed by measuring the oxidation of methionine residues (methionine sulfoxide, MetO) and by measuring the release of mitochondrial cytochrome C (Cyto C, as a marker of early apoptosis) into the cytoplasm of intoxicated neuronal cells.
  • MetO methionine sulfoxide
  • Cyto C mitochondrial cytochrome C
  • the effect on A ⁇ -induced apoptosis was further confirmed by measuring the level of caspase 3, a marker of late apoptosis.
  • AD hyperphosphorylated Tau proteins
  • Nuclei were counter-stained with Hoechst (Sigma). For MetO and Cyto c on the one hand, and pTau on the other hand, 20 and 10 pictures with 20 ⁇ and 40 ⁇ magnifications respectively were taken per well using the InCell AnalyzerTM 1000 (GE Healthcare, France)
  • results presented in FIG. 21 show that the baclofen-acamprosate combination corrects the major hallmarks of AD. Indeed, treatment with the baclofen-acamprosate combination leads to a protection against oxidative stress, as demonstrated by a significantly lower content in methionine sulfoxide residues (MetO) in A ⁇ -intoxicated cells treated with baclofen-acamprosate when compared to non-treated intoxicated cells ( FIG. 21 A). A marked reduction of the release of mitochondrial cytochrome C is also noticed in baclofen-acamprosate treated A ⁇ -intoxicated cells thereby showing that the combination is efficient in protecting the neuronal cells from A ⁇ induced apoptosis. ( FIG. 21 B).
  • MethodO methionine sulfoxide residues
  • Baclofen-acamprosate combination is thus efficient in counteracting oxidative stress, apoptosis, hyperphosphorylated Tau accumulation, and glutamate excitotoxicity induced in neuronal cells by AB oligomers.
  • These surprising properties can, at least in part, account for the observed neuroprotective properties of the composition and for the actual correction of the disease.
  • Such properties are of a particular interest for the treatment of AD and related disorders, but also in the treatment of other neurological disorders which share some of these features with AD.
  • the control of the events leading to the accumulation of pTau by the administration of the baclofen-acamprosate combination is particularly relevant when considering the treatment of Tau pathologies such as frontotemporal dementia.
  • Rat cortical neurons were cultured as described by Singer el al. [58]. Briefly pregnant female rats of 15 days gestation were killed by cervical dislocation (Rats: Wistar) and the foetuses were removed from the uterus. The cortex was removed and placed in ice-cold medium of Leibovitz (L15) containing 2% of Penicillin 10,000 U/ml and Streptomycin 10 mg/ml and 1% of bovine serum albumin (BSA). Cortices were dissociated by trypsin for 20 min at 37° C. (0.05%). The reaction was stopped by the addition of Dulbecco's modified Eagle's medium (DMEM) containing DNaseI grade II and 10% of foetal calf serum (FCS).
  • DMEM Dulbecco's modified Eagle's medium
  • Cells were then mechanically dissociated by 3 serial passages through a 10 ml pipette and centrifuged at 515 ⁇ g for 10 min at +4° C. The supernatant was discarded and the pellet of cells was re-suspended in a defined culture medium consisting of Neurobasal supplemented with B27 (2%), L-glutamine (0.2 mM), 2% of PS solution and 10 ng/ml of BDNF. Viable cells were counted in a Neubauer cytometer using the trypan blue exclusion test.
  • the cells were seeded at a density of 30,000 cells/well in 96-well plates (wells were pre-coated with poly-L-lysine (10 ⁇ g/ml)) and were cultured at +37° C. in a humidified air (95%)/CO 2 (5%) atmosphere.
  • BDNF beta-amyloid (1-42; Bachem) in defined medium without BDNF but together with drugs.
  • Cortical neurons are intoxicated for 24 hours.
  • BDNF (10 ng/ml) is used as a positive (neuroprotective) control. Three independent cultures were performed per condition, 6 wells per condition.
  • MAP-2 monoclonal antibody anti microtubule-associated-protein 2
  • SYN anti-synaptophysin
  • P246, Sigma anti-PSD95
  • baclofen and acamprosate induces a significant protective effect against the toxicity of human A ⁇ 1-42 peptide (improvement of 80% of neurite network) in primary cortical neuron cells as shown in FIG. 7 .
  • the total length of the neurite network in primary cortical neuron cells treated with this combination is no more significantly different from control cells.
  • this combination allows an effective protection of cortical neuron cells against the toxicity of human A ⁇ 1-42 peptide but also a neurite growth comparable to a sane cortical neuron cell.
  • Hippocampus brain area is a key player in the building processes of memory; also, hippocampus atrophy is one of the most accurate pieces of evidence used in the diagnosis of AD.
  • a ⁇ is known to have a synaptotoxic activity which underlies the early cognitive decline in AD.
  • Rat hippocampal neurons were cultured as described by Harrison (1990) [59]. Pregnant females (Wistar, Janvier) at 17 days of gestation were killed by cervical dislocation.
  • Fetuses were collected and immediately placed in ice-cold Leibovitz (L15; Panbiotech) containing 2% of Penicillin 10,000 U/ml and Streptomycin 10 mg/ml (PS; Panbiotech) and 1% of bovine serum albumin (BSA; Panbiotech). Hippocampi were dissociated by trypsin (0.05%, Panbiotech) for 20 min at 37° C. The reaction had been stopped by the addition of Dulbecco's modified Eagle's medium (DMEM; Panbiotech) containing DNAase I grade II (0.5 mg/ml; Panbiotech) and 10% of foetal calf serum (FCS; Invitrogen).
  • DMEM Dulbecco's modified Eagle's medium
  • FCS foetal calf serum
  • Cells were then mechanically dissociated by 3 passages through a 10 ml pipette. Cells were centrifuged at 515 g for 10 min at +4° C. The supernatant was discarded and pellet of cells was re-suspended in a defined culture medium consisting of Neurobasal (Invitrogen) supplemented with B27 (2%; Invitrogen), L-glutamine (2 mM; Panbiotech), 2% of PS solution and 10 ng/ml of brain-derived neurotrophic factor (BDNF, Panbiotech).
  • Neurobasal Invitrogen
  • B27 2%
  • Invitrogen L-glutamine
  • PS solution 10 ng/ml of brain-derived neurotrophic factor
  • Viable cells were counted in a Neubauer cytometer, using the trypan blue exclusion test, then seeded at a density of 20,000 per well in a 96-well plates pre-coated with poly-L-Lysine (Greiner) and cultured at 37° C. in an air (95%)-CO2 (5%) incubator. The medium was changed every 2 days.
  • BDNF (50 ng/ml) has been used as positive control and reference compound.
  • Results were expressed in ⁇ m 2 per field. For each well of culture, 40 pictures per well were taken using InCell AnalyzerTM 2000 (GE Healthcare) with 60 ⁇ magnification. Colocalization of the two labellings corresponds to intact synapses. The area was automatically evaluated with Developer system analysis (GE Healthcare). PSD95 and synaptophysin total surface overlap was quantified (in ⁇ m 2 ) and computed for each condition.
  • Results show that A ⁇ 1-42 (0.3 ⁇ M) intoxication induces a significant lowering of PSD95 and synaptophysin colocalization surface (almost 34%, FIG. 20 , black bar) when compared to non-intoxicated cells cultures.
  • Incubation with the baclofen-acamprosate (80 nM and 0.32 nM respectively) combination is found to significantly reverse A ⁇ 1-42 oligomer toxicity toward synapse junctions: a 62% increase in colocalization area is observed when compared to non-treated cells ( FIG. 20 , light grey bar).
  • the baclofen-acamprosate combination is efficient in maintaining synaptic junctions between hippocampal cells even in the presence of A ⁇ oligomers.
  • Baclofen-acamprosate therapy is thus efficient in maintaining synapse function in the presence of A ⁇ oligomers; together with the neuritis growth protection as mentioned above, this therapy can be thus considered as of particular interest for protecting synaptic plasticity and cellular networking which is impaired in AD.
  • BDNF at 50 ng/ml was used as a positive control.
  • Total neuronal survival was evaluated by numbering MAP-2 positive neuronal cell bodies. Ten pictures per well of culture were taken using InCell AnalyzerTM 2000 (GE Healthcare) with 20 ⁇ magnification. The number of neurons was automatically evaluated with Developer system analysis (GE Healthcare).
  • Acamprosate is moreover of particular interest because of its simultaneous actions on at least GABA A receptors and ionotropic glycine receptors as well as group I and II metabotropic glutamate receptors which, as demonstrated above, play an essential role in neuroprotection against A ⁇ peptides.
  • baclofen-acamprosate combination is efficient in counteracting events triggered by the oligomers of A ⁇ at the synaptic, at the neuronal and at the endothelial levels.
  • the inventors have been able to determine ranges of concentrations of baclofen and acamprosate that allow an effective protection, at the same time, of neurons, synapse function and endothelial function ( FIG. 23 ). Such a range for a simultaneous activity has been determined for these three features to be from 80 nM to 1 ⁇ M for baclofen and from 320 ⁇ M to 4 nM for acamprosate.
  • a particularly enhanced efficacy of the treatment can then be expected within these ranges of concentrations due to the conjunction of effects that is obtained. It can be thus considered that reaching these ranges of plasmatic concentrations of baclofen and acamprosate in the brain is of particular interest.
  • the baclofen-acamprosate combination is active and shows a marked synergistic effect according to methods commonly recognized among pharmacology community [60-62] in at least one of the above in vitro models for AD (Table 6) in the tested concentrations. This ensures a particular clinical benefit. At certain concentrations, the combination provides a synergistic protection in all three models, which is even more particularly advantageous.
  • mice Male Swiss mice, 6 weeks old, are used throughout the study. Animals are housed in plastic cages, with free access to laboratory chow and water, except during behavioural experiments, and kept in a regulated environment, under a 12 h light/dark cycle (light on at 8:00 a.m.). Experiments are carried out in a soundproof and air-regulated experimental room, to which mice have been habituated at least 30 min before each experiment.
  • Drug(s) is/are daily administered by gavage (per os).
  • the A ⁇ 25-35 peptide and scrambled A ⁇ 25-35 peptide (control) have been dissolved in sterile bidistilled water, and stored at ⁇ 20° C. until use.
  • the ⁇ -amyloid peptides are then administered intracerebroventricularly (i.c.v.).
  • each mouse is anaesthetized lightly with ether, and a gauge stainless-steel needle is inserted unilaterally 1 mm to the right of the midline point equidistant from each eye, at an equal distance between the eyes and the ears and perpendicular to the plane of the skull.
  • Peptides or vehicle are delivered gradually within approximately 3 s. Mice exhibit normal behaviour within 1 min after injection.
  • the administration site is checked by injecting Indian ink in preliminary experiments. Neither insertion of the needle nor injection of the vehicle have a significant influence on survival, behavioral responses or cognitive functions.
  • baclofen, acamprosate, a combination thereof or the vehicle solution are administered twice per os by gavage at 8:00 am and 6:00 pm.
  • mice On Day 0 (at 10:00 am), mice are injected i.c.v. with A ⁇ 25-35 peptide or scrambled A ⁇ 25-35 peptide (control) in a final volume of 3 ⁇ l (3 mM).
  • baclofen, acamprosate, a combination thereof or the vehicle solution are administered per os by gavage twice daily (at 8:00 am and 6:00 pm).
  • a dose designated as bid (bis in die) means that said dose is administered twice daily.
  • Drugs are solubilized in water and freshly prepared just before each gavage administration.
  • One animal group receives donepezil (reference compound, 1 mg/kg/day) in a single injection intraperitoneally (at 8:00 am).
  • baclofen-acamprosate combination is tested in a combination with reference compounds for AD (for instance, currently approved treatments for AD are donepezil, galantamine, rivastigmine or memantine), said reference compounds are administered intraperitoneally, between Day 0 and Day 7, at 8:00 am.
  • reference compounds for AD for instance, currently approved treatments for AD are donepezil, galantamine, rivastigmine or memantine
  • the Y-maze is made of grey polyvinylchloride.
  • Each arm is 40 cm long, 13 cm high, 3 cm wide at the bottom, 10 cm wide at the top, and converges at an equal angle.
  • Each mouse is placed at the end of one arm and allowed to move freely through the maze during an 8 min session.
  • the series of arm entries including possible returns into the same arm, are checked visually.
  • An alternation is defined as entries into all three arms on consecutive occasions. The number of maximum alternations is therefore the total number of arm entries minus two and the percentage of alternation is calculated as (actual alternations/maximum alternations) ⁇ 100.
  • Parameters include the percentage of alternation (memory index) and total number of arm entries (exploration index). Animals that show an extreme behavior (Alternation percentage ⁇ 25% or >85% or number of arm entries ⁇ 10) are discarded. Usually, this accounts for 0-5% of the animals. This test incidentally serves to analyze at the behavioral level the impact and the amnesic effect induced in mice by the A ⁇ 25-35 injection.
  • the apparatus is a two-compartment (15 ⁇ 20 ⁇ 15 cm high) box with one illuminated with white polyvinylchloride walls and the other darkened with black polyvinylchloride walls and a grid floor.
  • a guillotine door separates each compartment.
  • a 60 W lamp positioned 40 cm above the apparatus lights up the white compartment during the experiment.
  • Scrambled foot shocks (0.3 mA for 3 s) could be delivered to the grid floor using a shock generator scrambler (Lafayette Instruments, Lafayette, USA).
  • the guillotine door is initially closed during the training session. Each mouse is placed into the white compartment. After 5 s, the door raises.
  • the door closes and the foot shock is delivered for 3 s.
  • the step-through latency that is, the latency spent to enter the darkened compartment, and the number of vocalizations is recorded.
  • the retention test is carried out 24 h after training. Each mouse is placed again into the white compartment. After 5 s the door is raised, the step-through latency and the escape latency, i.e., the time spent to return into the white compartment, are recorded up to 300 s.
  • baclofen and acamprosate induces a significant protective effect on behavioral and cognitive performances of intoxicated animals as shown in FIGS. 8, 9 and 10 .
  • FIGS. 9 and 10 show that intoxicated animals exhibit impaired behavioral and cognitive performances according to their scores in escape latency and step-through latency respectively.
  • the combination of baclofen and acamprosate allows a significant correction of the impairment.
  • the escape latency of mice treated with this combination is no more significantly different from control mice ( FIG. 9 ) and step-through latency ( FIG. 10 ) is significantly increased by combinations of the invention, with an enhanced effect of the combination compared to the drugs alone.
  • Memory impairment is the early feature of Alzheimer's disease and these results clearly show that the toxic effect of amyloid peptide on behavioral and cognitive performances (including memory) is significantly prevented by the combinations of the invention.
  • FIG. 16 shows that extremely low doses of baclofen (480 ⁇ g/kg bid), acamprosate (32 ⁇ g/kg bid) and donepezil (0.25 mg/kg/day) can be combined to allow complete protection of behavioral and cognitive performances of mice as measured by the Y-maze test. While donepezil, at this concentration, has no significant effect (32% protection) on spatial working memory, its use in conjunction with the baclofen and acamprosate combination allows a complete protection (98%) of intoxicated mice's cognitive performances.
  • the combination index of donepezil in combination with baclofen-acamprosate is 0.687 which determines a marked synergy between the compounds (as determined by the method of Loewe [60, 61]).
  • the human equivalent dose of donepezil used in this combination is more than 4 times lower than the lowest and almost 20 times lower than the highest dose currently used in humans for AD treatment.
  • baclofen 480 ⁇ g/kg bid
  • acamprosate 32 ⁇ g/kg bid
  • memantine 0.5 mg/kg/day
  • FIG. 19 An improvement is also observed in the performances in the Y-maze test when combining baclofen (480 ⁇ g/kg bid), acamprosate (32 ⁇ g/kg bid) and memantine (0.5 mg/kg/day), as shown in FIG. 19 .
  • the concentrations used neither the baclofen-acamprosate combination nor memantine has a significant effect.
  • the dose of memantine used in these experiments is more than 7 times lower than the human equivalent dose corresponding to the maintenance treatment.
  • the combination of baclofen-acamprosate with memantine is synergistic, displaying a combinatory index of 0.784 (as determined by the method of Loewe [60, 61]).
  • Combinations of the invention can thus be further combined with other therapies for AD in order to potentiate their action, and to lower their potential side effects by using lower doses for these drugs.
  • Combination therapies are tested in an in vivo model of A ⁇ intoxication. Their effects on several parameters which are affected in neurological diseases are assessed:
  • BBB blood-brain barrier
  • EB dye is known to bind to serum albumin after peripheral injection and has been used as a tracer for serum albumin.
  • EB dye (2% in saline, 4 ml/kg) is injected intraperitoneally (i.p.) 3 h prior to the transcardiac perfusion. Mice are then anesthetized with i.p. 200 ⁇ l of pre-mix ketamine 80 mg/kg, xylazine 10 mg/kg, and the chests are opened. Mice are perfused transcardially with 250 ml of saline for approximately 15 min until the fluid from the right atrium becomes colourless. After decapitation, the brains are removed and dissected out into three regions: cerebral cortex (left+right), hippocampus (left+right), diencephalon. Then, each brain region is weighed for quantitative measurement of EB-albumin extravasation.
  • Samples are homogenized in phosphate-buffered saline solution and mixed by vortexing after addition of 60% trichloroacetic acid to precipitate the protein. Samples are cooled at 4° C., and then centrifuged 30 min at 10,000 g, 4° C. The supernatant is measured at 610 nm for absorbance of EB using a spectrophotometer.
  • Synaptophysin has been chosen as a marker of synapse integrity and is assayed using a commercial ELISA kit (USCN, Ref. E90425Mu). Samples are prepared from hippocampus tissues and homogenized in an extraction buffer specific to as described by manufacturer and reference literature.
  • Tissues are rinsed in ice-cold PBS (0.02 mol/1, pH 7.0-7.2) to remove excess blood thoroughly and weighed before nitrogen freezing and ⁇ 80° C. storage.
  • Tissues are cut into small pieces and homogenized in 1 ml ice-cold phosphate buffer saline (PBS) solution with a glass homogenizer.
  • the resulting suspension is sonicated with an ultrasonic cell disrupter or subjected to two freeze-thawing cycles to further break the cell membranes. Then, homogenates are centrifugated for 5 min at 5,000 g and the supernatant is assayed immediately.
  • PBS phosphate buffer saline
  • the total protein concentrations are then calculated from standard curve dilutions and serve to normalize ELISA results.
  • each mouse is anesthetized with 200 ⁇ l i.p. of a pre-mix of ketamine 80 mg/kg and xylazine 10 mg/kg and transcardially perfused with 100 ml of saline solution followed by 100 ml of 4% paraformaldehyde.
  • the brains are removed and kept for 24 h post-fixation in 4% paraformaldehyde solution at 4° C. After post-fixation, brains are washed in a phosphate buffer saline (PBS) solution, then cerebellums are removed and the brains are cut in coronal sections (20 ⁇ m thickness) using a vibratome (Leica VT100OS, Leica, Wetzlar, Germany).
  • PBS phosphate buffer saline
  • Sections are placed on 24-well plates with PBS. They are then selected to include the hippocampal formation and 9 sections are placed in gelatin-coated glass strips (one slide per animal for cresyl violet). All slides are dried at room temperature for 48 h to avoid unsticking. The slides are stored at room temperature until cresyl violet staining. Sections are stained with 0.2% cresyl violet reagent (Sigma-Aldrich), then dehydrated with graded ethanol, treated with toluene, and mounted with Mountex medium (BDH Laboratory Supplies, Poole, Dorset, UK).
  • CA1 measurement and pyramidal cells counts are processed using ImageJ® (NIH). Data are expressed as mean of nine slices of CA1 pyramidal cells per millimeter for each group (left and right hippocampus CA1 counting) [63].
  • mice are sacrificed by decapitation and both hippocampi are rapidly removed, weighed and kept in liquid nitrogen until assayed. After thawing, hippocampi are homogenized in cold methanol (1/10 w/v), centrifuged at 1,000 g during 5 min and the supernatant placed in Eppendorf tubes. The reaction volume of each homogenate is added to FeSO4 1 mM, H2SO4 0.25 M, xylenol orange 1 mM and incubated for 30 min at room temperature.
  • CHPE cumene hydroperoxyde 1 mM
  • mice are sacrificed by decapitation and both hippocampi are rapidly removed, rinsed in ice-cold PBS (0.02 mol/l, pH 7.0-7.2) to remove excess blood thoroughly, weighed and kept in liquid nitrogen until assayed.
  • Tissues are cut into small pieces and homogenized in 1 ml ice-cold PBS with a glass homogenizer.
  • the resulting suspension is sonicated with an ultrasonic cell disrupter or subjected to two freeze-thawing cycles to further break the cell membranes. Then, homogenates are centrifugated at 5,000 g during 5 min and the supernatant is assayed immediately.
  • baclofen and acamprosate induces a significant protective effect on neurophysiological functions of intoxicated animals as shown in FIGS. 11, 12, 13 and 14 .
  • the combination is effective for the protection of neurons ( FIG. 11 ) and synaptic density ( FIG. 13 ).
  • FIG. 12 shows that the combination of baclofen and acamprosate protects the BBB integrity (76%) compared with non-treated intoxicated animals.
  • this combination therapy is efficient in reducing the overall oxidative stress induced by A ⁇ in the brains of treated animals when compared with non-treated intoxicated animals ( FIG. 14 ).
  • Drug combination (acamprosate 0.2 mg/kg and baclofen 3 mg/kg) or the vehicle solution are administered per os by gavage twice daily (at 8:00 am and 6:00 pm) in a volume of 5 ml/kg.
  • Treatment with the baclofen-acamprosate combination was started at 8 months of age (i.e., when the disease is well established) and lasted 4 weeks until the end of functional tests. All behavioral tests were performed 2 h after treatment.
  • mice were tested for acquisition and working memory. Briefly, swimming was recorded using a Videotrack software (Viewpoint, Champagne-au-Mont-d'Or, France), with trajectories being analysed as latencies and distances. The software divides the pool into four quadrants. Training (Acquisition) consisted of 4 swims per day for 4 days. The latency, expressed as mean ⁇ s.e.m., was calculated for each training day. A probe test was performed 24 h after the last swim (retention phase). The platform was removed and each animal was allowed a free 60 s swim. The time spent in each quadrant was then determined. After the training test, animals were tested for spatial working memory.
  • Working memory was specifically assayed by changing the platform location every day (four swims per day during 2 days) and by using a training inter-trial time of 2 min. The swimming times to find the platform of the first (swim1), second (swim2), third (swim3) and fourth trial (swim4) of Day 2 were calculated and averaged.
  • a mixed ANOVA with Dunnett's test including fixed effect terms for treatment, time and the treatment by time interaction, and a random effect term for animals was applied. Treatment effect was assessed for each time point and for combined time points (global effect). Tests were conducted at a 5% significance level.
  • compositions of the invention in different in vitro and animal models for AD, together with the possibility of acting not only on a single but on a group of phenomena described as being at the origin of the disease, have prompted the inventors to test it in aged people, in a model of chemically induced amnesia that is commonly used in clinical trials for AD, and also in people suffering from mild AD. More particularly, baclofen-acamprosate combination efficacy in improving memory or memory related mental functions and in improving electrophysiological features underlying working memory has been assessed through clinical trials.
  • AD patients show the signs of diminished cholinergic synaptic activity, with diminished levels of acetylcholine.
  • the pharmacological model of this phenomenon consists of treating the subjects with scopolamine, a blocker of muscarinic receptors. This drug thereby induces a transitory and reversible cognitive impairment upon administration [64]; it is therefore currently used as a pharmacologic model for induced dementia.
  • the GMLT test was performed for each treatment period on Day 1 (2 training sessions), on Day 2 (test day) HO, H2.5, H4, H5.5, H7 and H9 and on Day 3 H24.
  • the data from the GMLT test were pooled together in a “composite” GMLT score. Comparison between treatment groups for the two periods was performed on change from baseline value by using a mixed Analysis of Covariance (ANCOVA) model with SAS® Mixed procedure (see Worldwide Website sas.com), including fixed effect terms for period treatment, time and the treatment by time interaction, a random effect term for subject and the baseline value as covariate. Treatment effect was assessed for combined time points (global effect) and for each time point.
  • ANCOVA Mixed Analysis of Covariance
  • Scopolamine is known to act as early as 30 min after its administration, its effect lasting for approximately 6 hours. Its Tmax is known to be of about 3 hours [64]. These data correspond to the transient collapse of performances in the GMLT test observed in placebo-treated subjects ( FIG. 25 , circles, dotted line).
  • FIG. 25 An improvement of cognitive performances was observed for baclofen-acamprosate treated subjects ( FIG. 25 squares, grey line) compared to placebo dosed subjects. This improvement is particularly significant in the time period around H5.5 that corresponds to the Tmax of baclofen-acamprosate ( FIG. 25 , darkest area in the pharmacokinetic scale of mix compounds).
  • baclofen-acamprosate combination is efficient in counteracting scopolamine induced cognitive impairment.
  • combinations of the invention can also be considered as of particular interest in reversing memory impairment related to conditions implying diminished cholinergic synaptic activity.
  • Baclofen-acamprosate combinations are thus of particular interest for the treatment of AD and related diseases.
  • Baclofen-Acamprosate is Effective in Mild AD Patients.
  • Another part of the studies performed on human subjects consists of a three-month clinical study that is currently performed on patients diagnosed with mild AD with the aim of exploring the effect of baclofen-acamprosate combinations on cognitive and behavioural impairments related to the disease.
  • This study is a 12-week, prospective pilot single-blind and placebo sequential controlled, multi-center trial which assesses the effects of different doses of the baclofen-acamprosate combination.
  • It is a “challenge/de-challenge/re-challenge” (CDR) type study, which means that the baclofen-acamprosate combination is administered on a given time period, then withdrawn, and then re-administered.
  • CDR challenge/de-challenge/re-challenge
  • Cognitive and behavioural impairments of the subjects are measured by psychometric assessments during visits to a neurophysiologist set at the beginning and the end of each of the 3 phases of the CDR study:
  • Visit 1 holds on the beginning of the challenge phase, which lasts 4 weeks, and at the end of which performances of subjects are evaluated during visit 2 (V2); then the de-challenge phase of 4 weeks runs and ends with visit 3 (V3), after which the re-challenge phase lasts 4 weeks more, to be ended by the last evaluation of the subjects by the neurophysiologist during visit 4 (V4).
  • ADAS cog tests Alzheimer's Disease Assessment Scale-cognitive subscale
  • MMSE Mini Mental State Examination
  • n 29 patients Age +/ ⁇ sem 71.8 +/ ⁇ 1.33 years Gender 13 Females 16 Males MMSE +/ ⁇ sem 23.4 +/ ⁇ 0.389 ADAS Cog. at V1 +/ ⁇ sem 11.9 +/ ⁇ 0.661 sem: standard error of the mean; MMSE: Mini Mental State Examination; ADAS cog: Alzheimer's Disease Assessment Scale-cognitive subscale
  • the screening/recruitment sessions were held from 1 to 2 weeks before V1.
  • ADAS cog score assessed at V1 is taken as the baseline to evaluate changes in performances of the subjects assessed during subsequent visits V2, V3 and V4.
  • the effect of the mix is assessed on the changes of ADAS cog score at the end of each period in comparison with the previous visit and the treatment periods are compared to the placebo period.
  • V1 and V2 or V1 and V4 are statistically tested using a one-tailed paired test of Student at a 10% significance level.
  • baclofen and acamprosate plasmatic concentration has been measured at the end of the study (V4), in the morning just before drug administration (on an empty stomach, assumed to be the lowest drug concentration) and two hours after the dosing, which roughly corresponds to the Tmax of the drugs (assumed to be the highest concentration).
  • V4 the end of the study
  • the plasmatic concentration of a given drug can be determined using any method well-known by biopharmacists. Briefly, an LC-MS/MS analysis has been performed on samples with the material detailed in Table 8, but any equivalent material can be used.
  • Samples are human plasma samples collected during the clinical trial. Blank plasma samples were used to prepare calibration.
  • sampling volume was 100 ⁇ l and proteins have been precipitated, and for baclofen, sampling volume was 200 ⁇ l and samples were submitted to solid phase extraction.
  • the MMSE is widely used to assess the cognitive functions and the mnesic abilities [65] in the frame of the diagnosis of AD and of the assessment of the severity of the disease.
  • the test comprises a series of 30 questions addressing 5 different areas (orientation, registration, attention calculation, recall, and language) with the final score being graded out of 30 points.
  • a final score below or equal to 26 points corresponds to a dementia diagnosis. Normal scores range from 30 to 26, whereas a score between 26 and 20 indicates mild dementia, a score between 19 and 10 indicates moderate dementia, and a score below 10 is considered as indicating severe dementia.
  • a variation of 2 points of the score is usually considered as clinically relevant.
  • ADAS cognitive subscale deals with memory, language, construction and praxis orientation and is commonly considered as a standard for the evaluation of mild to moderate AD patients in the clinical trials. It consists of 11 tasks which measure the disturbances of memory, language, praxis, attention and other cognitive abilities which are often referred to as the core symptoms of AD. It generally shows good test-retest and inter-rater reliability and performs satisfactorily against more detailed measures of cognitive function.
  • Score range varies from 0 to 70. The more mistakes made, the higher the score.
  • a normal score is defined as a score lower than 10.
  • a 70-point score is a sign of severe dementia [66].
  • Results presented herein were obtained from an intermediate analysis of the ADAS cog data for the 24 first subjects to complete the study who were treated by doses 1 or 2.
  • Alterations in brain functions can be detected by electrophysiological techniques such as electroencephalography (EEG).
  • EEG electroencephalography
  • Event related potentials are observed within the EEG recordings in response to an experimental condition, and represent the corresponding activated cognitive phenomena such as perception, attention, decision-making process, answering, memory process, language, etc.
  • ERP characteristics and their components can vary as a function of various factors such as stimulus relevance, task performed, lesions of the nervous system, the use of drugs and so on.
  • ERPs have been found to be altered in patients suffering from AD, vascular dementia or dementia associated with Parkinsonian symptoms. Numerous research studies have helped to establish ERPs as a useful cognitive biomarker for the diagnosis of dementia, tracking disease progression, and evaluating the pro-cognitive effect of therapeutics. More particularly ERP measures allow pointing out alteration of cognitive function at an early stage, and can contribute to the diagnosis of AD with good sensitivity and specificity.
  • P300 which comprises P3 and N2 subcomponents:
  • latency refers to the time necessary for the making of a decision and amplitude refers to the difficulty of the task, probability of occurrence of the stimulus, or emotional state.
  • ERP assessment is done at visits V1-V4 of the above clinical trial.
  • Cognitive ERPs Recording of cognitive ERPs is done according to the auditory oddball paradigm. Patients lay down on an “examination bed,” with eyes opened, in a soundproof, darkened room. Tones (60 dB SPL, 100-ms duration) were presented binaurally through a headset up to a total of 150 stimuli. Patients were instructed to identify the odd 2000 Hz high-pitched stimuli (target sounds), which had a 20% occurrence probability among the standard 1000 Hz low-pitched stimuli (common sounds). The cognitive task required paying attention to the odd stimuli and counting them. The stimulus order of appearance was random and there was at least a 1140-ms gap between each stimulus. Three tests were recorded with a 2-minute pause followed by repeated instructions.
  • Tones 60 dB SPL, 100-ms duration
  • the test was stopped once the 90 (3 ⁇ 30) target stimuli have been played out and the patient was asked to give out his/her count of the oddest sounds. Separate averaging of single records corresponding to frequent and rare stimuli were processed online. Grand average of the evoked potentials was calculated from the three trials for Fz (frontal vertex), Cz (Central vertex) and Pz (Parietal vertex) electrodes.
  • Alzheimer's disease latencies are hugely delayed and amplitudes are reduced.
  • Latencies and amplitudes of the P3a and P3b subcomponents of P3 and N200 were taken from the signals recorded from Fz, Cz and Pz electrodes and used for statistical analyses. Delta of amplitudes between N2 and P3a and delta of amplitudes between N2 and P3b were also calculated during statistical analyses. ASCII-format files were also recorded for PCA statistical analyses.
  • Results presented in FIG. 27 represent ERP measures gathered from all three electrodes all along the CDR study for patient 601.
  • Patient 601 is a 74-year-old female Caucasian subject with no known antecedent of familial dementia. She was diagnosed as suffering from probable AD since June 2012, and presents a moderate hypotrophy of the hippocampus together with a global cerebral hypotrophy in neuroimaging, which ascertains the diagnosis. At V0 she obtained a MMSE score of 24 She was administered with the low dose (dose 1) of the combination.
  • ERPs obtained at V1 for this patient are characterized by a substantial delay of P3, around 900 ins for this subject ( FIG. 27 ).
  • the baclofen-acamprosate combination is efficient in correcting the alterations of brain electrophysiological functions which are observed in mild AD subjects.
  • Results of clinical trials performed in humans show the effectiveness of combinations of the invention in treating AD and related disorders as shown by the observed protection against memory process degradation both in a chemically induced amnesia model and in patients diagnosed with mild AD.
  • the correction of memory processes in patients is asserted by electrophysiology data that show a correction in brain functioning upon treatment in mild AD patients.
  • Memory is known as one of the earliest cognitive functions to decline through the aging process in humans and rodents [67, 68].
  • compositions of the invention in treating AD-related diseases such as age-associated memory impairment.
  • Working memory performances were evaluated through the T-maze alternation test in treated and non-treated animals (roughly the same test as spontaneous alternation in part I.B)1)a)).
  • mice were administered by gavage, twice daily with either the combination of the invention (acamprosate 0.2 mg/kg+baclofen 3 mg/kg) or the vehicle solution all along the experiment.
  • Working memory performances of treated and non-treated animals were assayed 17 weeks and 29 weeks after the beginning of the treatment.
  • the T-maze apparatus is made of gray Plexiglas with a main stem (55 cm long ⁇ 10 cm wide ⁇ 20 cm high) and two arms (30 cm long ⁇ 10 cm wide ⁇ 20 cm high) positioned at a 90-degree angle relative to the main stem.
  • a start box (15 cm long ⁇ 10 cm wide) is separated from the main stem by a sliding door. Sliding doors are also provided to close specific arms during the forced-choice alternation task.
  • the experimental protocol consists of one single session, which starts with 1 “forced-choice” trial, followed by 14 “free-choice” trials.
  • the animal In the first “forced-choice” trial, the animal is confined 5 s in the start arm and then released while either the left or right goal arm is blocked by closing the sliding door. Then the animal explores the open arm and returns to the start arm. At this point, the animal has completed the forced-choice trial.
  • the left or right goal door is opened and the animal is allowed to freely choose between the left and right goal arm (“free choice” trials).
  • the opposite arm is closed in order to oblige the animal to return to the start arm.
  • the apparatus was cleaned between each animal using alcohol (70°). Urine and feces were removed from the maze.
  • the percent spontaneous alternation was calculated as the number of spontaneous alternations divided by the number of free-choice trials.
  • An alternation is defined as a succession of 2 different arms over consecutive choices (e.g., the sequence right-left-right represents 2 alternations).
  • composition of the invention significantly improved (by more than 50%) memory of aged mice as soon as 17 weeks after the beginning of the treatment. A significant improvement is also observed after 29 weeks of treatment (not shown).
  • compositions of the invention are also efficient in counteracting AD-related disorders such as age-associated memory impairment.
  • Glutamate toxicity is involved in the pathogenesis of neurological diseases or disorders such as multiple sclerosis, Alzheimer's Disease, frontotemporal dementia, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Parkinson's Disease, Huntington's Disease, neuropathies, alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, or spinal cord injury.
  • the drugs are first tested individually, followed by assays for their combinatorial action.
  • the neuroprotective effect of compounds is assessed by quantification of the neurite network (neurofilament immunostaining (NF), which specifically reveals the glutamatergic neurons).
  • NF neuroofilament immunostaining
  • drugs of the candidate combinations are solved in culture medium (+0.1% DMSO).
  • Candidate combinations are then pre-incubated with neurons for 1 hour before the glutamate injury.
  • glutamate is added for 20 min, to a final concentration of 40 ⁇ M, in the presence of the candidate combinations, in order to avoid further drug dilutions.
  • the medium is changed with medium with the candidate combination but without glutamate.
  • the culture is fixed 24 hours after glutamate injury MK801 (Dizocilpinehydrogen maleate, 77086-22-7-20 ⁇ M) is used as a positive control.
  • Nuclei of cells are labeled by a fluorescent marker (Hoechst solution, SIGMA), and neurite network quantified. Six wells per condition are used to assess neuronal survival in 3 different cultures.
  • baclofen-acamprosate gives a protective effect against glutamate toxicity for cortical neuronal cells.
  • combinations of the invention strongly protect neurons from glutamate toxicity under the experimental conditions described above. It is noteworthy that an effective protection is noticed using drug concentrations at which the drugs used alone have a lower protective effect.
  • Combination of baclofen and acamprosate induces an improvement of more than 200% compared to acamprosate alone and more than 47% compared to baclofen alone.
  • a model in which myelin-oligodendrocyte glycoprotein-immunized (MOG-immunized) mice develop chronic progressive EAE is used to demonstrate the beneficial effect of compositions of the invention in multiple sclerosis treatment.
  • C57L/6J female mice (8 weeks old) are purchased from Janvier (France); after two weeks of habituation, female mice (10 weeks old) develop chronic paralysis after immunization with MOG (Myelin Oligodendrocyte Glycoprotein) peptide.
  • MOG Myelin Oligodendrocyte Glycoprotein
  • the experimental encephalomyelitis is induced with the Hooke Kit MOG 35-55 /CFA Emulsion PTX (Pertussis toxin) for EAE Induction (EK-0110, EK-0115; Hooke Laboratories).
  • the control kit is CK-0115 (Hooke Laboratories).
  • each injection contains 100 ⁇ g of MOG 35-55 peptide (MEVGWYRSPFSRVVHLYRNGK, SEQ ID NO:1), 200 ⁇ g of inactivated Mycobacterium tuberculosis H37Ra and is emulsified in Complete Freund's Adjuvant (CFA) (Hooke Laboratories).
  • CFA Complete Freund's Adjuvant
  • Pertussis toxin Two intraperitoneal injections of 500 ng of pertussis toxin in PBS (Hooke kit) are performed 2 hours (Day 0) and 24 hours (Day 1) after the MOG injection. Pertussis toxin enhances EAE development by providing additional adjuvant.
  • mice develop EAE 8 days after immunization and stay chronically paralyzed for the duration of the experiment. After the immunization, mice are daily observed for clinical symptoms in a blind procedure. Animals are kept in a conventional pathogen-free facility and all experiments are carried out in accordance with guidelines prescribed by, and are approved by, the standing local committee of bioethics.
  • mice Groups of female mice as disclosed are homogenized by weight before the immunization:
  • Treatments are applied into two divided doses (i.e., bid).
  • the clinical scores are measured at Days 0-5-8-9-12-14-16-19-21-23-26-28.
  • the total clinical score is composed of the tail score, the hind limb score, the fore limb score and the bladder score described as below:
  • the global score for each animal is determined by the addition of all the above mentioned categories.
  • the maximum score for live animals is 10.
  • baclofen (30 mg/kg/day) and acamprosate (2 mg/kg/day) induced a significant protective effect against the development of chronic progressive EAE and hence confirmed the beneficial effect of the composition in multiple sclerosis treatment ( FIG. 18 ). With more than 30% reduction of the symptoms, the results clearly show that the combination induces a significant reduction of disease development from Day 13. This result confirms the remarkable positive effect of the baclofen-acamprosate combination on neuronal protection including demyelination and its implications.
  • Human muscle is prepared according to a previously described method from portions of a biopsy of a healthy patient [69]. Muscle cells are established from dissociated cells (10,000 cells per well), plated in gelatin-coated 0.1% on 48-well plates and grown in a proliferating medium consisting of a mix of MEM medium and M199 medium.
  • co-cultures are incubated with candidate compounds or Riluzole one hour before glutamate intoxication (60 ⁇ M) for 20 min. Then, co-cultures are washed and candidate compounds or Riluzole are added for an additional 48 h. After this incubation time, unfixed cocultures are incubated with ⁇ -bungarotoxin coupled with Alexa 488 at a concentration of 500 nmol/L for 15 min at room temperature. Then, co-cultures are fixed by PFA for 20 min at room temperature. After permeabilization with 0.1% of saponin, co-cultures are incubated with anti-neurofilament antibody (NF).
  • NF anti-neurofilament antibody
  • Endpoints are (1) Total neurite length, (2) Number of motor units, and (3) Total motor unit area, which are indicative of motor neuron survival and functionality.
  • baclofen and acamprosate combination effectively protects motor neurons and motor units in the coculture model.
  • mice Transgenic male B6SJL-Tg(SOD1)2Gur/J mice and their control (respectively SN2726 and SN2297 from Jackson Laboratories, Ben Harbor, USA, distributed by Charles River in France) are chosen in this set of experiments to mimic ALS.
  • mice express the SOD1-G93A transgene, designed with a mutant human SOD1 gene (a single amino acid substitution of glycine to alanine at codon 93) driven by its endogenous human SOD1 promoter.
  • Control mice express the control human SOD1 gene.
  • the group assignation and the randomisation of the animals are based on body weight; for each group, the randomisation is done one day before the first treatment
  • mice are dosed with candidate drug treatment diluted in a vehicle from the 60 th day after birth till death. Diluted solutions of drug candidates are prepared with water at room temperature just before the beginning of the administration.
  • Riluzole is added in drinking water at a final concentration of 6 mg/ml (adjusted to each group's mean body weight) in 5% cyclodextrin. As a mouse drinks about 5 ml/day, the estimated administrated dose is 30 mg/kg/day, which is a dose that was shown to increase the survival of mice.
  • Cyclodextrin is used as vehicle at the final concentration of 5%, diluted in water at room temperature from stock solution (cyclodextrin 20%).
  • Clinical observation consists of studying behavioural tests: onset of paralysis, “loss of splay”, “loss of righting reflex”, and general gait observation:
  • Combinatorial therapies of the present invention are tested in vivo, in suitable models of peripheral neuropathy, i.e., an acute model of oxaliplatin-induced neuropathy and a chronic model of oxaliplatin-induced neuropathy.
  • suitable models of peripheral neuropathy i.e., an acute model of oxaliplatin-induced neuropathy and a chronic model of oxaliplatin-induced neuropathy.
  • the animals, protocols and results are presented in this section.
  • Sprague-Dawley rats (CERJ, France), weighing 150-175 g at the beginning of the experiment of the oxaliplatin treatment (Do) are used.
  • Animals are housed in a limited access animal facility in a temperature (19.5° C.-24.5° C.) and relative humidity (45%-65%) controlled room with a 12 h-light/dark cycle, with ad libitum access to standard pelleted laboratory chow and water throughout the study. Animals are housed 4 or 5 per cage and a one week-acclimation period is observed before any testing.
  • Group 1 vehicle of oxaliplatin (distilled water), i.p./Vehicle of candidate combination(s) (distilled water), p.o. daily.
  • Group 2 oxaliplatin (distilled water), i.p./Vehicle of candidate combination(s) (distilled water), p.o. daily.
  • Group 3 oxaliplatin 3 mg/kg i.p./single drug in distilled water, p.o. daily ⁇ 9.
  • Group 4 oxaliplatin 3 mg/kg i.p./candidate combination(s) in distilled water, p.o. daily ⁇ 9.
  • Group 5 oxaliplatin 3 mg/kg i.p./gabapentin (100 mg/kg) in distilled water, p.o. on testing days (i.e. D 1 & D 8 ).
  • Vehicle and test items are delivered daily from D ⁇ 1 to D7 (the day before the last testing day) whereas gabapentin is administered on testing days (120 minutes before the test).
  • Acute neuropathy is induced by a single intraperitoneal injection of oxaliplatin (3 mg/kg).
  • oxaliplatin-induced painful neuropathy in rat reproduces the pain symptoms in oxaliplatin-treated patients:
  • All drug combinations are administered from the day before the first intraperitoneal injection of oxaliplatin 3 mg/kg (D ⁇ 1) and pursued daily orally until D7. During the testing days (i.e., D1 and D7), the drug combinations are administered after the test. Animals from the reference-treated group (gabapentin) are dosed only during the testing days.
  • Cold allodynia is assessed using the acetone test by measuring the responses to thermal non-nociceptive stimulation on D1 (around 24 h after the first injection of oxaliplatin 3 mg/kg (acute effect of oxaliplatin), and D8 (chronic effect of oxaliplatin).
  • acetone test latency of hindpaw withdrawal is measured after application of a drop of acetone to the plantar surface of both hindpaws (reaction time) and the intensity of the response is scored (cold score). Reaction time to the cooling effect of acetone is measured within 20 sec (cut-off) after acetone application. Responses to acetone are also graded by the following 4-point scale: 0 (no response); 1 (quick withdrawal, flick of the paw); 2 (prolonged withdrawal or marked flicking of the paw); 3 (repeated flicking of the paw with licking or biting).
  • Student test unilateral, type 3 is performed. The significance level is set as p ⁇ 0.05; all the groups are compared to the diseased+vehicle group (oxaliplatin-treated group). Means and standard error means are shown on the figures.
  • Oxaliplatin induced a significant decrease in reaction time of paw withdrawal after acetone application (diseased group+vehicle) during the time course. This decrease is progressive and significant from Day 1 (acute model of oxaliplatin-induced neuropathy) to Day 8 (chronic model) as compared to the vehicle group.
  • Anti-allodynic effect in acute model and chronic model of oxaliplatin-induced neuropathy the baclofen and acamprosate combination is tested in both models of oxaliplatin-induced neuropathy. It induces a significant decrease in the cumulative cold score and a significant increase in reaction time as compared to the oxaliplatin-vehicle treated group. In conclusion, this drug combination protects from chronic and acute neuropathy.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Neurology (AREA)
  • Neurosurgery (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Emergency Medicine (AREA)
  • Physiology (AREA)
  • Nutrition Science (AREA)
  • Physical Education & Sports Medicine (AREA)
  • Orthopedic Medicine & Surgery (AREA)
  • Psychology (AREA)
  • Pain & Pain Management (AREA)
  • Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
  • Psychiatry (AREA)
  • Hospice & Palliative Care (AREA)
  • Rheumatology (AREA)
  • Vascular Medicine (AREA)
  • Cardiology (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Acyclic And Carbocyclic Compounds In Medicinal Compositions (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Medicines That Contain Protein Lipid Enzymes And Other Medicines (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention relates to combinations and methods for the treatment of neurological disorders related to glutamate excitotoxicity and Amyloid β toxicity. More specifically, the present invention relates to novel combinatorial therapies of Alzheimer's disease, Alzheimer's disease related disorders, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, multiple sclerosis, Parkinson's disease, Huntington's disease, neuropathic pain, alcoholic neuropathy, alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, or spinal cord injury, based on baclofen and acamprosate combination.

Description

    FIELD OF THE INVENTION
  • The present invention relates to combinations and methods for the treatment of neurological diseases and disorders. More specifically, the present invention relates to novel combinatorial therapy of neurological disorders, based on baclofen and acamprosate combination.
    • BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • Alzheimer's disease (AD) is the prototypic cortical dementia characterized by memory deficit together with dysphasia (language disorder in which there is an impairment of speech and of comprehension of speech), dyspraxia (disability to coordinate and perform certain purposeful movements and gestures in the absence of motor or sensory impairments) and agnosia (ability to recognize objects, persons, sounds, shapes, or smells) attributable to involvement of the cortical association areas. Special symptoms such as spastic paraparesis (weakness affecting the lower extremities) can also be involved [1-4].
  • Incidence of Alzheimer's disease increases dramatically with the age. AD is at present the most common cause of dementia. It is clinically characterized by a global decline of cognitive function that progresses slowly and leaves end-stage patients bound to bed, incontinent and dependent on custodial care. Death occurs, on average, 9 years after diagnosis [5]
  • United Nations population projections estimate that the number of people older than 80 years will approach 370 million by the year 2050. Currently, it is estimated that 50% of people older than age 85 years are afflicted with AD. Therefore, more than 100 million people worldwide will suffer from dementia in 50 years. The vast number of people requiring constant care and other services will severely affect medical, monetary and human resources [6].
  • Memory impairment is the early feature of the disease and involves episodic memory (memory for day-today events). Semantic memory (memory for verbal and visual meaning) is involved later in the disease. By contrast, working memory (short-term memory involving structures and processes used for temporarily storing and manipulating information) and procedural memory (unconscious memory that is long-term memory of skills and procedure) are preserved until late. As the disease progresses, the additional features of language impairment, visual perceptual and spatial deficits, agnosias and apraxias emerge.
  • The classic picture of Alzheimer's disease is sufficiently characteristic to allow identification in approximately 80% of cases [7]. Nevertheless, clinical heterogeneity does occur and this is not only important for clinical management but provides further implication of specific medication treatments for functionally different forms [8].
  • The pathological hallmark of AD includes amyloid plaques containing beta-amyloid (Abeta), neurofibrillary tangles (NFT) containing Tau and neuronal and synaptic dysfunction and loss [9-11]. For the last decade, two major hypotheses on the cause of AD have been proposed: the “amyloid cascade hypothesis”, which states that the neurodegenerative process is a series of events triggered by the abnormal processing of the Amyloid Precursor Protein (APP) [12], and the “neuronal cytoskeletal degeneration hypothesis” [13], which proposes that cytoskeletal changes are the triggering events. The most widely accepted theory explaining AD progression remains the amyloid cascade hypothesis [14-16] and AD researchers have mainly focused on determining the mechanisms underlying the toxicity associated with Abeta proteins. Microvascular permeability and remodeling, aberrant angiogenesis and blood-brain barrier (BBB) breakdown have been identified as key events contributing to the APP toxicity in the amyloid cascade [17]. On the contrary, Tau protein has received much less attention from the pharmaceutical industry than amyloid, because of both fundamental and practical concerns. Moreover, synaptic density change is the pathological lesion that better correlates with cognitive impairment than the two others. Studies have revealed that the amyloid pathology appears to progress in a neurotransmitter-specific manner where the cholinergic terminals appear most vulnerable, followed by the glutamatergic terminals and finally by the GABAergic terminals [11]. Glutamate is the most abundant excitatory neurotransmitter in the mammalian nervous system. Under pathological conditions, its abnormal accumulation in the synaptic cleft leads to glutamate receptor overactivation [18]. Abnormal accumulation of glutamate in synaptic clefts leads to the overactivation of glutamate receptors that results in pathological processes and finally in neuronal cell death. This process, named excitotoxicity, is commonly observed in neuronal tissues during acute and chronic neurological disorders.
  • It is becoming evident that excitotoxicity is involved in the pathogenesis of multiple disorders of various etiology such as: spinal cord injury, stroke, traumatic brain injury, hearing loss, alcoholism and alcohol withdrawal, alcoholic neuropathy, or neuropathic pain as well as neurodegenerative diseases such as frontotemporal dementia, multiple sclerosis, Alzheimer's disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Parkinson's disease, and Huntington's disease [19-21]. The development of efficient treatment for these diseases remains a major public health issue due to their incidence as well as lack of curative treatments.
  • Two kinds of medication are used for improving or slowing down symptoms of AD which lay on some acetylcholinesterase modulators and a blocker of NMDA glutamate receptors, memantine [22, 23].
  • NMDAR antagonists that target various sites of this receptor have been tested to counteract excitotoxicity. Uncompetitive NMDAR antagonists target the ion channel pore, thus reducing calcium entry into postsynaptic neurons. Some of them reached the approval status. As an example, memantine is currently approved in moderate to severe Alzheimer's disease. It is clinically tested in other indications that include a component of excitotoxicity such as alcohol dependence (phase II), amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (phase III), dementia associated with Parkinson's disease (phase II), epilepsy, Huntington's disease (phase IV), multiple sclerosis (phase IV), Parkinson's disease (phase IV) and traumatic brain injury (phase IV). This molecule is however of limited benefit to most Alzheimer's disease patients, because it has only modest symptomatic effects. Another approach in limiting excitotoxicity consists of inhibiting the presynaptic release of glutamate. Riluzole, currently approved in amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, showed encouraging results in ischemia and traumatic brain injury models [24-26]. It is at present tested in phase II trials in early multiple sclerosis, Parkinson's disease (does not show any better results than placebo) as well as spinal cord injury. In 1995, the drug reached orphan drug status for the treatment of amyotrophic lateral sclerosis and in 1996 for the treatment of Huntington's disease. The use of NMDA receptor antagonists such as memantine, felbamate, acamprosate and MRZ 2/579 for treating depression has also been suggested in US2010076075.
  • WO2009133128, WO2009133141, WO2009133142 and WO2011054759 disclose drug combinations for use in the treatment of AD.
  • Despite active research in this area, there is still a need for alternative or improved efficient therapies for neurological disorders and, in particular, neurological disorders which are related to glutamate and/or amyloid beta toxicity. The present invention provides new treatments for such neurological diseases of the central nervous system (CNS) and the peripheral nervous system (PNS).
    • SUMMARY OF INVENTION
  • It is an object of the present invention to provide new therapeutic methods and compositions for treating neurological disorders. More particularly, the invention relates to compositions and methods for treating neurological disorders related to glutamate and/or amyloid beta (Aβ) toxicity, based on a combination of baclofen and acamprosate.
  • The invention stems, inter alia, from the unexpected discovery, by the inventors, that the combination of baclofen and acamprosate provides substantial and unexpected benefit to patients with Alzheimer's disease. Moreover, the inventors have surprisingly discovered that this combination provides substantial and unexpected protection of neuronal cells against various injuries encountered in neurological disorders including glutamate toxicity. Thus, this combination of baclofen and acamprosate constitutes an efficient treatment for patients suffering from, predisposed to, or suspected to suffer from neurological disorders. The inventors have found that combinations of the invention are efficient in counteracting the toxic cellular effects of Aβ peptides and in correcting the cognitive impairments in relation with such toxicity. The invention further demonstrates that baclofen and acamprosate administration does improve memory functions in aged subjects as well as cognitive functions, in particular by correcting cognition-related electro-physiological features in mild AD patients.
  • An object of this invention therefore relates to compositions comprising a combination of baclofen and acamprosate for use in the treatment of a neurological disorder, particularly AD and related disorders, multiple sclerosis (MS), amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), Parkinson's disease (PD), neuropathies (for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy), frontotemporal dementia (FTD), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, Huntington's disease (HD) and spinal cord injury.
  • The compositions of the invention may contain baclofen and acamprosate as the only active ingredients. Alternatively, the compositions may comprise additional active ingredient(s). In this regard, a further object of this invention relates to a composition comprising a combination of baclofen, acamprosate, and at least one third compound selected from sulfisoxazole, methimazole, prilocaine, dyphylline, quinacrine, carbenoxolone, aminocaproic acid, cabergoline, diethylcarbamazine, cinacalcet, cinnarizine, eplerenone, fenoldopam, leflunomide, levosimendan, sulodexide, terbinafine, zonisamide, etomidate, phenformin, trimetazidine, mexiletine, ifenprodil, moxifloxacin, bromocriptine or torasemide, for use in the treatment of neurological disorders in a subject in need thereof.
  • As it will be further disclosed in the present application, the compounds in a combinatorial therapy of the invention may be administered simultaneously, separately, sequentially and/or repeatedly to the subject.
  • The invention also relates to any pharmaceutical composition per se comprising a combination of at least two compounds as defined above.
  • The compositions of the invention typically further comprise one or several pharmaceutically acceptable excipients or carriers. Also, the compounds as used in the present invention may be in the form of a salt, hydrate, ester, ether, acid, amide, racemate, or isomer. They may also be in the form of sustained-release formulations. Prodrugs or derivatives of the compounds may be used as well.
  • In a preferred embodiment, a compound is used as such or in the form of a salt, hydrate, ester, ether or sustained release form thereof. A particularly preferred salt for use in the present invention is acamprosate calcium.
  • In another preferred embodiment, a prodrug or derivative is used.
  • A further object of this invention is a method of preparing a pharmaceutical composition, the method comprising mixing baclofen and acamprosate, in a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient or carrier.
  • Another object of this invention relates to a method for treating a neurological disorder in a mammalian subject in need thereof, preferably a human subject in need thereof, the method comprising administering to said subject an effective amount of a combination of the invention.
  • A further object of this invention relates to a method for treating Alzheimer's disease (AD) or a related disorder in a mammalian subject in need thereof, preferably a human subject in need thereof, the method comprising administering to said subject an effective amount of a combination of the invention.
  • A preferred object of this invention relates to a method for treating a neurological disorder in a mammalian subject in need thereof, preferably a human subject in need thereof, the method comprising simultaneously, separately or sequentially administering to said subject an effective amount of baclofen and acamprosate.
  • A particular object of this invention relates to a method of treating Frontotemporal Dementia (FTD) in a mammalian subject in need thereof, preferably a human subject in need thereof, the method comprising administering to said subject an effective amount of a combination of the invention.
  • A more preferred object of this invention relates to a method for treating AD or a related disorder in a mammalian subject in need thereof, preferably a human subject in need thereof, the method comprising simultaneously, separately or sequentially administering to said subject an effective amount of baclofen and acamprosate.
  • Another particular object of this invention relates to a method of treating Age Associated Memory Impairment (AAMI) in a mammalian subject in need thereof, preferably a human subject in need thereof, the method comprising administering to said subject an effective amount of a combination of the invention.
  • The invention may be used for treating a neurological disorder in any mammalian subject, preferably in any human subject, at any stage of the disease. As it will be disclosed in the examples, the compositions of the invention are able to ameliorate the pathological condition of said subjects.
    • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES
  • FIG. 1: Validation of the experimental model of human beta-amyloid toxicity on endothelial cells used for drug screening. One hour of VEGF pre-treatment at 10 nM significantly protected the capillary network from this amyloid injury (+70% of capillary network compared to amyloid intoxication).
  • FIGS. 2A-2C: Effect of baclofen (BCL) and acamprosate (ACP) combination therapy on the total length of capillary network in beta-amyloid intoxicated HBMEC cultures. The human amyloid peptide (Aβ1-42 2.5 μM) produces a significant intoxication, above 40%, compared to vehicle-treated cells. This intoxication is significantly prevented by the combination of acamprosate and baclofen (FIG. 2A) whereas, at those concentrations, acamprosate (FIG. 2B) and baclofen (FIG. 2C) alone have no significant effect on intoxication.
    Figure US20200085790A1-20200319-P00001
    : p<0.05, significantly different from Aβ1-42 intoxication; *: p<0.05, significantly different from vehicle; “ns” no significant effect (ANOVA+Dunnett Post-Hoc test).
  • FIG. 3: Effect of baclofen (BCL) and terbinafine (TBN) combination therapy on the total length of capillary network in beta-amyloid intoxicated HBMEC cultures. The human amyloid peptide (Aβ1-42 2.5 μM) produces a significant intoxication, above 40%, compared to vehicle-treated cells. This intoxication is prevented by the combination of terbinafine and baclofen. *: p<0.05: significantly different from control (no intoxication).
  • FIG. 4: Validation of the experimental model of human beta amyloid toxicity on neuronal cells used for drug screening. One hour of Estradiol (150 nM) or BDNF (50 ng/mL) pre-treatment significantly protected the neurons from this amyloid injury (−94%), which is considered as a positive control for neuroprotection. *: p<0.05, significantly different from control (no intoxication);
    Figure US20200085790A1-20200319-P00002
    : p<0.05, significantly different from Aβ1-42 intoxication.
  • FIGS. 5A-5C: Effect of acamprosate (ACP) and baclofen (BCL) combination therapy on LDH release in human Aβ1-42 toxicity on rat primary cortical cells. The human amyloid peptide (Aβ 1-42 10 μM) produces a significant intoxication compared to vehicle-treated neurons. This intoxication is significantly prevented by the combination of acamprosate and baclofen (FIG. 5A) whereas, at those concentrations, acamprosate (FIG. 5B) and baclofen (FIG. 5C) alone have no significant effect on intoxication.
    Figure US20200085790A1-20200319-P00003
    : p<:0.05, significantly different from Aβ1-42 intoxication; *: p<:0.05, significantly different from vehicle; “ns” no significant effect. (ANOVA+Dunnett Post-Hoc test).
  • FIG. 6: Effect of cinacalcet (CNC) and sulfisoxazole (SFX) combination therapy on LDH release in human Aβ1-42 toxicity on rat primary cortical cells. The human amyloid peptide (Aβ 1-42 10 μM) produces a significant intoxication compared to vehicle-treated neurons. This intoxication is prevented by the combination of cinacalcet and sulfisoxazole. *: p<0.05, significantly different from vehicle (ANOVA+Dunnett Post-Hoc test).
  • FIG. 7: Effect of acamprosate (ACP) and baclofen (BCL) combination therapy on the total length of neurite network in beta-amyloid intoxicated cortical neurons. The human amyloid peptide (Aβ1-42 2.5 μM) produces a significant intoxication, above 15%, compared to vehicle-treated cells. This intoxication is significantly prevented by the combination of acamprosate and baclofen whereas, at those concentrations, acamprosate and baclofen alone have no significant effect on intoxication. *: p<0.05, significantly different from Aβ1-42 intoxication; *: p<0.05, significantly different from vehicle (ANOVA+Dunnett Post-Hoc test).
  • FIG. 8: Effect of acamprosate and baclofen combination therapy on behaviour as defined by Y-maze test. The amyloid peptide produces a significant decrease in cognition as measured by percentage of alternation (53.8% versus 73.5%). This deleterious effect is significantly prevented (48.2% protection) by the combination of acamprosate (0.2 mg/kg bid) and baclofen (3 mg/kg bid). ⋄: p<0.05, significantly different from Aβ25-35 intoxication; *: p<0.05, significantly different from control (ANOVA+Dunnett Post-Hoc test).
  • FIG. 9: Effect of acamprosate and baclofen combination therapy on memory as defined by passive avoidance (escape latency). The amyloid peptide produces a significant decrease in memory performances as measured by escape latency compared to control. This deleterious effect is significantly prevented (complete protection) by the combination of acamprosate (0.2 mg/kg bid) and baclofen (3 mg/kg bid). ⋄: p<:0.05, significantly different from Aβ25-35 intoxication; *: p<0.05, significantly different from control (ANOVA+Dunnett Post-Hoc test).
  • FIG. 10: Effect of acamprosate and baclofen combination therapy on memory as defined by passive avoidance (step-through latency). The amyloid peptide produces a significant decrease in memory performance as measured by step-through latency, above 44%, compared to control. This deleterious effect is significantly prevented (78.8% protection) by the combination of acamprosate (0.2 mg/kg bid) and baclofen (3 mg/kg bid) whereas, at those concentrations, acamprosate and baclofen alone have a lower effect on intoxication. ⋄: p<0.05, significantly different from Aβ25-35 intoxication; *: p<0.05, significantly different from control (ANOVA+Dunnett Post-Hoc test).
  • FIG. 11: Effect of acamprosate and baclofen combination therapy on neuron's density in the hippocampus. The amyloid peptide produces a significant decrease in neuronal density as measured by the number of neurons per millimeter in the hippocampus, above 21%, compared to control. This neuronal injury is significantly prevented (63.2% of injured neurons are protected) by the combination of acamprosate (0.2 mg/kg bid) and baclofen (3 mg/kg bid). ⋄: p<0.05, significantly different from Aβ25-35 intoxication; *: p<0.05, significantly different from control (ANOVA+Dunnett Post-Hoc test).
  • FIG. 12: Effect of acamprosate and baclofen combination therapy on the blood-brain barrier (BBB) integrity. The amyloid peptide affects the blood-brain barrier, inducing a significant increase of its permeability, above 51%, compared to control. Those damages on the blood-brain barrier are significantly prevented (66.6% of the integrity restored) by the combination of acamprosate (0.2 mg/kg bid) and baclofen (3 mg/kg bid). ⋄: p<0.05, significantly different from Aβ25-35 intoxication, *. p<0.05, significantly different from control (ANOVA+Dunnett Post-Hoc test).
  • FIG. 13: Effect of acamprosate and baclofen combination therapy on synaptic density as reflected by the synaptophysin concentration. The amyloid peptide affects synapse function, inducing a significant decrease in the synaptophysin concentration in the brain, above 34%, compared to control. Those damages on the synaptic density are significantly prevented (76%) by the combination of acamprosate (0.2 mg/kg bid) and baclofen (3 mg/kg bid). ⋄: p<0.05, significantly different from Aβ25-35 intoxication, *: p<0.05, significantly different from control (ANOVA+Dunnett Post-Hoc test).
  • FIG. 14: Protective effect of acamprosate and baclofen combination therapy on oxidative stress in the hippocampus. The amyloid peptide induces a significant increase in oxidative stress in the hippocampus as measured by lipid peroxydation, above 59%, compared to control. This oxidative stress is significantly prevented (65.9%) by the combination of acamprosate (0.2 mg/kg bid) and baclofen (3 mg/kg bid). ⋄: p<0.05, significantly different from Aβ25-35 intoxication; *: p<0.05, significantly different from control (ANOVA+Dunnett Post-Hoc test).
  • FIG. 15: Effect of baclofen and acamprosate combination therapy against glutamate toxicity on neuronal cortical cells. Glutamate intoxication is significantly prevented by the combination of baclofen (400 nM) and acamprosate (1.6 nlM) whereas, at those concentrations, baclofen and acamprosate alone have no significant effect on intoxication. ⋄: p<0.001, significantly different from glutamate intoxication; (ANOVA+Dunnett Post-Hoc test).
  • FIG. 16: Effect of donepezil, acamprosate and baclofen combination therapy on behaviour and cognitive performance as defined by the Y-maze test. The amyloid peptide produces a significant decrease in cognition as measured by percentage of alternation (51.5% versus 71.8%). This deleterious effect is significantly prevented (98% protection) by the combination of donepezil (0.25 mg/kg/day), acamprosate (32 μg/kg bid) and baclofen (480 μg/kg bid), whereas at those concentrations the drugs alone have no significant effect. ⋄: p<0.01, significantly different from Aβ25-35 intoxication; *: p<0.01, significantly different from control (ANOVA+Dunnett Post-Hoc test).
  • FIG. 17: Comparison of protective effect of acamprosate and its derivative homotaurine pre-treatment in human Aβ1-42 toxicity assays on rat primary cortical cells. Aβ1-42 produces a significant intoxication compared to vehicle-treated neurons. The intoxication is equally significantly prevented by homotaurine and acamprosate (99%, 8 nM). ⋄: p<0.0001: significantly different from Aβ1-42 intoxication (ANOVA+Dunnett Post-Hoc test).
  • FIG. 18: Effect of acamprosate and baclofen combination therapy on the development of chronic progressive experimental autoimmune encephalomyelitis (EAE) as defined by clinical score. Immunization induces a significant decrease in physical features as measured by clinical score. This deleterious effect is significantly prevented (p-value<0.01) by the combination of acamprosate (2 mg/kg/day) and baclofen (30 mg/kg/day).
  • FIG. 19: Effect of memantine, acamprosate and baclofen combination therapy on behaviour and cognitive performances as defined by Y-maze test. The amyloid peptide produces a significant decrease in cognition as measured by percentage of alternation (57.7% versus 69.7%). This deleterious effect is significantly prevented (79.2% protection) by the combination of memantine (0.5 mg/kg/day), acamprosate (32 μg/kg bid) and baclofen (480 μg/kg bid), whereas at those concentrations the drugs alone have no significant effect. ⋄⋄: p<0.01, ⋄: p<0.05, significantly different from Aβ25-35 intoxication; *: p<0.05, significantly different from control (ANOVA+Dunnett Post-Hoc test).
  • FIG. 20: Baclofen (BCL)-acamprosate (ACP) combination protects synapse integrity from Aβ1-42 toxicity. Aβ1-42 (0.3 μM) intoxication induces a loss in synaptic junctions between hippocampal neurons (almost 34%), as determined by quantification of colocalization of PSD93 and synaptophysin proteins (black bar). This effect is significantly reversed upon treatment with BCL and ACP combination (80 nM and 0.32 nM respectively) by up to 62% (light grey bar). ***: p<0.001, significantly different from Aβ intoxicated cells.
  • FIGS. 21A-21D: Baclofen-acamprosate combination reduces Aβ1-42-induced changes within neurones in vitro. (FIG. 21A) Aβ1-42 intoxication induces oxidative stress as shown by the increase of 18% of MetO residues within the cells cultured in the presence of Aβ1-42 compared to control. Baclofen (0.32 nM) and acamprosate (80 nM) treatment significantly lowers Aβ1-42 induced oxidative stress as reported by a drop of 60% of MetO residues in treated, intoxicated cells. (FIG. 21B) Aβ1-42 intoxication results in the triggering of apoptotic events as the increase of cytoplasmic cytochrome C (Cyto C) released from mitochondria (above 150% control). Baclofen and acamprosate combination significantly reduces by more than 30% the release of mitochondrial Cyto C in intoxicated cells. (FIG. 21C) Aβ1-42 intoxication results in an increase of 46% of phosphorylated Tau protein (pTauSer212/Thr214) within the cells, compared to control, non-intoxicated cells. Quantity of phosphorylated Tau protein in Aβ1-42 intoxicated neurons is significantly reduced by more than 90% upon treatment with baclofen and acamprosate. (FIG. 21D) Baclofen-acamprosate combination diminishes by more than 90% the release of glutamate in the culture medium of Aβ1-42-intoxicated cells. Values are mean±s.e.m. ***: p<0.001 versus Aβ (ANOVA+Dunnett Post-Hoc test).
  • FIGS. 22A-22D: Acamprosate (ACP) acts through GABAA, glycine and metabotropic glutamatergic receptor signaling. Aβ1-42 (10 μM) produces a significant intoxication of cells (-, black bars, up to 40% of death) compared to vehicle-treated neurons (control, white bars). This intoxication is efficiently prevented by acamprosate 8 nM (grey bars, up to 71% improvement). Muscimol, a GABAA receptor agonist (FIG. 22A), strychnine, a glycine receptor antagonist (FIG. 22B), DHPG, a mGluR1/5 agonist (FIG. 22C) and (2R,4R)-APDC, a mGluR2/3 agonist (FIG. 22D) all block ACP protection of rat primary neuronal cells. Values are mean±s.e.m. ***: p<0.001 versus Aβ, or ACP pretreated and Aβ intoxicated cells (ANOVA+Dunnett Post-Hoc test). “Control”: non-Aβ intoxicated non treated cells; “-”: Aβ intoxicated cells. mGluR1/5 and mGluR2/3: metabotropic glutamate group I and II receptors respectively.
  • FIG. 23: Simultaneous activity on three main features of AD within given concentration ranges, i.e., baclofen: from 80 nM to 1 μM and acamprosate: from 320 pM to 4 nM. Baclofen-acamprosate combination has been found to be neuroprotective and to improve, at the same time, synapse function (neuron plasticity) and endothelial cell function (angiogenesis). S: drug concentrations at which the combination exerts a synergistic effect in the corresponding in vitro models.
  • FIGS. 24A-24B: A one-month treatment with baclofen-acamprosate combination (acamprosate 0.2 mg/kg bid and baclofen 3 mg/kg bid) is effective in improving cognition in hAPPSL mice of 8 months, when compared to non-treated transgenic mice both during the acquisition phase or the test phase. (FIG. 24A) On day 4 the latency observed for treated transgenic mice is significantly different from that exhibited by non-treated transgenic mice. (FIG. 24B) Escape latency for swim 1 and swim 2 in treated transgenic mice is significantly different from non-treated transgenic mice. Globally performances of all treated transgenic mice are better than those of non-treated transgenic mice and similar to those of non-transgenic animals. Values are mean±s.e.m. *: p<0.05, treated transgenic animals are different from non-treated transgenic animals (ANOVA+Dunnett Post-Hoc test); ◯◯◯: p<0.001. Performances of baclofen-acamprosate-treated animals are globally significantly different from performances of non-treated transgenic animals (ANOVA+Dunnett Post-Hoc test).
  • FIG. 25: Baclofen-acamprosate combination efficiently reduces scopolamine-induced cognitive impairments in humans. Raw data scores in Groton Maze Learning Test (GMLT) are plotted along the vertical scale. An increase in the score corresponds to an impairment of performance in GMLT. Scopolamine (administered at H3) induces a rapid decrease in cognitive performance in placebo-treated subjects (circles, dotted line) which lasts for approximately 6 hours (H9) after scopolamine injection. Baclofen-acamprosate mix (squares, grey/solid line) is efficient over this period in reducing the deleterious effects of scopolamine on cognitive performance. A significant improvement in cognitive scores is observed in the time window corresponding to the higher plasmatic concentrations of baclofen and acamprosate (shaded bar below the horizontal scale, dark: higher plasmatic concentrations, light: lower plasmatic concentrations).
  • FIG. 26: ADAS-cog (Alzheimer's Disease Assessment Scale Cognitive Subscale) score evolution (change from baseline) during single blind Challenge-De-challenge-Re-challenge (CDR) clinical trial on 24 mild AD subjects. ADAS-cog score is evaluated at the beginning and the end of each period during visits to the neurophysiologist (V). The efficiency of baclofen-acamprosate mix is supported by the clear succession of improvement, worsening and improvement phases in correlation with the challenge (plain line), de-challenge (dotted line) and re-challenge phases (plain line). Data are obtained from the gathering of the whole data from dose 1 and dose 2 administered patients. Cognition is significantly improved considering the whole duration of the study (V1 versus V4 score comparison, p<0.05); a significant improvement is also noticed at the end of the challenge phase (V1 versus V2 score comparison, p<0.01).
  • FIG. 27: Records of P300 wave all along the Challenge-De-challenge-Re-challenge (CDR) study, in a subject suffering from mild AD treated with 0.4 mg acamprosate and 6 mg baclofen, each bid. Baclofen-acamprosate combination is efficient in correcting the electrophysiological mechanisms underlying cognitive processes in AD patients. ERPs were recorded at each visit (V1-V4) to the neurophysiologist. Each curve is a modelling of the whole recordings from the different electrodes. It clearly appears that, from V2 to V4, the P300 subcomponent waves consistently shift to the left during all the duration of the study, thereby showing a decrease in latency. An improvement of amplitude is also observed (Student's T-test on paired data).
  • FIG. 28: A 17-week treatment with baclofen-acamprosate combination efficiently improves working memory performances of aged mice (more than 28 months). Percentage of alternation in T-maze test is significantly improved (by more than 50%) in treated aged mice when compared to non-treated mice. Values are mean±s.e.m. ***p<0.001, treated aged animals are significantly different from non-treated aged animals (ANOVA+Dunnett Post-Hoc test).
    •  DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
  • The present invention provides new methods and compositions for treating neurological disorders. The invention discloses novel drug combinations which allow an effective correction of such diseases and may be used in any mammalian subject.
  • The invention is suited for treating any neurological disorder, whether central or peripheral, particularly disorders wherein nerve or neuron injuries, 3 amyloid, BBB breakdown or glutamate excitotoxicity are involved. Specific examples of such disorders include neurodegenerative diseases, neuropathies, spinal cord injury, and substance abuse such as alcoholism.
    • Definitions
  • “Neurodegenerative disorders” refers to diseases, such as Alzheimer's disease (AD) and related disorders, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS), multiple sclerosis (MS), Parkinson's disease (PD), and Huntington's disease (HD), encompassing a progressive loss of function and death of neurons.
  • “Neuropathies” refers to conditions where nerves of the peripheral nervous system are damaged; this includes damage of the peripheral nervous system provoked by genetic factors, inflammatory disease, or chemical substance including drugs (vincristine, oxaliplatin, ethyl alcohol). The treatment of neuropathies also includes the treatment of neuropathic pain.
  • The invention is particularly suited for treating AD and related disorders. In the context of this invention, the term “related disorder” includes senile dementia of AD type (SDAT), frontotemporal dementia (FTD), vascular dementia, mild cognitive impairment (MCI) and age-associated memory impairment (AAMI).
  • As used herein, “treatment” includes the therapy, prevention, prophylaxis, retardation or reduction of symptoms provoked by or of the causes of the above diseases or disorders. The term “treatment” includes in particular the control of disease progression and associated symptoms. The term “treatment” particularly includes i) a protection against the toxicity caused by amyloid beta, or a reduction or retardation of said toxicity, and/or ii) a protection against glutamate excitotoxicity, or a reduction or retardation of said toxicity, in the treated subjects. The term “treatment” also designates an improvement of cognitive symptoms or a protection of neuronal cells.
  • Within the context of this invention, the designation of a specific drug or compound is meant to include not only the specifically named molecule, but also any pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, derivative, isomer, racemate, conjugate, prodrug or derivative thereof of any chemical purity.
  • The terms “combination” or “combinatorial treating/therapy” designate a treatment wherein at least baclofen and acamprosate are co-administered to a subject to cause a biological effect. In a combined therapy according to this invention, the at least two drugs may be administered together or separately, at the same time or sequentially. Also, the at least baclofen and acamprosate may be administered through different routes and protocols. As a result, although they may be formulated together, the drugs of a combination may also be formulated separately.
  • The term “prodrug” as used herein refers to any functional derivatives (or precursors) of a compound of the present invention, which, when administered to a biological system, generate said compound as a result of, e.g., spontaneous chemical reaction(s), enzyme catalysed chemical reaction(s), and/or metabolic chemical reaction(s). Prodrugs are usually inactive or less active than the resulting drug and can be used, for example, to improve the physicochemical properties of the drug, to target the drug to a specific tissue, to improve the pharmacokinetic and pharmacodynamic properties of the drug and/or to reduce undesirable side effects. Some of the common functional groups that are amenable to prodrug design include, but are not limited to, carboxylic, hydroxyl, amine, phosphate/phosphonate and carbonyl groups. Prodrugs typically produced via the modification of these groups include, but are not limited to, esters, carbonates, carbamates, amides and phosphates. Specific technical guidance for the selection of suitable prodrugs is general common knowledge [27-31]. Furthermore, the preparation of prodrugs may be performed by conventional methods known by those skilled in the art. Methods which can be used to synthesize other prodrugs are described in numerous reviews on the subject [28, 32-38]. For example, arbaclofen placarbil is listed in the ChemID plus Advance database (website: chem.sis.nlm.nih.gov/chemidplus/) and arbaclofen placarbil is a well-known prodrug of baclofen [39, 40].
  • The term “derivative” of a compound includes any molecule that is functionally and/or structurally related to said compound, such as an acid, amide, ester, ether, acetylated variant, hydroxylated variant, or alkylated (C1-C6) variant of such a compound. The term derivative also includes structurally related compounds having lost one or more substituent as listed above. For example, homotaurine is a deacetylated derivative of acamprosate. Preferred derivatives of a compound are molecules having a substantial degree of similarity to said compound, as determined by known methods. Similar compounds along with their index of similarity to a parent molecule can be found in numerous databases such as PubChem (see Worldwide Website: pubchem.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/search/) or DrugBank (see Worldwide Website: drugbank.ca/). In a more preferred embodiment, derivatives should have a Tanimoto similarity index greater than 0.4, preferably greater than 0.5, more preferably greater than 0.6, even more preferably greater than 0.7 with a parent drug. The Tanimoto similarity index is widely used to measure the degree of structural similarity between two molecules. Tanimoto similarity index can be computed by software such as the Small Molecule Subgraph Detector [41, 42] available online (see Worldwide Website: ebi.ac.uk/thornton-srv/software/SMSD/). Preferred derivatives should be both structurally and functionally related to a parent compound, i.e., they should also retain at least part of the activity of the parent drug, more preferably they should have a protective activity against Aβ or glutamate toxicity.
  • The term “derivative” also includes metabolites of a drug, e.g., molecules which result from the (biochemical) modification(s) or processing of said drug after administration to an organism, usually through specialized enzymatic systems, and which display or retain a biological activity of the drug. Metabolites have been disclosed as being responsible for much of the therapeutic action of the parent drug. In a specific embodiment, a “metabolite” as used herein designates a modified or processed drug that retains at least part of the activity of the parent drug, preferably that has a protective activity against Aβ toxicity or glutamate toxicity.
  • The term “salt” refers to a pharmaceutically acceptable and relatively non-toxic, inorganic or organic salt of a compound of the present invention. Pharmaceutical salt formation consists of pairing an acidic, basic or zwitterionic drug molecule with a counterion to create a salt version of the drug. A wide variety of chemical species can be used in neutralization reactions. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the invention thus include those obtained by reacting the main compound, functioning as a base, with an inorganic or organic acid to form a salt, for example, salts of acetic acid, nitric acid, tartaric acid, hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, phosphoric acid, methane sulfonic acid, camphor sulfonic acid, oxalic acid, maleic acid, succinic acid or citric acid. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the invention also include those in which the main compound functions as an acid and is reacted with an appropriate base to form, e.g., sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, ammonium, or choline salts. Though most of salts of a given active principle are bioequivalents, some may have, among others, increased solubility or bioavailability properties. Salt selection is now a common standard operation in the process of drug development as taught by H. Stahl and C. G. Wermuth in their handbook [43].
  • In a preferred embodiment, the designation of a compound is meant to designate the compound per se, as well as any pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, isomer, racemate, ester or ether thereof.
  • In a more preferred embodiment, the designation of a compound is meant to designate the compound as specifically designated per se, as well as any pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
  • In a particular embodiment, a sustained-release formulation of the compound is used.
    • Compositions and Methods of the Invention
  • As discussed above, the invention relates to particular drug combinations which have a strong unexpected effect on several biological processes involved in neurological disorders. These drug combinations therefore represent novel approaches for treating neurological disorders, such as Alzheimer's disease and related disorders, multiple sclerosis, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Parkinson's disease, Huntington's disease, neuropathies (for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, and spinal cord injury. More specifically, the invention discloses compositions, comprising baclofen in combination with acamprosate, which provide a significant effect in vivo on neurological disorders.
  • Indeed, the invention shows, in the experimental part, that combination therapies comprising baclofen and acamprosate can substantially improve the condition of patients afflicted with neurological disorders. In particular, the inventors have surprisingly discovered that baclofen and acamprosate combinations have a strong, unexpected effect on the length of the capillary network, on LDH release in beta-amyloid intoxicated nervous cells as well as on the length of the neurite network, and represent new therapeutic approaches for AD. They have also discovered that baclofen-acamprosate combinations are efficient in lowering the Aβ induced oxidative stress, apoptosis, glutamate release and phosphorylated Tau accumulation in neuronal cells.
  • Also, the examples show that, in a combination therapy of the invention, baclofen may be effective at a dose of 80 nM or less, and acamprosate may be effective at a dose of 1 nM or less. These results are remarkable and particularly advantageous since, at such low doses, any possible side effects are avoided. Moreover the inventors have been able to determine plasmatic and/or brain concentration ranges at which such a combination therapy exerts a simultaneous protective activity against the three aspects of Aβ toxicity in relation with AD pathogenesis, i.e., angiogenesis, neuronal protection and neuronal plasticity. Furthermore, these combinations effectively protect neuronal cells from various afflictions such as glutamate toxicity and oxidative stress, and prevent BBB permeabilization and neuronal cell induced apoptosis, which are involved in several neurological disorders.
  • The present invention therefore proposes a novel therapy for neurological disorders, based on baclofen and acamprosate compositions. More particularly, the present invention therefore proposes a novel therapy for Alzheimer's disease and related disorders, multiple sclerosis, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Parkinson's disease, Huntington's disease, neuropathies (for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, and spinal cord injury, based on baclofen and acamprosate combinations.
  • In this regard, in a particular embodiment, the invention relates to a composition comprising baclofen and acamprosate.
  • In a further embodiment, the invention relates to a composition comprising baclofen and acamprosate for use in the treatment of AD, AD-related disorders, MS, PD, ALS, HD, neuropathies (for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, or spinal cord injury.
  • In a further embodiment, the invention relates to the use of baclofen and acamprosate for the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of AD, AD-relateddisorders, MS, PD, ALS, HD, neuropathies (for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, or spinal cord injury.
  • Illustrative CAS numbers for baclofen and acamprosate are provided in Table 1 below. Table 1 cites also, in a non-limitative way, common salts, racemates, prodrugs, metabolites or derivatives for these compounds used in the compositions of the invention.
  • TABLE 1
    Class or
    Tanimoto
    Drug CAS Numbers similarity index
    Acamprosate and related compounds
    Acamprosate 77337-76-9; 77337-73-6 NA
    Homotaurine 3687-18-1 0.73
    Ethyl Dimethyl Ammonio / 0.77
    Propane Sulfonate
    Taurine 107-35-7 0.5
    Baclofen and related compounds
    Baclofen 1134-47-0; 66514-99-6; NA
    69308-37-8; 70206-22-3;
    63701-56-4; 63701-55-3
    3-(p-chlorophenyl)-4- / Metabolite
    hydroxybutyric acid
    Arbaclofen placarbil 847353-30-4 Prodrug
  • Specific examples of prodrugs of baclofen are given in Hanafi et al. [44], particularly baclofen esters and baclofen ester carbamates, which are of particular interest for CNS targeting. Hence such prodrugs are particularly suitable for compositions of this invention. Arbaclofen placarbil as mentioned before is also a well-known prodrug and may thus be used instead of baclofen in compositions of the invention. Other prodrugs of baclofen can be found in the following patent applications: WO2010102071, US2009197958, WO2009096985, WO2009061934, WO2008086492, US2009216037, WO2005066122, US2011021571, WO2003077902, and WO2010120370.
  • Useful prodrugs for acamprosate such as pantoic acid ester neopentyl sulfonyl esters, neopentyl sulfonyl ester prodrugs of acamprosate or masked carboxylate neopentyl sulfonyl ester prodrugs of acamprosate are notably listed in WO2009033069, WO2009033061, WO2009033054, WO2009052191, WO2009033079, US 2009/0099253, US 2009/0069419, US 2009/0082464, US 2009/0082440, and US 2009/0076147.
  • Baclofen and acamprosate combination therapy may be used alone or may be further combined with additional compounds. In this regard, in a particular embodiment, the compositions of the invention may further comprise at least one compound selected from sulfisoxazole, methimazole, prilocaine, dyphylline, quinacrine, carbenoxolone, aminocaproic acid, cabergoline, diethylcarbamazine, cinacalcet, cinnarizine, eplerenone, fenoldopam, leflunomide, levosimendan, sulodexide, terbinafine, zonisamide, etomidate, phenformin, trimetazidine, mexiletine, ifenprodil, moxifloxacin, bromocriptine or torasemide. Illustrative CAS numbers for each of these compounds are provided in Table 2 below:
  • TABLE 2
    DRUG NAME CAS NUMBER
    Aminocaproic Acid 60-32-2
    Bromocriptine 25614-03-3
    Cabergoline 81409-90-7
    Carbenoxolone 5697-56-3
    Cinacalcet 226256-56-0
    Cinnarizine 298-57-7
    Diethylcarbamazine 90-89-1
    Dyphylline 479-18-5
    Eplerenone 107724-20-9
    Etomidate 33125-97-2
    Fenoldopam 67227-57-0
    Ifenprodil 23210-56-2 or 23210-58-4
    Leflunomide 75706-12-6
    Levosimendan 141505-33-1
    Methimazole 60-56-0
    Mexiletine 5370-01-4 or 31828-71-4
    Moxifloxacin 354812-41-2
    Phenformin 114-86-3
    Prilocaine 721-50-6 or 14289-31-7 or 14289-32-8
    Quinacrine 83-89-6
    Sulfisoxazole 127-69-5
    Sulodexide 57821-29-1
    Terbinafine 91161-71-6
    Torasemide 56211-40-6 or 72810-59-4
    Trimetazidine 5011-34-7 or 13171-25-0
    Zonisamide 68291-97-4
  • In a particular embodiment, the invention relates to the use of this combination for treating AD or a related disorder in a subject in need thereof.
  • In another particular embodiment, the invention relates to the use of this combination for treating an AD-related disorder selected from senile dementia of AD type (SDAT), frontotemporal dementia (FTD), vascular dementia, mild cognitive impairment (MCI) and age-associated memory impairment (AAMI).
  • A particular object of this invention relates to a method of treating frontotemporal dementia (FTD) in a mammalian subject in need thereof, preferably a human subject in need thereof, the method comprising administering to said subject an effective amount of a combination of the invention.
  • In a particular embodiment, the invention relates to the use of this combination for treating MS, PD, ALS, HD, neuropathies (for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, or spinal cord injury in a subject in need thereof.
  • As disclosed in the examples, composition therapies using at least baclofen and acamprosate have a strong unexpected effect on biological processes leading to neuronal injuries. Furthermore, these combinations also showed in vivo a very efficient ability to correct symptoms of neurological diseases. These combinations therefore represent novel approaches for treating neurological disorders, such as AD, MS, ALS, PD, HD, neuropathies (for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, and spinal cord injury. These compositions efficiently prevent toxicity of amyloid β (Aβ) peptide or glutamate excitotoxicity in neuronal cells. More particularly, as shown in the experimental section, these compositions are efficient at counteracting, simultaneously, the detrimental effects of intoxication by Aβ oligomers at the synaptic, neuronal and endothelial levels. Such combination of effects is particularly advantageous and leads to a significant improvement of the disease both in several in vivo models for AD and in clinical trials. Indeed, in vivo, these compositions lead to an improvement of several cognitive symptoms as well as to protection of neuronal cells.
  • Furthermore the experimental section shows that the above-mentioned compositions are also efficient at i) synergistically protecting in vitro neuronal cells from glutamate excitotoxicity, and ii) conferring clinical benefit in in vivo models for diseases related to glutamate excitotoxicity.
  • Hence they represent novel and potent methods for treating such disorders.
  • The compositions of the invention may comprise 2, 3, 4 or 5 distinct drugs, more preferably 2, 3 or 4 distinct drugs for combinatorial treatment of Alzheimer's disease (AD), AD-related disorders. MS, PD, ALS, HD, neuropathies (for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, or spinal cord injury in a subject in need thereof. In a preferred embodiment, the drugs of the invention are used in combination(s) for combined, separate or sequential administration, in order to provide the most effective effect.
  • Preferred compositions of the invention, for use in the treatment of a neurological disorder such as Alzheimer's disease (AD), AD-related disorders, MS, PD, ALS, HD, neuropathies (for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, or spinal cord injury, comprise one of the following drug combinations, for combined, separate or sequential administration:
      • baclofen and acamprosate,
      • baclofen and acamprosate and diethylcarbamazine,
      • baclofen and acamprosate and cinacalcet,
      • baclofen and acamprosate and sulfisoxazole,
      • baclofen and acamprosate and torasemide,
      • baclofen and acamprosate and ifenprodil,
      • baclofen and acamprosate and mexiletine.
      • baclofen and acamprosate and eplerenone,
      • baclofen and acamprosate and levosimendan,
      • baclofen and acamprosate and terbinafine, or
      • baclofen and acamprosate and leflunomide.
  • As disclosed in the experimental section, combinatorial therapies of the invention provide substantial therapeutic and biological effects to improve Alzheimer's disease or related disorders in both animal model and human subjects. They induce a strong neuroprotective effect against AB toxicity, notably through the inhibition of Aβ-induced apoptosis and oxidative stress. They also give positive results in behavioural performances and biochemical assays in rodents. Results show that compositions of the invention in vivo: (i) efficiently correct molecular pathways triggered by AD oligomers, and (ii) lead to an improvement of neurophysiological impairments observed in diseased animals as neuron survival or synapse integrity. Results also show that compositions of the invention efficiently restore the blood-brain barrier (BBB) and prevent, retard, or lessen apoptosis triggering, which are known to be impaired in several neurological diseases. Combinatorial therapies are also efficient at correcting memory impairment in aged animals. Results from clinical trials in human subjects also show an activity on cognitive performances of AD patients.
  • Moreover, the results presented also show that the above combinations therapies have an important synergistic neuroprotective effect against glutamate excitotoxicity (FIG. 15), a pathway which is implicated in various neurological diseases such as AD, MS, PD, ALS, HD, neuropathies (for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, or spinal cord injury. These therapies give positive results in in vivo or in vitro models for these diseases.
  • Furthermore, the particularly high synergistic interaction observed for these two drugs through the combinatorial treatment of the invention allows the use of drug concentrations showing no effect when used in single-drug treatment. Moreover, as shown in the experimental section, the baclofen and acamprosate combination causes an enhanced therapeutic benefit in treating Alzheimer's disease compared to other therapeutic combinations. These compositions efficiently prevent the toxic effects of amyloid β protein or peptide on human cells and in an in vivo model and represent novel and potent methods for treating such disorder.
  • An object of this invention thus also resides in a composition as defined above for treating a neurological disorder such as AD, AD-related disorders, MS, PD, ALS, HD, neuropathies (for instance alcoholic neuropathy or neuropathic pain), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, or spinal cord injury.
  • As indicated previously, in a combination therapy of this invention, the compounds or drugs may be formulated together or separately, and administered together, separately or sequentially.
  • A further object of this invention resides in the use of a composition as defined above for the manufacture of a medicament for treating a neurological disorder such as Alzheimer's disease (AD), AD-related disorders, MS, PD, ALS, HD, neuropathies (for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, or spinal cord injury.
  • The invention further provides a method for treating a neurological disorder such as Alzheimer's disease (AD), AD-related disorders, MS, PD, ALS, HD, neuropathies (for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, or spinal cord injury, comprising administering to a subject in need thereof an effective amount of a composition as disclosed above.
  • A further object of the invention is a method of treating a neurological disorder such as Alzheimer's disease (AD), AD-related disorders, MS, PD, ALS, HD, neuropathies (for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, or spinal cord injury, the method comprising simultaneously, separately or sequentially administering to a subject in need thereof an effective amount of a composition as disclosed above.
  • In a preferred embodiment, the invention relates to a method of treating a neurological disorder such as Alzheimer's disease (AD), AD-related disorders, MS, PD, ALS, HD, neuropathies (for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, or spinal cord injury in a subject in need thereof, comprising administering simultaneously, separately or sequentially to the subject an effective amount of baclofen and acamprosate.
  • The compositions of the invention typically comprise one or several pharmaceutically acceptable carriers or excipients. Also, for use in the present invention, the drugs or compounds are usually mixed with pharmaceutically acceptable excipients or carriers.
  • In this regard, a further object of this invention is a method of preparing a pharmaceutical composition, the method comprising mixing the above compounds in an appropriate excipient or carrier.
  • In a particular embodiment, the method comprises mixing baclofen and acamprosate in an appropriate excipient or carrier.
  • According to preferred embodiments of the invention, as indicated above, the compounds are used as such or in the form of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, prodrug, derivative, or sustained release formulation thereof.
  • Although very effective in vitro and in vivo, depending on the subject or specific condition, the combination therapy of the invention may further be used in conjunction, association or combination with additional drugs or treatments beneficial to the treated neurological condition in the subject.
  • Other therapies used in conjunction with drug(s) or drug(s) combination(s) according to the present invention may comprise one or more drug(s) that ameliorate symptoms of Alzheimer's disease, an AD-related disorder, MS, PD, ALS, HD, neuropathies (for instance neuropathic pain or alcoholic neuropathy), alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, or spinal cord injury, or drug(s) that could be used for palliative treatment of these disorders. For instance, results also show that the above combination therapies have an important synergistic neuroprotective effect when combined with donepezil (FIG. 16) or memantine (FIG. 19), thereby allowing the use of low doses of said compounds and avoiding or lessening side effects. Thereby, illustrative therapies which can be used with combinations of the invention are donepezil (CAS: 120014-06-4), galantamine (CAS: 357-70-0), gabapentine (CAS: 478296-72-9; 60142-96-3), rivastigmine (CAS: 123441-03-2) or memantine (CAS: 19982-08-2). The above CAS numbers are only given in an illustrative way, and common salts, enantiomeric forms, racemates, prodrugs, metabolites or derivatives of the above compounds should be also considered.
  • In this regard, in a particular embodiment, the drug(s) or compositions according to the present invention may be further combined with Ginkgo Biloba extracts. Suitable extracts include, without limitation, Ginkgo biloba extracts, improved Ginkgo biloba extracts (for example enriched in active ingredients or lessened in contaminants) or any drug containing Ginkgo biloba extracts.
  • In another particular embodiment, the drug(s) or compositions according to the present invention may be further combined with drugs or compounds which are currently under phase III clinical trial for AD. These drugs or compounds include Epigallocatechin-3-gallate, Human neutral insulin, Idalopirdine, Vanutide cridificar, Durin-Leuprolide acetate, Gantenerumab, Latrepirdine hydrochloride, Solanezumab, Masitinib mesylate, Encenicline hydrochloride, Leuco methylthioninium salt, IGIV, Lu-AE-58-054, VP4896, INM-176, R04909832, SK-PCB70M, AC-1204, and MK8931.
  • Furthermore, the inventors have been able to decipher the molecular mechanisms underlying the unexpected efficiency of combinations of the invention. The results show that (i) baclofen exerts a Gaba B agonistic activity which is essential for neuroprotective activity and (ii) acamprosate exerts a particular pattern of biological interactions (Table 3) that is essential for a neuroprotective effect in the context of AD or AD-related disorders
  • TABLE 3
    Group I Group II
    metabotropic metabotropic
    Gaba A Glycine glutamatergic glutamatergic
    receptors receptors receptors receptors
    Acamprosate antagonist agonist antagonist antagonist
    activity*
    *pattern of activity that has been shown necessary to afford a protective effect against toxicity of Aβ
  • As shown in the experimental section, counteracting only one of these mechanisms of action results in an almost total abolition of the neuroprotective effect of acamprosate against Aβ toxicity (FIG. 22). Notably, the inventors show for the first time that, in the context of AD pathogenesis, acamprosate exerts an antagonistic effect on GABA A receptors which is essential to afford neuroprotection against Aβ. Hence, together with the agonistic action of baclofen on GABA B receptors, the concerted action of acamprosate on the four identified receptor families leads to a particularly efficient therapeutic effect as described in this whole disclosure. This concerted action on several targets when using only one drug thus makes acamprosate of particular interest.
  • Furthermore, based on the knowledge of the pattern of action provided in the present application, it is now possible to design and use alternative combinations of drugs in replacement of, e.g., acamprosate. Such alternative combinations should exhibit the same pattern of biological interaction as shown for acamprosate in Table 3 and, in particular, they should (i) antagonize GABA A receptors and Group I and II metabotropic receptors, and (ii) lead to increased activity of glycinic receptors.
  • Consequently, in a particular embodiment, this invention relates to a combination of baclofen with a drug having an antagonist activity on GABA A receptors, as well as on Group I and II metabotropic receptors, and an agonist activity on glycinic receptors.
  • In a particular embodiment, the invention relates to a combination of baclofen with a combination of drugs, said combination of drugs having an antagonistic activity toward GABA A receptors and Group I and II metabotropic receptors, as well as an agonistic activity toward glycinic channels. Said combination of drugs used as an alternative to acamprosate can comprise 2, 3, 4, 5 or even 6 drugs in order to mimic the pleiotropic activity of acamprosate. Ideally, some of the drugs used in said composition act on several of the targets identified by the inventors. More preferably some of the drugs used in said composition act on 2, or 3 or 4 of the targets identified by the inventors. Hence, more preferably, the combination of drugs used as an alternative to acamprosate comprises 2, 3 or 4 drugs.
  • An agonistic or antagonistic activity toward a receptor/channel refers to a direct action on said receptor/channel or to an indirect action leading to the activation or inhibition of said receptor/channel.
  • An agonistic or antagonist activity also refers to a positive or negative allosteric modulation, respectively.
  • Drugs suitable to elaborate such a combination of drugs are listed in Table 4 below with their corresponding CAS number, IUPAC name or related articles, for illustrative purposes only.
  • TABLE 4
    antagonists of group I mGluR
    GRM1 GRM5
    AIDA 168560-79-0 ADX 10059 1166398-32-8; 757949-98-7
    A-794278 869802-57-3 AZD-2066 1403991-95-6; 934282-55-0;
    A-794282 869802-44-8 934338-70-2
    A-841720 869802-58-4 AZD6538 Raboisson et al 2012 [45]
    A-850002 869802-73-3 AZD9272 1166398-50-0
    Bay-36-7620 232605-26-4 Basimglurant 802906-73-6
    FTIDC Suzuki et al 2007 [46] Dipraglurant 872363-17-2
    JNJ-16259685 409345-29-5 Fenobam 57653-26-6; 63540-28-3
    LY-367385 198419-91-9 GRN529 1253291-12-1
    RO0711401 714971-87-6 LY-344545 201851-20-9
    YM-202074 299900-83-7 Mavoglurant 543906-09-8
    YM-230888 Kohara et al 2007 [47] MPEP 219911-35-0
    YM-298198 748758-45-4 MRZ-8676 Dekundy et al 2011 [48]
    MTEP 329205-68-7; 1186195-60-7
    Rufinamide 106308-44-5
    SIB-1757 31993-01-8
    SIB-1893 7370-21-0
    Antagonists of group II m GluR (GRM2 and 3)
    BCI-632 569686-87-9
    BCI-1038 (N/A) Prodrug of B632
    BCI-1206 (N/A) Prodrug of B632
    BCI-1283 (N/A) Prodrug of B632
    BCI-838 (1R,2R,3R,5R,6R)-2-Amino-3-[(3,4-dichlorobenzyl)oxy]-
    6-fluoro-6-[(heptyloxy)carbonyl]bicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-
    2-carboxylic acid
    RG-1578 911115-16-7
    RO4491533 579482-31-8
    LY-341495 201943-63-7
    APICA 170847-18-4
    EGLU 170984-72-2
    Antagonists of Gaba A receptors
    α5IA 215874-86-5
    beta-Cce 74214-62-3
    beta-Ccm 69954-48-9
    beta-Cct 93835-05-3
    bicuculline 485-49-4; 56083-00-2
    BTS-72-664 (R)-7-[1-(4-chlorophenoxy)]ethyl]-1,2,4-triazolo(1,5-alpha)pyrimidine
    cicutoxin 505-75-9
    clarithromycin 81103-11-9
    DMCM 82499-00-1
    FG71-42 78538-74-6
    FGIN-1-27 142720-24-9
    FGIN-1-44 2-hexyl-indole-3-acetamide-N-benzene-tricarboxylic acid
    flumazenil 78755-81-4
    gabazine 104104-50-9
    L-655708 Ethyl (S)-11,12,13,13a-Tetrahydro-7-methoxy-9-oxo-9H-imidazo[1,5-
    a]pyrrolo[2,1-c][1,4]benzodiazepine-1-carboxylate
    lorediplon 917393-39-6
    MK0777 252977-51-8
    oenanthotoxin 20311-78-8
    pentetrazol 54-95-5
    picrotoxin 124-87-8
    pitrazepin 90685-01-1
    PWZ-029 8-chloro-3-(methoxymethyl)-5-methyl-4H-imidazo[1,5-a] [1,4]
    benzodiazepin-6-one
    R04882224 3,10-dichloro-9H-benzo[f]imidazo[1,5-a][1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-
    d][1,4]diazepine
    RO15-3505 ethyl 7-chloro-5-methyl-6-oxo-5,6-dihydro-4H-imidazo[1,5-
    a][1,4]benzodiazepine-3-carboxylate
    Ro15-4513 ethyl-8-azido-5,6-dihydro-5-methyl-6-oxo-4H-imidazo[1,4]-
    benzodiazepine-3-carboxylate
    RO-4938581 3-bromo-10-(difluoromethyl)-9H-benzo[f]imidazo[1,5-
    a][1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-d][1,4]diazepine
    RU-5135 78774-26-2
    RY-023 (tert-butyl-8-(trimethylsilyl) acetylene-5,6-dihydro-5-methyl-6-oxo-4H-
    imidazo [1,5a] [1,4] benzodiazepine-3-carboxylate
    RY-024 t-butyl-8-ehtynyl-(5,6-dihydro-5-methyl-6-oxo-4H-imidazo (1,5-
    a)[1,4]benzodiazepine-3-carboxylate
    RY-024 t-butyl-8-ehtynyl-(5,6-dihydro-5-methyl-6-oxo-4H-imidazo (1,5-
    a)[1,4]benzodiazepine-3-carboxylate
    RY-80 ethyl 8-ethynyl-5-methyl-6-oxo-4H-imidazo[1,5-a][1,4]benzodiazepine-
    3-carboxylate
    S8510 [2-(3-isoxazolyl)-3,6,7,9-tetrahydroimidazo [4,5-d] pyrano [4,3-b]
    pyridine monophosphate monohydrate]
    sarmazenil 78771-13-8
    SR-42641 105537-78-8
    SR-95103 96440-63-0
    thiocolchicoside 602-41-5
    thujone 1125-12-8; 546-80-5; 471-15-8; 33766-30-2
    TP003 628690-75-5
    US-1010 516-55-2
    ZK-93423 89592-45-0
    Agonists of Glycinic channels
    anandamide 94421-68-8
    cycloserine 68-41-7
    dimethylglycine 1118-68-9
    dronabinol 1972-08-3
    enflurane 13838-16-9
    glycine 56-40-6
    Halothane 151-67-7
    HU 210 112830-95-2
    hypotaurine 300-84-5
    isoflurane 26675-46-7
    milacemide 76990-56-2
    sarcosine 203-538-6
    serine 302-84-1; 56-45-1; 312-84-5
    sevoflurane 28523-86-6
    taurine 107-35-7
    trimethylglycine 107-43-7; 17146-86-0
    alanine 302-72-7; 56-41-7; 338-69-2
    β alanine 107-95-9
    WIN 55212-2 131543-23-2
    arachidonyl- 53847-30-6
    glycerol
  • In a particular embodiment, said combination of drugs used as an alternative to acamprosate comprises at least one compound selected from α5TA, beta-Cce, beta-Ccm, beta-Cct, bicuculline, BTS-72-664, cicutoxin, clarithromycin, DMCM, FG71-42, FGIN-1-27, FGIN-1-44, flumazenil, gabazine, L-655708, lorediplon, MK0777, oenanthotoxin, pentetrazol, picrotoxin, pitrazepin, PWZ-029, R04882224, RO15-3505, Ro15-4513, RO-4938581, RU-5135, RY-023, RY-024, RY-024, RY-80, S8510, sarmazenil, SR-42641, SR-95103, thiocolchicoside, thujone, TP003, US-1010, or ZK-93423, which are known as (direct or indirect) antagonists or inverse agonists of the GABA A receptors.
  • In a preferred embodiment, said combination of drugs used as an alternative to acamprosate comprises thiocolchicoside.
  • In another particular embodiment, antagonists or inverse agonists of the GABA A receptors of use can be, but are not limited to, one of those described in WO2011/153377, WO2012/059482, EP2457569, and WO2011/024115, which are herein incorporated by reference.
  • In an embodiment, antagonists of the Group I metabotropic receptors that can be used in a combination of drugs used as an alternative to acamprosate may be, but are not limited to, one of those disclosed in WO2004014370A2, WO2004014881A2, WO2004014902A2, WO2005080356A1, WO2005080363A1, WO2005080386A1, WO2006014185A1, WO2007021574A1, WO2007021575A2, WO2007130825A2, WO2009051556A1, WO2009054785A1, WO2009054786A1, WO2009054789A1, WO2009054790A1, WO2009054791A1, WO2009054792A1, WO2009054793 A1, WO2009054794A1, WO2010123451A1, WO02068417A2, WO2005066155A1, WO2004000316A1, WO2005080379A1, WO2005080397A2, WO2007040982A1, WO2010019100A1, WO2007130820A2, WO2007130821 A2, WO2007130822A2, WO2007130823 A2, WO2007130824A2, WO2008041075A1, WO2009054787A1, WO9926927A2, WO2004069813A1, WO2012127393 A1, WO2003047581A1, and WO2008128968, which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • Further antagonists of the Group I metabotropic receptors that can be used are disclosed in WO2012108831 A1 and are incorporated herein by reference.
  • Yet further antagonists of the Group I metabotropic receptors that can be used are disclosed in WO2012127393A1 and are incorporated herein by reference.
  • Other antagonists of the Group I metabotropic receptors that can be used are disclosed in WO2010048095A2 and are incorporated herein by reference.
  • Antagonists of the Group I metabotropic receptors have been the focus of numerous research programs in drug discovery which are summarized by Jaeschke et al (2007) [50], Carroll (2008) [51] and Emmitte (2013) [52]. All the antagonists of the Group I metabotropic receptors disclosed in these reviews are incorporated herein by reference and can be considered to be used in a combination of drugs used as an alternative to acamprosate.
  • In a particular embodiment, said combination of drugs used as an alternative to acamprosate comprises at least one compound having an antagonistic activity for mGluR1 metabotropic receptors and/or at least one compound having an antagonistic activity for mGluR5 metabotropic receptors.
  • In a particular embodiment, said combination of drugs used as an alternative to acamprosate comprises at least one compound selected from AIDA, A-794278, A-794282, A-841720, A-850002, Bay-36-7620, FTIDC, JNJ-16259685, LY-367385, RO0711401, YM-202074, YM-230888, YM-298198, ADX 10059, AZD-2066, AZD6538, AZD9272, basimglurant, dipraglurant, fenobam, GRN529, LY-344545, mavoglurant, MPEP, MRZ-8676, MTEP, rufinamide, SIB-1757, and SIB-1893, which are known as (direct or indirect) antagonists of the Group I metabotropic receptors.
  • In a preferred embodiment, said combination of drugs used as an alternative to acamprosate comprises rufinamide.
  • In another preferred embodiment, said combination of drugs used as an alternative to acamprosate comprises a compound selected from AIDA, A-794278, A-794282, A-841720, A-850002, Bay-36-7620, FTIDC, JNJ-16259685, LY-367385, RO0711401, YM-202074, YM-230888, YM-298198 and a compound selected from ADX 10059, AZD-2066, AZD6538, AZD9272, basimglurant, dipraglurant, fenobam, GRN529, LY-344545, mavoglurant, MPEP, MRZ-8676, MTEP, rufinamide, SIB-1757, and SIB-1893.
  • In a particular embodiment, said combination of drugs used as an alternative to acamprosate comprises a compound acting as an antagonist of both mGluR1 and mGluR5 receptors.
  • In an embodiment, combination of drugs used as an alternative to acamprosate comprises a drug that acts as an antagonist or negative allosteric modulator of mGluR2 or mGluR3 (group II) metabotropic glutamate receptors.
  • In another embodiment, combination of drugs used as an alternative to acamprosate comprises a drug that acts as an antagonist or negative allosteric modulator of mGluR2 and mGluR3 (group II) metabotropic glutamate receptors.
  • Antagonists of group 11 metabotropic glutamate receptors comprise, but are not limited to, EGLU, APTCA, LY-341495, BCI-632 or its prodrugs BCI-1038, BCI-1206, BCI-1283, BCI-838, or one of the 2-amino-bicyclo [3.1.0] hexane-2,6-dicarboxylic ester derivatives disclosed in WO2005000791, US2012028982, US2012004232, US2010298561, US2009306408. US2007021394, or 5H-thiazolo (3,2-a) pyrimidine derivatives disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,958,931, which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • Negative allosteric modulators of the Group II metabotropic receptors that can be used in a combination of drugs used as an alternative to acamprosate comprise, but are not limited to, DT-2228 as disclosed in Froestl et al (2012) [53] and incorporated herein by reference, RG-1578, R04432717, RO4491533, dihydrobenzo [1,4] diazepin-2-one derivatives disclosed in Hempstapat et al 2007 [54] and incorporated herein by reference, and compounds described in WO 2014/064028, WO 01/29011, WO 01/29012, WO 02/083652, WO 02/083665, WO 02/098864, WO 03/066623, WO 2005/014002, WO 2005/040171, WO2005/123738, WO 2006/084634, WO 2006/099972, WO 2007/039439, WO 2007/110337 and WO 2008/119689 and incorporated herein by reference.
  • In another embodiment, said combination of drugs used as an alternative to acamprosate comprises a drug that acts as an agonist or positive allosteric modulator of the glycinic channels.
  • In a particular embodiment, said combination of drugs comprises anandamide, cycloserine, dimethylglycine, dronabinol, enflurane, glycine, halothane, HU 210, hypotaurine, isoflurane, milacemide, sarcosine, serine, sevoflurane, taurine, trimethylglycine, D and/or L alanine, or β alanine, which are known as agonists or positive allosteric modulators of the glycinic channels.
  • Other agonists or positive allosteric modulators of the glycinic channels that can be used in said combination of drugs comprise propofol derivatives described in WO 2010/067069, which are incorporated herein by reference. Agonists or positive allosteric modulators of the glycinic channels also comprise, but are not limited to, tropines and nortropines which are described in Maksay el al. (2007) [55] and are also herein incorporated by reference, as well as those listed in Yevenes & Zeilhofer [56].
  • Therapy according to the invention may be provided at home, the doctor's office, a clinic, a hospital's outpatient department, or a hospital, so that the doctor can observe the therapy's effects closely and make any adjustments that are needed.
  • The duration of the therapy depends on the stage of the disease being treated, age and condition of the patient, and how the patient responds to the treatment. The dosage, frequency and mode of administration of each component of the combination can be controlled independently. For example, one drug may be administered orally while the second drug may be administered intramuscularly. Combination therapy may be given in on-and-off cycles that include rest periods so that the patient's body has a chance to recover from any as yet unforeseen side effects. The drugs may also be formulated together such that one administration delivers all drugs.
  • The administration of each drug of the combination may be by any suitable means that results in a concentration of the drug that, combined with the other component, is able to ameliorate the patient's condition or efficiently treat the disease or disorder.
  • While it is possible for the drugs of the combination to be administered as the pure chemicals, it is preferable to present them as a pharmaceutical composition, also referred to in this context as pharmaceutical formulation. Possible compositions include those suitable for oral, rectal, topical (including transdermal, buccal and sublingual), or parenteral (including subcutaneous, intramuscular, intravenous and intradermal) administration.
  • More commonly these pharmaceutical formulations are prescribed to the patient in “patient packs” containing a number of dosing units or other means for administration of metered unit doses for use during a distinct treatment period in a single package, usually a blister pack. Patient packs have an advantage over traditional prescriptions, where a pharmacist divides a patient's supply of a pharmaceutical from a bulk supply, in that the patient always has access to the package insert contained in the patient pack, normally missing in traditional prescriptions. The inclusion of a package insert has been shown to improve patient compliance with the physician's instructions. Thus, the invention further includes a pharmaceutical formulation, as herein before described, in combination with packaging material suitable for said formulation. In such a patient pack the intended use of a formulation for the combination treatment can be inferred by instructions, facilities, provisions, adaptations and/or other means to help use the formulation most suitably for the treatment. Such measures make a patient pack specifically suitable for and adapted for use for treatment with the combination of the present invention.
  • The drug may be contained, in any appropriate amount, in any suitable carrier substance. The drug may be present in an amount of up to 99% by weight of the total weight of the composition. The composition may be provided in a dosage form that is suitable for the oral, parenteral (e.g., intravenous, intramuscular), rectal, cutaneous, nasal, vaginal, inhalant, skin (patch), or ocular administration route. Thus, the composition may be in the form of, e.g., tablets, capsules, pills, powders, granulates, suspensions, emulsions, solutions, gels including hydrogels, pastes, ointments, creams, plasters, drenches, osmotic delivery devices, suppositories, enemas, injectables, implants, sprays, or aerosols.
  • The pharmaceutical compositions may be formulated according to conventional pharmaceutical practice (see, e.g., Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy (20th ed.), ed. A. R. Gennaro, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2000 and Encyclopedia of Pharmaceutical Technology, eds. J. Swarbrick and J. C. Boylan, 1988-1999, Marcel Dekker, New York).
  • Pharmaceutical compositions according to the invention may be formulated to release the active drug substantially immediately upon administration or at any predetermined time or time period after administration.
  • The controlled release formulations include (i) formulations that create a substantially constant concentration of the drug within the body over an extended period of time; (ii) formulations that after a predetermined lag time create a substantially constant concentration of the drug within the body over an extended period of time, (iii) formulations that sustain drug action during a predetermined time period by maintaining a relatively constant, effective drug level in the body with concomitant minimization of undesirable side effects associated with fluctuations in the plasma level of the active drug substance; (iv) formulations that localize drug action by, e.g., spatial placement of a controlled release composition adjacent to or in the diseased tissue or organ; and (v) formulations that target drug action by using carriers or chemical derivatives to deliver the drug to a particular target cell type.
  • Administration of drugs in the form of a controlled release formulation is especially preferred in cases in which the drug has (i) a narrow therapeutic index (i.e., the difference between the plasma concentration leading to harmful side effects or toxic reactions and the plasma concentration leading to a therapeutic effect is small; in general, the therapeutic index, TI, is defined as the ratio of median lethal dose (LD50) to median effective dose (ED50)); (ii) a narrow absorption window in the gastrointestinal tract; or (iii) a very short biological half-life so that frequent dosing during a day is required in order to sustain the plasma level at a therapeutic level.
  • Any of a number of strategies can be pursued in order to obtain controlled release in which the rate of release outweighs the rate of metabolism of the drug in question. Controlled release may be obtained by appropriate selection of various formulation parameters and ingredients, including, e.g., various types of controlled release compositions and coatings. Thus, the drug is formulated with appropriate excipients into a pharmaceutical composition that, upon administration, releases the drug in a controlled manner (single or multiple unit tablet or capsule compositions, oil solutions, suspensions, emulsions, microcapsules, microspheres, nanoparticles, patches, and liposomes).
  • Solid Dosage Forms for Oral Use Formulations for oral use include tablets containing the composition of the invention in a mixture with non-toxic pharmaceutically acceptable excipients. These excipients may be, for example, inert diluents or fillers (e.g., sucrose, microcrystalline cellulose, starches including potato starch, calcium carbonate, sodium chloride, calcium phosphate, calcium sulfate, or sodium phosphate); granulating and disintegrating agents (e.g., cellulose derivatives including microcrystalline cellulose, starches including potato starch, croscarmellose sodium, alginates, or alginic acid); binding agents (e.g., acacia, alginic acid, sodium alginate, gelatin, starch, pregelatinized starch, microcrystalline cellulose, carboxymethylcellulose sodium, methylcellulose, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, ethylcellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone, or polyethylene glycol); or lubricating agents, glidants, or antiadhesives (e.g., stearic acid, silicas, or talc). Other pharmaceutically acceptable excipients can be colorants, flavoring agents, plasticizers, humectants, buffering agents, and the like.
  • The tablets may be uncoated or they may be coated by known techniques, optionally to delay disintegration and absorption in the gastrointestinal tract and thereby provide a sustained action over a longer period. The coating may be adapted to release the active drug substance in a predetermined pattern (e.g., in order to achieve a controlled release formulation) or it may be adapted not to release the active drug substance until after passage of the stomach (enteric coating). The coating may be a sugar coating, a film coating (e.g., based on hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, methylcellulose, methyl hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, carboxymethylcellulose, acrylate copolymers, polyethylene glycols and/or polyvinylpyrrolidone), or an enteric coating (e.g., based on methacrylic acid copolymer, cellulose acetate phthalate, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose phthalate, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose acetate succinate, polyvinyl acetate phthalate, shellac, and/or ethylcellulose). A time delay material such as, e.g., glyceryl monostearate or glyceryl distearate may be employed.
  • The solid tablet compositions may include a coating adapted to protect the composition from unwanted chemical changes, (e.g., chemical degradation prior to the release of the active drug substance). The coating may be applied on the solid dosage form in a similar manner to that described in Encyclopedia of Pharmaceutical Technology.
  • Drugs may be mixed together in the tablet, or may be partitioned. For example, a first drug is contained on the inside of the tablet, and a second drug is on the outside, such that a substantial portion of the second drug is released prior to the release of the first drug.
  • Formulations for oral use may also be presented as chewable tablets, or as hard gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with an inert solid diluent (e.g., potato starch, microcrystalline cellulose, calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate or kaolin), or as soft gelatin capsules wherein the active ingredient is mixed with water or an oil medium, for example, liquid paraffin or olive oil. Powders and granulates may be prepared using the ingredients mentioned above under tablets and capsules in a conventional manner.
  • Controlled release compositions for oral use may, e.g., be constructed to release the active drug by controlling the dissolution and/or the diffusion of the active drug substance.
  • Dissolution or diffusion-controlled release can be achieved by appropriate coating of a tablet, capsule, pellet, or granulated formulation of drugs, or by incorporating the drug into an appropriate matrix. A controlled release coating may include one or more of the coating substances mentioned above and/or, e.g., shellac, beeswax, glycowax, castor wax, carnauba wax, stearyl alcohol, glyceryl monostearate, glyceryl distearate, glycerol palmitostearate, ethylcellulose, acrylic resins, dl-polylactic acid, cellulose acetate butyrate, polyvinyl chloride, polyvinyl acetate, vinyl pyrrolidone, polyethylene, polymethacrylate, methylmethacrylate, 2-hydroxymethacrylate, methacrylate hydrogel, 1,3 butylene glycol, ethylene glycol methacrylate, and/or polyethylene glycol. In a controlled release matrix formulation, the matrix material may also include, e.g., hydrated methylcellulose, carnauba wax and stearyl alcohol, carbopol 934, silicone, glyceryl tristearate, methyl acrylate-methyl methacrylate, polyvinyl chloride, polyethylene, and/or halogenated fluorocarbon.
  • A controlled release composition containing one or more of the drugs of the claimed combinations may also be in the form of a buoyant tablet or capsule (i.e., a tablet or capsule that, upon oral administration, floats on top of the gastric content for a certain period of time). A buoyant tablet formulation of the drug(s) can be prepared by granulating a mixture of the drug(s) with excipients and 20-75% w/w of hydrocolloids, such as hydroxyethylcellulose, hydroxypropylcellulose, or hydroxypropylmethylcellulose. The obtained granules can then be compressed into tablets. On contact with the gastric juice, the tablet forms a substantially water-impermeable gel barrier around its surface. This gel barrier takes part in maintaining a density of less than one, thereby allowing the tablet to remain buoyant in the gastric juice.
    • Liquids for Oral Administration
  • Powders, dispersible powders, or granules suitable for preparation of an aqueous suspension by addition of water are convenient dosage forms for oral administration. Formulation as a suspension provides the active ingredient in a mixture with a dispersing or wetting agent, suspending agent, and one or more preservatives. Suitable suspending agents are, for example, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, methylcellulose, sodium alginate, and the like.
    • Parenteral Compositions
  • The pharmaceutical composition may also be administered parenterally by injection, infusion or implantation (intravenous, intramuscular, subcutaneous, or the like) in dosage forms, formulations, or via suitable delivery devices or implants containing conventional, non-toxic pharmaceutically acceptable carriers and adjuvants. The formulation and preparation of such compositions are well-known to those skilled in the art of pharmaceutical formulation.
  • Compositions for parenteral use may be provided in unit dosage forms (e.g., in single-dose ampoules), or in vials containing several doses and in which a suitable preservative may be added (see below). The composition may be in form of a solution, a suspension, an emulsion, an infusion device, or a delivery device for implantation or it may be presented as a dry powder to be reconstituted with water or another suitable vehicle before use. Apart from the active drug(s), the composition may include suitable parenterally acceptable carriers and/or excipients. The active drug(s) may be incorporated into microspheres, microcapsules, nanoparticles, liposomes, or the like for controlled release. The composition may include suspending, solubilizing, stabilizing, pH-adjusting, and/or dispersing agents.
  • The pharmaceutical compositions according to the invention may be in a form suitable for sterile injection. To prepare such a composition, the suitable active drug(s) are dissolved or suspended in a parenterally acceptable liquid vehicle. Among acceptable vehicles and solvents that may be employed are water, water adjusted to a suitable pH by addition of an appropriate amount of hydrochloric acid, sodium hydroxide or a suitable buffer, 1,3-butanediol, Ringer's solution, and isotonic sodium chloride solution. The aqueous formulation may also contain one or more preservatives (e.g., methyl, ethyl or n-propyl p-hydroxybenzoate). In cases where one of the drugs is only sparingly or slightly soluble in water, a dissolution enhancing or solubilizing agent can be added, or the solvent may include 10-60% w/w of propylene glycol or the like.
  • Controlled release parenteral compositions may be in form of aqueous suspensions, microspheres, microcapsules, magnetic microspheres, oil solutions, oil suspensions, or emulsions. Alternatively, the active drug(s) may be incorporated in biocompatible carriers, liposomes, nanoparticles, implants, or infusion devices. Materials for use in the preparation of microspheres and/or microcapsules are, e.g., biodegradable/bioerodible polymers such as polygalactin, poly-(isobutyl cyanoacrylate), and poly(2-hydroxyethyl-L-glutamine). Biocompatible carriers that may be used when formulating a controlled release parenteral formulation are carbohydrates (e.g., dextrans), proteins (e.g., albumin), lipoproteins, or antibodies. Materials for use in implants can be non-biodegradable (e.g., polydimethyl siloxane) or biodegradable (e.g., poly(caprolactone), poly(glycolic acid) or poly(ortho esters)).
    • Alternative Routes
  • Although less preferred and less convenient, other administration routes, and therefore other formulations, may be contemplated. In this regard, for rectal application, suitable dosage forms for a composition include suppositories (emulsion or suspension type) and rectal gelatin capsules (solutions or suspensions). In a typical suppository formulation, the active drug(s) are combined with an appropriate pharmaceutically acceptable suppository base such as cocoa butter, esterified fatty acids, glycerinated gelatin, and various water-soluble or dispersible bases like polyethylene glycol. Various additives, enhancers, or surfactants may be incorporated.
  • The pharmaceutical compositions may also be administered topically on the skin for percutaneous absorption in dosage forms or formulations containing conventionally non-toxic pharmaceutical acceptable carriers and excipients including microspheres and liposomes. The formulations include creams, ointments, lotions, liniments, gels, hydrogels, solutions, suspensions, sticks, sprays, pastes, plasters, and other kinds of transdermal drug delivery systems. The pharmaceutically acceptable carriers or excipients may include emulsifying agents, antioxidants, buffering agents, preservatives, humectants, penetration enhancers, chelating agents, gel-forming agents, ointment bases, perfumes, and skin protective agents.
  • The preservatives, humectants, and penetration enhancers may be parabens, such as methyl or propyl p-hydroxybenzoate, benzalkonium chloride, glycerin, propylene glycol, urea, etc.
  • The pharmaceutical compositions described above for topical administration on the skin may also be used in connection with topical administration onto or close to the part of the body that is to be treated. The compositions may be adapted for direct application or for application by means of special drug delivery devices such as dressings or, alternatively, plasters, pads, sponges, strips, or other forms of suitable flexible material.
    • Dosages and Duration of the Treatment
  • It will be appreciated that the drugs of the combination may be administered concomitantly, either in the same or different pharmaceutical formulation or sequentially. If there is sequential administration, the delay in administering the second (or additional) active ingredient should not be such as to lose the benefit of the efficacious effect of the combination of the active ingredients. A minimum requirement for a combination according to this description is that the combination should be intended for combined use with the benefit of the efficacious effect of the combination of the active ingredients. The intended use of a combination can be inferred by facilities, provisions, adaptations and/or other means to help use the combination according to the invention.
  • Therapeutically effective amounts of the drugs in a combination of this invention include, e.g., amounts that are effective for reducing Alzheimer's disease symptoms, halting or slowing the progression of the disease once it has become clinically manifest, or preventing or reducing the risk of developing the disease.
  • Although the active drugs of the present invention may be administered in divided doses, for example two or three times daily, a single daily dose of each drug in the combination is preferred, with a single daily dose of all drugs in a single pharmaceutical composition (unit dosage form) being most preferred.
  • Administration can be one to several times daily for several days to several years, and may even be for the life of the patient. Chronic or at least periodically repeated long-term administration is indicated in most cases.
  • The term “unit dosage form” refers to physically discrete units (such as capsules, tablets, or loaded syringe cylinders) suitable as unitary dosages for human subjects, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active material or materials calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect, in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier.
  • The amount of each drug in a preferred unit dosage composition depends upon several factors including the administration method, the body weight and the age of the patient, the stage of the disease, and the risk of potential side effects considering the general health status of the person to be treated. Additionally, pharmacogenomic (the effect of genotype on the pharmacokinetic, pharmacodynamic or efficacy profile of a therapeutic) information about a particular patient may affect the dosage used.
  • Except when responding to especially impairing cases, where higher dosages may be required, the preferred dosage of each drug in the combination will usually lie within the range of doses not above the dosage usually prescribed for long-term maintenance treatment or proven to be safe in phase 3 clinical studies.
  • One remarkable advantage of the invention is that each compound may be used at low doses in a combination therapy, while producing, in combination, a substantial clinical benefit to the patient. The combination therapy may indeed be effective at doses where the compounds individually have little or no effect. Accordingly, a particular advantage of the invention lies in the ability to use sub-optimal doses of each compound, i.e., doses which are lower than therapeutic doses usually prescribed, preferably ½ of therapeutic doses, more preferably ⅓, ¼, ⅕, or even more preferably 1/10 of therapeutic doses. In particular examples, doses as low as 1/20, 1/30, 1/50, 1/100, or even lower, of therapeutic doses are used.
  • At such sub-therapeutic dosages, the compounds would exhibit no side effects, while the combination(s) according to the invention are fully effective in treating Alzheimer's disease or AD related diseases.
  • A preferred dosage corresponds to amounts from 1% up to 50% of those usually prescribed for long-term maintenance treatment.
  • The most preferred dosage may correspond to amounts from 1% up to 10% of those usually prescribed for long-term maintenance treatment.
  • Specific examples of dosages of drugs for use in the invention are provided below:
      • Acamprosate between 0.1 and 1000 mg per day, preferably less than 400 mg per day, more preferably less than 200 mg per day, even more preferably 100 mg per day or less, furthermore preferably between 0.5 mg and 100 mg per day, typically 0.8 mg per day, 2 mg per day, 20 mg per day, 40 mg per day, or 80 mg per day, such dosages being particularly suitable for oral administration,
      • Baclofen between 0.01 to 150 mg per day, preferably less than 100 mg per day, more preferably less than 50 mg per day, most preferably between 5 and 40 mg per day, even more preferably less than 35 mg per day, typically 12 mg per day, 24 mg per day, or 30 mg per day, such dosages being particularly suitable for oral administration,
      • Aminocaproic acid orally from about 0.1 g to 2.4 g per day,
      • bromocriptine orally from about 0.01 to 10 mg per day,
      • diethylcarbamazine orally from about 0.03 to 400 mg per day,
      • cabergoline orally from about 1 to 10 μg per day,
      • cinacalcet orally from about 0.3 to 36 mg per day,
      • cinnarizine orally from about 0.6 to 23 mg per day,
      • dyphylline orally from about 9 to 320 mg per day,
      • eplerenone orally from about 0.25 to 10 mg per day,
      • ifenprodil orally from about 0.4 to 6 mg per day,
      • leflunomide orally from about 0.1 to 10 mg per day,
      • levosimendan orally from about 0.04 to 0.8 mg per day,
      • mexiletine orally from about 6 to 120 mg per day,
      • moxifloxacin orally from about 4 to 40 mg per day,
      • phenformin orally from about 0.25 to 15 mg per day,
      • quinacrine orally from about 1 to 30 mg per day,
      • sulfisoxazole orally from about 20 to 800 mg per day,
      • sulodexide orally from about 0.05 to 40 mg per day,
      • terbinafine orally from about 2.5 to 25 mg per day,
      • torasemide orally from about 0.05 to 4 mg per day,
      • trimetazidine orally from about 0.4 to 6 mg per day, and
      • zonisamide orally from about 0.5 to 50 mg per day, administered in one, two, or three doses daily.
  • When the composition comprises, as active ingredients, only baclofen and acamprosate, these two compounds may be used in different ratios, e.g., at a weight ratio of acamprosate/baclofen comprised from between 0.05 to 1000 (W:W), preferably between 0.05 to 100 (W:W), more preferably between 0.05 to 50 (W:W).
  • As already mentioned, the above compounds in the therapies of the invention can be used as specifically designated per se, as well as any pharmaceutically acceptable salts, enantiomers, racemates, prodrugs, metabolites or derivatives thereof.
  • In a particularly preferred embodiment, combinatorial therapies of the invention comprise administering between 0.4 mg and 50 mg acamprosate and 6 mg to 15 mg baclofen, twice daily.
  • In an embodiment, combinatorial therapies of the invention comprise administering 0.4 mg acamprosate and 6 mg baclofen, twice daily.
  • In a preferred embodiment, combinatorial therapies of the invention comprise administering 1 mg acamprosate and 15 mg baclofen, twice daily.
  • In yet another preferred embodiment, combinatorial therapies of the invention comprise administering 10 mg acamprosate and 6 mg baclofen, twice daily.
  • In another preferred embodiment, combinatorial therapies of the invention comprise administering 20 mg acamprosate and 12 mg baclofen, twice daily.
  • In still another embodiment, combinatorial therapies of the invention comprise administering 40 mg acamprosate and 12 mg baclofen, twice daily.
  • In another particular embodiment, besides comprising administering one of the above baclofen-acamprosate regimens, therapies of the invention also comprise administering donepezil or memantine either at their usual dose and regimen (i.e., as an add-on therapy) or even at a lower dose, from 1% up to 50% of those usually prescribed for the treatment of AD.
  • In an even more particular embodiment, combinatorial therapies of the invention further comprise administering 0.6 mg donepezil twice daily.
  • Consequently, in a particularly preferred embodiment, combinatorial therapies of the invention comprise administering between 0.4 mg and 50 mg of acamprosate, 6 mg to 15 mg baclofen, and 0.6 mg donepezil, twice daily.
  • In an embodiment, combinatorial therapies the invention comprise administering 0.4 mg acamprosate, 6 mg baclofen, and 0.6 mg donepezil, twice daily.
  • In a preferred embodiment, combinatorial therapies of the invention comprise administering 1 mg acamprosate, 15 mg baclofen, and 0.6 mg donepezil, twice daily.
  • In yet another preferred embodiment, combinatorial therapies of the invention comprise administering 20 mg acamprosate, 12 mg baclofen, and 0.6 mg donepezil, twice daily.
  • In a particularly preferred embodiment, combinatorial therapies of the invention comprise administering 40 mg acamprosate, 12 mg baclofen, and 0.6 mg donepezil, twice daily.
  • As previously stated, the compounds in a combinatorial therapy of the invention may be administered simultaneously, separately, sequentially and/or repeatedly to the subject. Particularly, the above dosing regimens can be simultaneously orally administered using suitable tablets. Also, a particular object of this invention relates to a tablet comprising acamprosate and baclofen, suitable for the dosing regimen of a dose of acamprosate between 0.4 and 50 mg and a dose of baclofen between 6 and 15 mg, to be administered twice daily.
  • A further particular object of this invention relates to a tablet comprising acamprosate and baclofen, suitable for the dosing regimen of 0.4 mg acamprosate and 6 mg baclofen, twice daily.
  • Another particular object of this invention relates to a tablet comprising acamprosate and baclofen, suitable for the dosing regimen of 1 mg acamprosate and 15 mg baclofen, twice daily.
  • Another particular object of this invention relates to a tablet comprising acamprosate and baclofen, suitable for the dosing regimen of 20 mg acamprosate and 12 mg baclofen, to be administered twice daily.
  • A particular object of this invention relates to a tablet comprising acamprosate and baclofen, suitable for the dosing regimen of 40 mg acamprosate and 12 mg baclofen, to be administered twice daily.
  • An even more particular object of this invention relates to a tablet comprising baclofen, acamprosate and donepezil, said tablet being suitable for any of the above mentioned dosages of baclofen and acamprosate and also for the dosing regimen of 0.6 mg donepezil, twice daily.
  • A more particular object of the invention is a scored tablet suitable for the administration of any of the above dosing regimens, said tablet being cleavable in 2, 3 and/or 4 part as a function of the dose to be administered at each taking.
  • As mentioned above, a single unit dosage form containing the combinations of the invention is most preferred. Alternatively, where a separate administration would be considered more proper, combinations of the invention can be provided in the form of a unit dosage package, such unit dosage package being configured to hold a first unit dosage comprising acamprosate and a second unit dosage comprising baclofen. In a particular embodiment unit dosages are tablets. In another particular embodiment the first unit dosage comprises between 0.4 and 50 mg of acamprosate and the second unit dosage comprises between 6 and 15 mg baclofen.
  • In another embodiment the first unit dosage is suitable for the dosing regimen of 0.4 mg acamprosate, twice daily.
  • In another embodiment the first unit dosage is suitable for the dosing regimen of 1 mg acamprosate, twice daily.
  • In another embodiment the first unit dosage is suitable for the dosing regimen of 20 mg acamprosate, twice daily.
  • In another embodiment the first unit dosage is suitable for the dosing regimen of 40 mg acamprosate, twice daily.
  • In an embodiment the first unit dosage is suitable for the dosing regimen of 1 mg acamprosate, twice daily.
  • In another embodiment the second unit dosage is suitable for the dosing regimen of 6 mg baclofen, twice daily.
  • In another embodiment the second unit dosage is suitable for the dosing regimen of 12 mg baclofen, twice daily.
  • In another embodiment the second unit dosage is suitable for the dosing regimen of 15 mg baclofen, twice daily.
  • In another particular embodiment, the above mentioned unit dosage package comprises a third unit dosage comprising donepezil. In a more particular embodiment this third unit dosage is suitable for the dosing regimen of 0.6 mg donepezil, twice daily. In a particular embodiment said unit dosage package contains a number of unit dosages suitable for 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 days of treatment or even more, preferably several weeks of treatment.
  • It will be understood that the amount of the drug actually administered will be determined by a physician, in light of the relevant circumstances including the condition to be treated, the exact composition to be administered, the age, weight, and response of the individual patient, the severity of the patient's symptoms, and the chosen route of administration. Therefore, the above dosage ranges are intended to provide general guidance and support for the teachings herein, but are not intended to limit the scope of the invention.
  • The following examples are given for purposes of illustration and not by way of limitation.
    • Examples
  • The care and husbandry of animals as well as the experiments are performed according to the guidelines of the Committee for Research and Ethical Issue of the I.A.S.P. (1983).
  • I. Treatment of Diseases Related to Aβ Toxicity
  • In this series of experiments, candidate combinations have been tested for their ability to prevent or reduce the toxic effects of human Aβ1-42. Aβ1-42 is the full-length peptide that constitutes aggregates found in biopsies from human patients afflicted with AD. The effect is determined on various cell types, to further document the activity of the combinations in in vitro models which illustrate different physiological features of AD. In vivo studies are also performed in a mouse model for AD, confirming this protective effect by evaluating the effect of the combinations on i) the cognitive performance of the animals and ii) molecular hallmarks (apoptosis induction, oxidative stress induction, inflammation pathway induction) of AD. Clinical results show that baclofen and acamprosate-based compositions are actually efficient in improving cognitive performance, as well as in correcting electrophysiological disturbances observed in patients diagnosed with mild AD.
    • A. Baclofen-Acamprosate Combination Therapies Prevent Toxicity of Human Aβ1-42 In Vitro
  • 1. Effect on the Toxicity of Human Aβ1-42 Peptide on Human Brain Microvascular Endothelial Cells (HBMEC).
    • HBMEC Culture Conditions
  • HBMEC cultures were used to study the protection afforded by candidate compound(s) on Aβ1-42 toxicity.
  • HBMEC (ScienCell Ref: 1000, frozen at passage 10) were rapidly thawed in a water bath at +37° C. The supernatant was immediately put in 9 ml Dulbecco's modified Eagle's medium (DMEM; Pan Biotech ref: P04-03600) containing 10% fetal calf serum (FCS; GIBCO ref 10270-106). Cell suspension was centrifuged at 180×g for 10 min at +4° C. and the pellets were suspended in CSC serum-free medium (CSC serum-free medium. Cell System, Ref: SF-4Z0-500-R, Batch 51407-4) with 1.6% serum-free RocketFuel (Cell System, Ref: SF-4Z0-500-R, Batch 54102), 2% of Penicillin 10,000 U/ml and Streptomycin 10 mg/ml (PS; Pan Biotech ref: P06-07100 batch 133080808) and were seeded at the density of 20,000 cells per well in 96-well plates (matrigel layer biocoat angiogenesis system, BD, Ref 354150, Batch A8662) in a final volume of 100 μl. On matrigel support, endothelial cerebral cells spontaneously started the process of capillary network morphogenesis [57].
  • Three separate cultures were performed per condition, 6 wells per condition.
    • Test Compounds and Human Aβ1-42 Treatment
  • Briefly, Aβ1-42 peptide (Bachem, ref: H1368 batch 1010533) was reconstituted in defined culture medium at 20 μM (mother solution) and was slowly shaken at +37° C. for 3 days in the dark. The control medium was prepared in the same conditions.
  • After 3 days, human amyloid peptide was used on HBMEC at 2.5 μM diluted in control medium (optimal incubation time). The Aβ1-42 peptide was added 2 hours after HBMEC seeding on matrigel for 18 hours incubation.
  • One hour after HBMEC seeding on matrigel, test compounds and VEGF-165 were solved in culture medium (+0.1% DMSO) and then pre-incubated with HBMEC for 1 hour before the Aβ1-42 application (in a final volume per culture well of 100 μl). One hour after test compounds or VEGF incubation (two hours after cell seeding on matrigel), 1001l of Aβ1-42 peptide was added to a final concentration of 2.5 μM diluted in control medium in the presence of test compounds or VEGF (in a 200 μl total volume/well), in order to avoid further drug dilutions
    • Organization of Culture Plates
  • VEGF-165, known to be a pro-angiogenic isoform of VEGF-A, was used for all experiments in this study as reference compound. VEGF-165 is one of the most abundant VEGF isoforms involved in angiogenesis. VEGF was used as reference test compound at 10 nM (FIG. 1).
  • The following conditions were assessed:
      • Negative Control: medium alone+0.1% DMSO.
      • Intoxication: amyloid-β1-42 (2.5 μM) for 18 h.
      • Positive control: VEGF-165 (10 nM) (1 reference compound/culture) 1 h before the Aβ1-42 (2.5 μM) addition for an 18 h incubation time.
      • Test compounds: Test compound(s) 1 h before the Aβ1-42 (2.5 μM) addition for an 18 h incubation time.
    Capillary Network Quantification
  • Per well, 2 pictures with 4× lens were taken using InCell Analyzer™ 1000 (GE Healthcare) in light transmission. All images were taken in the same conditions. Analysis of the angiogenesis networks was done using Developer software (GE Healthcare). The total length of capillary network was assessed.
    • Data Processing
  • Data were expressed in percentage of control conditions (no intoxication, no amyloid=100%) in order to express the amyloid injury. All values were expressed as mean+/−SEM (s.e. mean) of the 3 cultures (n=6 wells per condition). Statistical analyses were done on the different conditions (ONE-WAY ANOVA followed by the Dunnett's test when it was allowed, Statview software version 5.0).
    • Results
  • The baclofen-acamprosate combination gives a significant protective effect against toxicity of human Aβ1-42 peptide in an HBMEC model (a reduction of 24% of Aβ1-42 peptide injury is observed), as shown in FIG. 2. The results clearly show that the intoxication by human amyloid peptide (Aβ1-42 2.5 μM) is significantly prevented by the drug combination whereas, at those concentrations, the drugs alone have no significant effect on intoxication in the experimental conditions described above.
  • Conversely, the combination of baclofen and terbinafine (which is presented here only for the sake of comparison) affords a weaker protection (a reduction of 15% of Aβ1-42 peptide injury is observed) against Aβ1-42 (FIG. 3).
  • Thus, although these two combinations allow a protection against Aβ1-42, the combination of baclofen-acamprosate clearly stands out. Indeed, these drugs at concentrations having no effect alone allow significant protection of human HBMEC against Aβ1-42 when used in combination. Furthermore, the baclofen-acamprosate combination is more effective than the baclofen-terbinafine combination. Such an effect of baclofen and acamprosate represents a remarkable improvement, by 60%, in comparison to, e.g., the effect of the combination of baclofen-terbinafine.
  • Moreover, the concentration of baclofen used in the baclofen-acamprosate combination is much lower than the concentration of baclofen used in the baclofen-terbinafine combination (25-fold reduction).
  • 2. Effect on the Toxicity of Human a Aβ1-42 Peptide on Primary Cortical Neuron Cells.
  • a) Baclofen-Acamprosate Combination has a Neuroprotective Effect
    • Culture of Primary Cortical Neurons
  • Rat cortical neurons were cultured as described by Singer et al. [58]. Briefly pregnant female rats of 15 days gestation were killed by cervical dislocation (Rats: Wistar) and the foetuses were removed from the uterus. The cortex was removed and placed in ice-cold medium of Leibovitz (L15) containing 2% of Penicillin 10,000 U/ml and Streptomycin 10 mg/ml and 1% of bovine serum albumin (BSA). Cortices were dissociated by trypsin for 20 min at 37° C. (0.05%). The reaction was stopped by the addition of Dulbecco's modified Eagle's medium (DMEM) containing DNaseI grade II and 10% of foetal calf serum (FCS). Cells were then mechanically dissociated by 3 serial passages through a 10 ml pipette and centrifuged at 515×g for 10 min at +4° C. The supernatant was discarded and the pellet of cells was re-suspended in a defined culture medium consisting of Neurobasal supplemented with B27 (2%), L-glutamine (0.2 mM), 2% of PS solution and 10 ng/ml of BDNF. Viable cells were counted in a Neubauer cytometer using the trypan blue exclusion test. The cells were seeded at a density of 30,000 cells/well in 96-well plates (wells were pre-coated with poly-L-lysine (10 μg/ml)) and were cultured at +37° C. in a humidified air (95%)/CO2 (5%) atmosphere.
  • Three independent cultures will be performed per condition, 6 wells per condition.
    • Test Compounds and Human Amyloid-β1-42 Treatment
  • Briefly, Aβ1-42 peptide was reconstituted in defined culture medium at 40 μM (mother solution) and was slowly shaken at +37° C. for 3 days in the dark. The control medium was prepared in the same conditions.
  • After 3 days, the solution was used on primary cortical neurons as follows.
  • After 10 days of neuron culture, test compounds were solved in culture medium (+0.1% DMSO) and then pre-incubated with neurons for one hour before the Aβ1-42 application (in a final volume per culture well of 100 μl). One hour after test compound(s) incubation, 100 μl of Aβ1-42 peptide was added to a final concentration of 10 μM diluted in the presence of the drug(s), in order to avoid further test compound(s) dilutions. Cortical neurons were intoxicated for 24 h. Three separate cultures were performed per condition, 6 wells per condition.
  • BDNF (50 ng/ml) and Estradiol-β (150 nM) were used as positive control and reference compounds respectively. Three separate cultures were performed per condition, 12 wells per condition.
    • Organization of Cultures Plates
  • Estradiol-β at 150 nM was used as a positive control (FIG. 4).
  • Estradiol-β was solved in culture medium and pre-incubated for 1 h before the amyloid-β1-42 application.
  • The following conditions were assessed:
      • CONTROL PLAQUE: 12 wells/condition
        • Negative Control: medium alone+0.1% DMSO,
        • Intoxication: amyloid-β1-42 (10 μM) for 24 h, and
        • Reference compound: Estradiol (150 nM) t h.
      • DRUG PLATE: 6 wells/condition
      • Negative Control: medium alone+0.1% DMSO,
      • Intoxication: amyloid-β1-42 (10 μM) for 24 h, and
      • Test compound(s): test compound(s)—1 h followed by amyloid-β1-42 (10 μM) for 24 h.
    Lactate Dehydrogenase (LDH) Activity Assay
  • 24 hours after intoxication, the supernatant was taken off and analyzed with the Cytotoxicity Detection Kit (LDH, Roche Applied Science, ref: 11644793001, batch: 11800300). This colorimetric assay for the quantification of cell toxicity is based on the measurement of lactate dehydrogenase activity released from the cytosol of dying cells into the supernatant.
    • Data Processing
  • Data were expressed in percentage of control conditions (no intoxication, no amyloid=100%) in order to express the amyloid injury. All values were expressed as mean+/−SEM (s.e. mean) of the 3 cultures (n=6 wells per condition). Statistical analyses were done on the different conditions (one-way ANOVA followed by the Dunnett's test when it was allowed, Statview software version 5.0).
    • Results
  • The combination of baclofen and acamprosate induces a significant protective effect against the toxicity of human Aβ1-42 peptide (improvement of 34% of cell survival) in primary cortical neuron cells, as shown in FIG. 5. The results clearly show that intoxication by human amyloid peptide (Aβ 1-42 10 μM) is significantly prevented by the combination, whereas at those concentrations, baclofen or acamprosate alone have no significant effect on intoxication.
  • Conversely, although active in this model, the combination of sulfisoxazole and cinacalcet affords a weaker protection against Aβ1-42 (19%, FIG. 6).
  • Thus, while those two combinations allow a protection against Aβ1-42, the combination baclofen-acamprosate stands out clearly. Indeed, at concentrations having no effect alone, the drugs cause a significant protection of primary cortical neuron cells against Aβ1-42 when used in combination. Furthermore, the baclofen-acamprosate combination is much more effective than the sulfisoxazole-cinacalcet combination Such an effect of baclofen and acamprosate represents a remarkable improvement by 60% in comparison to, e.g., the effect of the combination of sulfisoxazole and cinacalcet.
  • Taken together these results show an unexpected and remarkable positive effect of baclofen-acamprosate combinations in several in vitro models of Alzheimer's disease. The effect observed is highly superior to that provoked by other baclofen-based combination therapies (e.g., baclofen-terbinafine), or other active combination therapies (sulfisoxazole-cinacalcet).
  • A comparison of acamprosate and homotaurine protection activity on cortical cells has been done (FIG. 17). Those results show that the derivative of acamprosate, called homotaurine, allows an effective protection against Aβ1-42. In the context of this invention, baclofen or acamprosate can thus be substituted by their derivatives, provided that those derivatives are efficient in the assay described herein.
  • b) Cellular Pathways Triggered in Neurons by Aβ1-42 Oligomers are Reversed Upon Baclofen-Acamprosate Treatment
  • Mitochondrial dysfunction is thought to play a critical role in AD by producing two major cellular consequences: oxidative stress and cell death by apoptosis. The effect of baclofen-acamprosate treatment on oxidative stress and apoptosis generated by Aβ oligomers has been assessed by measuring the oxidation of methionine residues (methionine sulfoxide, MetO) and by measuring the release of mitochondrial cytochrome C (Cyto C, as a marker of early apoptosis) into the cytoplasm of intoxicated neuronal cells. The effect on Aβ-induced apoptosis was further confirmed by measuring the level of caspase 3, a marker of late apoptosis.
  • Other hallmarks of AD are i) the accumulation of hyperphosphorylated Tau proteins (pTau) resulting in the formation of neurofibrillary tangles and ii) excitotoxicity due to an excess of glutamate. The effect of baclofen-acamprosate treatment on Tau phosphorylation within Aβ-intoxicated neuronal cells and on glutamate accumulation in culture medium was assessed (FIG. 21).
    • Culture of Primary Cortical Neurons, Aβ1-42 Oligomer Formation and Cell Intoxication
  • Cell culture, formation of Aβ1-42 oligomer and cell intoxication were mainly performed as above. Variable intoxication times and Aβ concentrations were used depending on the experiment and are summarized in Table 5 below.
  • TABLE 5
    Aβ1-42
    Days Seeding Intoxication
    of density time
    Assay culture (cells/well) Concentration (h)
    MetO 11 15,000 1.25 μM 4
    Cyto c 11 30,000 1.25 μM 4
    Caspase 3 11 30,000   10 μM 24
    Tau 11 30,000  2.5 μM 16
    phosphorylation
    Glutamate release
    13 30,000  2.5 μM 4

    Methionine Sulfoxide (MetO), Cytochrome c (Cyto c), Caspase 3, and Phosphorylated Tau (pTau) Assays:
  • After Aβ1-42 intoxication, cells were fixed, permeabilized, and non-specific sites were blocked with a solution of phosphate buffered saline (PBS; PanBiotech) containing 0.1% of saponin (Sigma) and 1% FCS. Then, cells were incubated with one of the assay specific primary antibodies (Rabbit polyclonal anti MetO, 1/100, Euromedex, France; Rabbit polyclonal anti Cyto c, 1/100, Abcam; Rabbit polyclonal anti Caspase 3, 1/500, Sigma; Mouse monoclonal anti PHF-Tau, clone AT100, 1/100, Thermo Scientific) and with MAP2 primary antibody (Mouse monoclonal anti MAP2, 1/400, Sigma Aldrich or Chicken polyclonal anti MAP2, 1/400, Abcam), which are revealed with the fitting secondary antibodies (Alexa Fluor 488 goat anti mouse IgG; Alexa Fluor 568 goat anti rabbit IgG; Alexa Fluor 568 goat anti chicken IgG, all the three from Invitrogen and used at the 1/400 dilution).
  • Nuclei were counter-stained with Hoechst (Sigma). For MetO and Cyto c on the one hand, and pTau on the other hand, 20 and 10 pictures with 20× and 40× magnifications respectively were taken per well using the InCell Analyzer™ 1000 (GE Healthcare, France)
  • Analysis was done using Developer software (GE Healthcare) assessing the overlap between MAP2 on one side, and MetO, Cyto c, Caspase 3 or pTau staining on the other side. Results were expressed as the number of overlapping stained cells per field and reported as a percentage of vehicle treated control.
    • Glutamate Release Assays:
  • After 4 h of Aβ1-42 intoxication, cell media supernatants were analysed with the Amplex Red Glutamic Acid assay kit (Invitrogen) according to the manufacturer's instructions.
    • Results
  • Results presented in FIG. 21 show that the baclofen-acamprosate combination corrects the major hallmarks of AD. Indeed, treatment with the baclofen-acamprosate combination leads to a protection against oxidative stress, as demonstrated by a significantly lower content in methionine sulfoxide residues (MetO) in Aβ-intoxicated cells treated with baclofen-acamprosate when compared to non-treated intoxicated cells (FIG. 21 A). A marked reduction of the release of mitochondrial cytochrome C is also noticed in baclofen-acamprosate treated Aβ-intoxicated cells thereby showing that the combination is efficient in protecting the neuronal cells from Aβ induced apoptosis. (FIG. 21 B). Such effect was confirmed by the observation of a significant lowering of Caspase 3 upon baclofen-acamprosate treatment (not shown). Treatment with baclofen-acamprosate also significantly prevents Tau hyperphosphorylation in Aβ1-42-treated neurons (FIG. 21 C), as well as glutamate accumulation in culture medium (FIG. 21 D), a feature mirroring excitotoxicity due to excess of glutamate in AD.
  • Baclofen-acamprosate combination is thus efficient in counteracting oxidative stress, apoptosis, hyperphosphorylated Tau accumulation, and glutamate excitotoxicity induced in neuronal cells by AB oligomers. These surprising properties can, at least in part, account for the observed neuroprotective properties of the composition and for the actual correction of the disease. Such properties are of a particular interest for the treatment of AD and related disorders, but also in the treatment of other neurological disorders which share some of these features with AD. For instance, the control of the events leading to the accumulation of pTau by the administration of the baclofen-acamprosate combination is particularly relevant when considering the treatment of Tau pathologies such as frontotemporal dementia.
  • c) Protection Against the Toxicity of Aβ1-42 in a Neurite Growth and Synapse Functionality Model.
    • Culture of Primary Cortical Neurons, Aβ1-42 Oligomer Formation and Cell Intoxication
  • Rat cortical neurons were cultured as described by Singer el al. [58]. Briefly pregnant female rats of 15 days gestation were killed by cervical dislocation (Rats: Wistar) and the foetuses were removed from the uterus. The cortex was removed and placed in ice-cold medium of Leibovitz (L15) containing 2% of Penicillin 10,000 U/ml and Streptomycin 10 mg/ml and 1% of bovine serum albumin (BSA). Cortices were dissociated by trypsin for 20 min at 37° C. (0.05%). The reaction was stopped by the addition of Dulbecco's modified Eagle's medium (DMEM) containing DNaseI grade II and 10% of foetal calf serum (FCS). Cells were then mechanically dissociated by 3 serial passages through a 10 ml pipette and centrifuged at 515×g for 10 min at +4° C. The supernatant was discarded and the pellet of cells was re-suspended in a defined culture medium consisting of Neurobasal supplemented with B27 (2%), L-glutamine (0.2 mM), 2% of PS solution and 10 ng/ml of BDNF. Viable cells were counted in a Neubauer cytometer using the trypan blue exclusion test. The cells were seeded at a density of 30,000 cells/well in 96-well plates (wells were pre-coated with poly-L-lysine (10 μg/ml)) and were cultured at +37° C. in a humidified air (95%)/CO2 (5%) atmosphere.
  • After 10 days of culture, cells are incubated with drugs. After 1 hour, cells are intoxicated by 2.5 μM of beta-amyloid (1-42; Bachem) in defined medium without BDNF but together with drugs. Cortical neurons are intoxicated for 24 hours. BDNF (10 ng/ml) is used as a positive (neuroprotective) control. Three independent cultures were performed per condition, 6 wells per condition.
    • Neurite Length and Synapse Quantitation
  • After 24 h of intoxication, the supernatant is taken off and the cortical neurons are fixed by a cold solution of ethanol (95%) and acetic acid (5%) for 5 min. After permeabilization with 0.1% of saponin, cells are blocked for 2 h with PBS containing 1% foetal calf serum. Then, cells are incubated with monoclonal antibody anti microtubule-associated-protein 2 (MAP-2; Sigma) or with anti-synaptophysin (SYN, S5798, Sigma) together with anti-PSD95 (P246, Sigma) antibodies in order to quantify synapses. These antibodies specifically stain cell bodies and neurites of neurons (MAP2) or pre- and postsynaptic elements (SYN and PSD95, respectively).
  • These antibodies are revealed with Alexa Fluor 488 goat anti-mouse IgG (Molecular Probes). Nuclei of neurons were labeled by a fluorescent marker (Hoechst solution, SIGMA).
  • Per well, 10 pictures are taken using InCell Analyzer™ 1000 (GE Healthcare) with 20× magnification. All pictures are taken in the same conditions. Analysis of the neurite network is done using Developer software (GE Healthcare) in order to assess the total length of the neurite network.
    • Results
  • The combination of baclofen and acamprosate induces a significant protective effect against the toxicity of human Aβ1-42 peptide (improvement of 80% of neurite network) in primary cortical neuron cells as shown in FIG. 7. The results clearly show that the intoxication by human amyloid peptide (Aβ1-42 2.5 μM) is significantly prevented by the combination, whereas at those concentrations, baclofen or acamprosate alone have no significant effect on intoxication.
  • Furthermore, the total length of the neurite network in primary cortical neuron cells treated with this combination is no more significantly different from control cells. Hence, this combination allows an effective protection of cortical neuron cells against the toxicity of human Aβ1-42 peptide but also a neurite growth comparable to a sane cortical neuron cell.
  • d) Protection of Synapses of Hippocampal Neurons Against the Toxicity of Aβ1-42 Oligomer Formation and Cell Intoxication.
  • Culture of primary hippocampal neurons, Aβ1-42 oligomer formation and cell intoxication Hippocampus brain area is a key player in the building processes of memory; also, hippocampus atrophy is one of the most accurate pieces of evidence used in the diagnosis of AD. Aβ is known to have a synaptotoxic activity which underlies the early cognitive decline in AD. The ability of combinations of the invention to protect hippocampal neuronal plasticity through protection of synapses from Aβ1-42 toxicity has then been evaluated. Rat hippocampal neurons were cultured as described by Harrison (1990) [59]. Pregnant females (Wistar, Janvier) at 17 days of gestation were killed by cervical dislocation. Fetuses were collected and immediately placed in ice-cold Leibovitz (L15; Panbiotech) containing 2% of Penicillin 10,000 U/ml and Streptomycin 10 mg/ml (PS; Panbiotech) and 1% of bovine serum albumin (BSA; Panbiotech). Hippocampi were dissociated by trypsin (0.05%, Panbiotech) for 20 min at 37° C. The reaction had been stopped by the addition of Dulbecco's modified Eagle's medium (DMEM; Panbiotech) containing DNAase I grade II (0.5 mg/ml; Panbiotech) and 10% of foetal calf serum (FCS; Invitrogen). Cells were then mechanically dissociated by 3 passages through a 10 ml pipette. Cells were centrifuged at 515 g for 10 min at +4° C. The supernatant was discarded and pellet of cells was re-suspended in a defined culture medium consisting of Neurobasal (Invitrogen) supplemented with B27 (2%; Invitrogen), L-glutamine (2 mM; Panbiotech), 2% of PS solution and 10 ng/ml of brain-derived neurotrophic factor (BDNF, Panbiotech). Viable cells were counted in a Neubauer cytometer, using the trypan blue exclusion test, then seeded at a density of 20,000 per well in a 96-well plates pre-coated with poly-L-Lysine (Greiner) and cultured at 37° C. in an air (95%)-CO2 (5%) incubator. The medium was changed every 2 days.
  • After 18 days of culture, cells were incubated with R/S baclofen and acamprosate combination (80 nM and 0.32 nM respectively). After 2 days of culture, hippocampal neurons were intoxicated with Aβ1-42 human peptide (Bachem) at 0.3 μM during 48 hours in the presence of the drug combination.
  • BDNF (50 ng/ml) has been used as positive control and reference compound.
  • Three separate cultures were performed per condition, 6 wells per condition.
    • PSD95 and Synaptophysin Immunostaining, Synaptic Loss Quantification.
  • After 48 hours of intoxication, cells were permeabilized and non-specific sites were blocked with a solution of PBS containing 0.1% of saponin and 1% of FCS for 15 min and then were incubated with mouse monoclonal primary antibody against Post Synaptic Density 95 kDa (PSD95, Abcam) and with rabbit polyclonal primary antibody against Synaptophysin (Sigma) overnight at 4° C. These antibodies were revealed with Alexa Fluor 488 goat anti-mouse (Molecular probe) and Alexa Fluor 568 goat anti-rabbit (Molecular probe) for 1 hour. Nuclei of cells were labelled by a fluorescent marker (Hoechst solution, SIGMA). The total area of PSD95, Synaptophysin and the colocalization were evaluated. Results were expressed in μm2 per field. For each well of culture, 40 pictures per well were taken using InCell Analyzer™ 2000 (GE Healthcare) with 60× magnification. Colocalization of the two labellings corresponds to intact synapses. The area was automatically evaluated with Developer system analysis (GE Healthcare). PSD95 and synaptophysin total surface overlap was quantified (in μm2) and computed for each condition.
  • Data were expressed in percentage of control conditions (no intoxication, no Aβ1-42=100%) in order to express the amyloid injury. All values were expressed as mean+/−SEM (s.e. mean). Statistical analyses were done on the different conditions (ANOVA followed by Dunnett's test or t-test).
    • Results
  • Results show that Aβ1-42 (0.3 μM) intoxication induces a significant lowering of PSD95 and synaptophysin colocalization surface (almost 34%, FIG. 20, black bar) when compared to non-intoxicated cells cultures. Incubation with the baclofen-acamprosate (80 nM and 0.32 nM respectively) combination is found to significantly reverse Aβ1-42 oligomer toxicity toward synapse junctions: a 62% increase in colocalization area is observed when compared to non-treated cells (FIG. 20, light grey bar). Hence the baclofen-acamprosate combination is efficient in maintaining synaptic junctions between hippocampal cells even in the presence of Aβ oligomers.
  • Baclofen-acamprosate therapy is thus efficient in maintaining synapse function in the presence of Aβ oligomers; together with the neuritis growth protection as mentioned above, this therapy can be thus considered as of particular interest for protecting synaptic plasticity and cellular networking which is impaired in AD.
  • e) Molecular Targets Important for Baclofen-Acamprosate Mechanism of Action in Neuroprotection Against Aβ Toxicity.
    • Culture of Primary Cortical Neurons, Ligand Cell Intoxication
  • Culture of rat primary cortical cells, Aβ1-42 peptide preparation and cell intoxication were performed as stated in I.A.2.a). Non-toxic concentrations of CGP54626 (10 μM, GABABR antagonist, Tocris Biosciences), muscimol (1 μM, GABAAR agonist, Sigma Aldrich), strychnine (2.5 μM, Glycine receptor antagonist, Tocris Biosciences), (S)-3,5-dihydroxyphenylglycine (DHPG, mGluR1/5 agonist 10 μM, Tocris Biosciences) and (2R,4R)-amino-2,4-pyrrolidinedicarboxylic acid (APDC, mGluR2/3 agonist, 0.3 μM, Sigma Aldrich) were dissolved in 0.1% DMSO (except for DHPG dissolved in water) and added 2 h (except for DHPG, 1 h) before ACP (8 nM) or BCL (400 nM) to 11 days rat primary neuronal cell cultures.
  • BDNF at 50 ng/ml was used as a positive control.
  • Cell Survival Evaluation After 24 hours incubation with Aβ1-42 peptide, cortical neurons were fixed by a cold solution of alcohol/acetic acid during 5 minutes. Then, cells were permeabilized and non-specific sites were blocked with a solution of PBS containing 0.1% of saponin (Sigma) and 1% of fetal calf serum for 15 min. Cells were then incubated with mouse monoclonal primary microtubule-associated protein 2 antibody (MAP-2, Sigma) for 2 hours in the same solution at the dilution of 1/400. An incubation of 1 hour with Alexa Fluor 488 goat anti-mouse (Molecular Probes) at 1/400 as a secondary antibody was thereafter performed. Nuclei of cells were labelled by a fluorescent marker (Hoechst solution, Sigma).
  • Total neuronal survival was evaluated by numbering MAP-2 positive neuronal cell bodies. Ten pictures per well of culture were taken using InCell Analyzer™ 2000 (GE Healthcare) with 20× magnification. The number of neurons was automatically evaluated with Developer system analysis (GE Healthcare).
  • Data are expressed in percentage of control conditions (no intoxication, no amyloid=100%) in order to express the amyloid injury. All values are expressed as mean+/−SEM (s.e. mean). An ANOVA followed by Dunnett's test was done on each condition.
    • Results
  • Data gathered in these experiments show that CGP54626, an orthosteric antagonist of GABAB receptors, blocks, at non-toxic doses, the neuroprotective effect of baclofen (not shown), which confirms the importance of GABAB receptor activation for the neuroprotective action of baclofen within baclofen-acamprosate combination. In addition, muscimol, an agonist of GABAA receptors, was found to block the neuroprotective effect of acamprosate (FIG. 22 A), which demonstrates the role of the antagonistic activity of acamprosate on GABAA receptors for the protection of neuronal cultures against Aβ1-42 cytotoxicity. An agonistic effect on ionotropic glycine receptors is also found necessary for neuroprotection since strychnine, an antagonist of inhibitory glycine-gated channels, reverses the neuroprotective effect of the acamprosate (FIG. 22 B). Preincubation with DHPG and APDC, agonists of group I and II metabotropic glutamate receptors respectively, results in the abolition of neuroprotection normally afforded by acamprosate, which demonstrates the importance of the antagonistic effect of acamprosate on these molecular targets for its neuroprotective effect (FIGS. 22 C and D).
  • From the above, it can be deduced that the particularly effective neuroprotective effect reported for the baclofen-acamprosate combination is the result of a concerted action on, at least, the above 5 molecular targets. Acamprosate is moreover of particular interest because of its simultaneous actions on at least GABAA receptors and ionotropic glycine receptors as well as group I and II metabotropic glutamate receptors which, as demonstrated above, play an essential role in neuroprotection against Aβ peptides.
  • 3. Concentration Ranges of Baclofen-Acamprosate Combination afford a Protection in the Three Main Features of Aβ Peptide Toxicity.
  • As mentioned in the set of the above experiments, the inventors have found that the baclofen-acamprosate combination is efficient in counteracting events triggered by the oligomers of Aβ at the synaptic, at the neuronal and at the endothelial levels.
  • The inventors have been able to determine ranges of concentrations of baclofen and acamprosate that allow an effective protection, at the same time, of neurons, synapse function and endothelial function (FIG. 23). Such a range for a simultaneous activity has been determined for these three features to be from 80 nM to 1 μM for baclofen and from 320 μM to 4 nM for acamprosate.
  • A particularly enhanced efficacy of the treatment can then be expected within these ranges of concentrations due to the conjunction of effects that is obtained. It can be thus considered that reaching these ranges of plasmatic concentrations of baclofen and acamprosate in the brain is of particular interest.
  • 4. Examples of Synergistic Combinations
  • The inventors have further found that the baclofen-acamprosate combination is active and shows a marked synergistic effect according to methods commonly recognized among pharmacology community [60-62] in at least one of the above in vitro models for AD (Table 6) in the tested concentrations. This ensures a particular clinical benefit. At certain concentrations, the combination provides a synergistic protection in all three models, which is even more particularly advantageous.
  • TABLE 6
    Combination activity
    ACP/BCL Neuritis
    (concentration, M) Angiogenesis Neuroprotection network
    1.44 10−10/2.00 10−06 Synergy ¥ Synergy
    1.44 10−10/3.60 10−08 Synergy Synergy Synergy
    1.44 10−10/4.00 10−07 ‡ Synergy Synergy
    1.44 10−10/8.00 10−08 Synergy Synergy Synergy
    3.20 10−10/2.00 10−06 Synergy ¥ Synergy
    3.20 10−10/3.60 10−08 Synergy Synergy Synergy
    3.20 10−10/4.00 10−07 Synergy Synergy Synergy
    3.20 10−10/8.00 10−08 Synergy Synergy Synergy
    1.60 10−09/1.60 10−08 ‡ Synergy NA
    1.60 10−09/3.60 10−08 ‡ Synergy Synergy
    1.60 10−09/4.00 10−07 Synergy Synergy Synergy
    1.60 10−09/8.00 10−08 Synergy Synergy Synergy
    6.40 10−11/1.60 10−08 Synergy Synergy NA
    6.40 10−11/2.00 10−06 Synergy ¥ NA
    6.40 10−11/3.60 10−08 Synergy Synergy NA
    6.40 10−11/4.00 10−07 ‡ Synergy NA
    6.40 10−11/8.00 10−08 Synergy Synergy NA
    6.40 10−11/3.20 10−09 NA NA Synergy
    8.00 10−09/3.60 10−08 ‡ ¥ Synergy
    Synergy is determined according Loewe or Bliss methods [60-62] ‡: no effect; ¥: no synergy;
    NA: not available
    • B. Baclofen-Acamprosate Combination Therapies Prevent Toxicity of Human Aβ in In Vivo Models
  • 1. Intracerebroventricular Administration of Aβ25-35 in Swiss Mice.
    • Animals
  • Male Swiss mice, 6 weeks old, are used throughout the study. Animals are housed in plastic cages, with free access to laboratory chow and water, except during behavioural experiments, and kept in a regulated environment, under a 12 h light/dark cycle (light on at 8:00 a.m.). Experiments are carried out in a soundproof and air-regulated experimental room, to which mice have been habituated at least 30 min before each experiment.
  • Combinatory treatment and administration of Aβ25-35
  • Drug(s) is/are daily administered by gavage (per os). The Aβ25-35 peptide and scrambled Aβ25-35 peptide (control) have been dissolved in sterile bidistilled water, and stored at −20° C. until use. The β-amyloid peptides are then administered intracerebroventricularly (i.c.v.). In brief, each mouse is anaesthetized lightly with ether, and a gauge stainless-steel needle is inserted unilaterally 1 mm to the right of the midline point equidistant from each eye, at an equal distance between the eyes and the ears and perpendicular to the plane of the skull. Peptides or vehicle are delivered gradually within approximately 3 s. Mice exhibit normal behaviour within 1 min after injection. The administration site is checked by injecting Indian ink in preliminary experiments. Neither insertion of the needle nor injection of the vehicle have a significant influence on survival, behavioral responses or cognitive functions.
  • On Day −1, i.e., 24 h before the Aβ25-35 peptide injection, baclofen, acamprosate, a combination thereof or the vehicle solution are administered twice per os by gavage at 8:00 am and 6:00 pm.
  • On Day 0 (at 10:00 am), mice are injected i.c.v. with Aβ25-35 peptide or scrambled Aβ25-35 peptide (control) in a final volume of 3 μl (3 mM).
  • Between Day 0 and Day 7, baclofen, acamprosate, a combination thereof or the vehicle solution are administered per os by gavage twice daily (at 8:00 am and 6:00 pm). A dose designated as bid (bis in die) means that said dose is administered twice daily. Drugs are solubilized in water and freshly prepared just before each gavage administration. One animal group receives donepezil (reference compound, 1 mg/kg/day) in a single injection intraperitoneally (at 8:00 am).
  • On Day 7, all animals are tested for the spontaneous alternation performance in the Y-maze test, an index of spatial working memory.
  • On Days 7 and 8, the contextual long-term memory of the animals is assessed using the step-down type passive avoidance procedure.
  • On Day 8, animals are sacrificed. Their brains are dissected and kept at −80° C. for further analysis.
  • When the baclofen-acamprosate combination is tested in a combination with reference compounds for AD (for instance, currently approved treatments for AD are donepezil, galantamine, rivastigmine or memantine), said reference compounds are administered intraperitoneally, between Day 0 and Day 7, at 8:00 am.
  • a) Combinations Enhance Behavioral and Cognitive Performances of Intoxicated Animals
    • Spontaneous Alternation Performances Y-Maze Test
  • On Day 7, all animals are tested for spontaneous alternation performance in the Y-maze, an index of spatial working memory. The Y-maze is made of grey polyvinylchloride. Each arm is 40 cm long, 13 cm high, 3 cm wide at the bottom, 10 cm wide at the top, and converges at an equal angle. Each mouse is placed at the end of one arm and allowed to move freely through the maze during an 8 min session. The series of arm entries, including possible returns into the same arm, are checked visually. An alternation is defined as entries into all three arms on consecutive occasions. The number of maximum alternations is therefore the total number of arm entries minus two and the percentage of alternation is calculated as (actual alternations/maximum alternations)×100. Parameters include the percentage of alternation (memory index) and total number of arm entries (exploration index). Animals that show an extreme behavior (Alternation percentage<25% or >85% or number of arm entries <10) are discarded. Usually, this accounts for 0-5% of the animals. This test incidentally serves to analyze at the behavioral level the impact and the amnesic effect induced in mice by the Aβ25-35 injection.
    • Passive Avoidance Test
  • The apparatus is a two-compartment (15×20×15 cm high) box with one illuminated with white polyvinylchloride walls and the other darkened with black polyvinylchloride walls and a grid floor. A guillotine door separates each compartment. A 60 W lamp positioned 40 cm above the apparatus lights up the white compartment during the experiment. Scrambled foot shocks (0.3 mA for 3 s) could be delivered to the grid floor using a shock generator scrambler (Lafayette Instruments, Lafayette, USA). The guillotine door is initially closed during the training session. Each mouse is placed into the white compartment. After 5 s, the door raises. When the mouse enters the darkened compartment and places all its paws on the grid floor, the door closes and the foot shock is delivered for 3 s. The step-through latency, that is, the latency spent to enter the darkened compartment, and the number of vocalizations is recorded. The retention test is carried out 24 h after training. Each mouse is placed again into the white compartment. After 5 s the door is raised, the step-through latency and the escape latency, i.e., the time spent to return into the white compartment, are recorded up to 300 s.
    • Results
  • Positive results are observed in behavioural performances and biochemical assays performed 7 days after Aβ25-35 peptide i.c.v. injection.
  • The combination of baclofen and acamprosate induces a significant protective effect on behavioral and cognitive performances of intoxicated animals as shown in FIGS. 8, 9 and 10.
  • In FIG. 8, with only 53.8% of alternation, intoxicated mice exhibit a strongly impaired spatial working memory compared to control. With an improvement of more than 48% of their percentage of alternation compared to intoxicated controls, the impairment is significantly prevented in mice treated with baclofen and acamprosate.
  • Similarly, FIGS. 9 and 10 show that intoxicated animals exhibit impaired behavioral and cognitive performances according to their scores in escape latency and step-through latency respectively. In both tests, the combination of baclofen and acamprosate allows a significant correction of the impairment. The escape latency of mice treated with this combination is no more significantly different from control mice (FIG. 9) and step-through latency (FIG. 10) is significantly increased by combinations of the invention, with an enhanced effect of the combination compared to the drugs alone.
  • Memory impairment is the early feature of Alzheimer's disease and these results clearly show that the toxic effect of amyloid peptide on behavioral and cognitive performances (including memory) is significantly prevented by the combinations of the invention.
  • Furthermore, FIG. 16 shows that extremely low doses of baclofen (480 μg/kg bid), acamprosate (32 μg/kg bid) and donepezil (0.25 mg/kg/day) can be combined to allow complete protection of behavioral and cognitive performances of mice as measured by the Y-maze test. While donepezil, at this concentration, has no significant effect (32% protection) on spatial working memory, its use in conjunction with the baclofen and acamprosate combination allows a complete protection (98%) of intoxicated mice's cognitive performances. The combination index of donepezil in combination with baclofen-acamprosate is 0.687 which determines a marked synergy between the compounds (as determined by the method of Loewe [60, 61]). The human equivalent dose of donepezil used in this combination is more than 4 times lower than the lowest and almost 20 times lower than the highest dose currently used in humans for AD treatment.
  • An improvement is also observed in the performances in the Y-maze test when combining baclofen (480 μg/kg bid), acamprosate (32 μg/kg bid) and memantine (0.5 mg/kg/day), as shown in FIG. 19. At the concentrations used neither the baclofen-acamprosate combination nor memantine has a significant effect. Noteworthy, the dose of memantine used in these experiments is more than 7 times lower than the human equivalent dose corresponding to the maintenance treatment. Moreover the combination of baclofen-acamprosate with memantine is synergistic, displaying a combinatory index of 0.784 (as determined by the method of Loewe [60, 61]).
  • Combinations of the invention can thus be further combined with other therapies for AD in order to potentiate their action, and to lower their potential side effects by using lower doses for these drugs.
  • b) Combinations Improve Neurophysiological Concern of Neurological Diseases
  • Combination therapies are tested in an in vivo model of Aβ intoxication. Their effects on several parameters which are affected in neurological diseases are assessed:
      • Caspases 3 and 9 expression level, considered as an indicator of apoptosis,
      • Lipid peroxidation, considered as a marker for oxidative stress level,
      • GFAP expression assay, considered as a marker of the level of brain inflammation,
      • Blood-Brain Barrier integrity,
      • Overall synapse integrity (synaptophysin ELISA), and
      • Quantification of viable neurons in the Cornus Ammonis area1 (CA1) of hippocampus.
    Blood-Brain Barrier Integrity
  • The experimental design about animal intoxication by Aβ is the same as previously stated.
  • The potential protective effect of the combination therapies on blood-brain barrier (BBB) integrity is analyzed in mice injected intracerebroventricularly (i.c.v.) with oligomeric amyloid-β25-35 peptide (Aβ25-35) or scrambled Aβ25-35 control peptide (Sc.Aβ), 7 days after injection.
  • On day 7 after the Aβ25-35 injection, animals are tested to determine BBB integrity by using the EB (Evans Blue) method. EB dye is known to bind to serum albumin after peripheral injection and has been used as a tracer for serum albumin. EB dye (2% in saline, 4 ml/kg) is injected intraperitoneally (i.p.) 3 h prior to the transcardiac perfusion. Mice are then anesthetized with i.p. 200 μl of pre-mix ketamine 80 mg/kg, xylazine 10 mg/kg, and the chests are opened. Mice are perfused transcardially with 250 ml of saline for approximately 15 min until the fluid from the right atrium becomes colourless. After decapitation, the brains are removed and dissected out into three regions: cerebral cortex (left+right), hippocampus (left+right), diencephalon. Then, each brain region is weighed for quantitative measurement of EB-albumin extravasation.
  • Samples are homogenized in phosphate-buffered saline solution and mixed by vortexing after addition of 60% trichloroacetic acid to precipitate the protein. Samples are cooled at 4° C., and then centrifuged 30 min at 10,000 g, 4° C. The supernatant is measured at 610 nm for absorbance of EB using a spectrophotometer.
  • EB is quantified both as:
      • μg/mg of brain tissue by using a standard curve, obtained by known concentration of EB-albumin, and
      • μg/mg of protein.
    Overall Synapse Integrity (Synaptophysin ELISA)
  • Synaptophysin has been chosen as a marker of synapse integrity and is assayed using a commercial ELISA kit (USCN, Ref. E90425Mu). Samples are prepared from hippocampus tissues and homogenized in an extraction buffer specific to as described by manufacturer and reference literature.
  • Tissues are rinsed in ice-cold PBS (0.02 mol/1, pH 7.0-7.2) to remove excess blood thoroughly and weighed before nitrogen freezing and −80° C. storage. Tissues are cut into small pieces and homogenized in 1 ml ice-cold phosphate buffer saline (PBS) solution with a glass homogenizer. The resulting suspension is sonicated with an ultrasonic cell disrupter or subjected to two freeze-thawing cycles to further break the cell membranes. Then, homogenates are centrifugated for 5 min at 5,000 g and the supernatant is assayed immediately.
  • All samples are assayed in triplicate.
  • Quantification of proteins is performed with the Pierce BCA (bicinchoninic acid) protein assay kit (Pierce, Ref. 23227) to evaluate extraction performance and allow normalization.
  • The total protein concentrations are then calculated from standard curve dilutions and serve to normalize ELISA results.
    • Quantification of Viable Neurons in the CA1
  • On Day 8, each mouse is anesthetized with 200 μl i.p. of a pre-mix of ketamine 80 mg/kg and xylazine 10 mg/kg and transcardially perfused with 100 ml of saline solution followed by 100 ml of 4% paraformaldehyde. The brains are removed and kept for 24 h post-fixation in 4% paraformaldehyde solution at 4° C. After post-fixation, brains are washed in a phosphate buffer saline (PBS) solution, then cerebellums are removed and the brains are cut in coronal sections (20 μm thickness) using a vibratome (Leica VT100OS, Leica, Wetzlar, Germany). Serial sections are placed on 24-well plates with PBS. They are then selected to include the hippocampal formation and 9 sections are placed in gelatin-coated glass strips (one slide per animal for cresyl violet). All slides are dried at room temperature for 48 h to avoid unsticking. The slides are stored at room temperature until cresyl violet staining. Sections are stained with 0.2% cresyl violet reagent (Sigma-Aldrich), then dehydrated with graded ethanol, treated with toluene, and mounted with Mountex medium (BDH Laboratory Supplies, Poole, Dorset, UK).
  • After mounting, slides are kept at RT for 24 h drying. Examination of the CA1 area is performed using a light microscope (Dialux 22, Leitz), with slices digitalized through a CCD camera (Sony XC-77CE, Sony, Paris, France) with the NIH Image® v1.63 software (NIH). CA1 measurement and pyramidal cells counts are processed using ImageJ® (NIH). Data are expressed as mean of nine slices of CA1 pyramidal cells per millimeter for each group (left and right hippocampus CA1 counting) [63].
    • Oxidative Stress Assay
  • Mice are sacrificed by decapitation and both hippocampi are rapidly removed, weighed and kept in liquid nitrogen until assayed. After thawing, hippocampi are homogenized in cold methanol (1/10 w/v), centrifuged at 1,000 g during 5 min and the supernatant placed in Eppendorf tubes. The reaction volume of each homogenate is added to FeSO4 1 mM, H2SO4 0.25 M, xylenol orange 1 mM and incubated for 30 min at room temperature. After reading the absorbance at 580 nm (A580 1), 10 A1 of cumene hydroperoxyde 1 mM (CHP) is added to the sample and incubated for 30 min at room temperature, to determine the maximal oxidation level. The absorbance is measured at 580 nm (A580 2). The level of lipid peroxidation is determined as CHP equivalents (CHPE) according to: CHPE=A580 1/A580 2×[CHP] and expressed as CHP equivalents per weight of tissue and as percentage of control group data.
    • Caspase Pathway Induction Assay and GFAP Expression Assay
  • Mice are sacrificed by decapitation and both hippocampi are rapidly removed, rinsed in ice-cold PBS (0.02 mol/l, pH 7.0-7.2) to remove excess blood thoroughly, weighed and kept in liquid nitrogen until assayed. Tissues are cut into small pieces and homogenized in 1 ml ice-cold PBS with a glass homogenizer. The resulting suspension is sonicated with an ultrasonic cell disrupter or subjected to two freeze-thawing cycles to further break the cell membranes. Then, homogenates are centrifugated at 5,000 g during 5 min and the supernatant is assayed immediately.
  • Experiments are conducted with commercial assays: Caspase-3 (USCN—E90626Mu), Caspase-9 (USCN—E90627Mu). GFAP (USCN—E90068).
  • Quantification of proteins is performed with the Pierce BCA (bicinchoninic acid) protein assay kit (Pierce, Ref. 23227) to evaluate extraction performance and allow normalization.
    • Results
  • The combination of baclofen and acamprosate induces a significant protective effect on neurophysiological functions of intoxicated animals as shown in FIGS. 11, 12, 13 and 14.
  • With a protection of more than 60% compared to non-treated intoxicated animals, the combination is effective for the protection of neurons (FIG. 11) and synaptic density (FIG. 13).
  • Similarly, FIG. 12 shows that the combination of baclofen and acamprosate protects the BBB integrity (76%) compared with non-treated intoxicated animals.
  • Finally, this combination therapy is efficient in reducing the overall oxidative stress induced by Aβ in the brains of treated animals when compared with non-treated intoxicated animals (FIG. 14).
  • 2. hAPPSL Transgenic Mice
  • Efficiency of the baclofen-acamprosate combination has been tested in another murine model for AD. A mouse line overexpressing the 751 amino acid form of human APP (hAPP) with London (V717I) and Swedish (KM670/671NL) mutations (hAPPSL) under the control of the murine Thy-1 promoter has been chosen. In this model, significant deficits in spatial memory and learning in the water maze task and in habituation in the hole-board task are noticed as soon as 6 months of age. This cognitive decline is due to dysfunction of synaptic transmission and mimics some aspects of the early phases of human AD.
    • Animals
  • Experiments were conducted on male subjects. Animals were bred at QPS (Austria), and C57BL6 age and gender-matched transgenic littermates served as controls. Animals were housed in plastic cages with free access to food and water, except during behavioural experiments, and kept in a regulated environment (23±1° C., 50-60% humidity) under a 12 h light/dark cycle.
    • Drug Treatment
  • Drug combination (acamprosate 0.2 mg/kg and baclofen 3 mg/kg) or the vehicle solution are administered per os by gavage twice daily (at 8:00 am and 6:00 pm) in a volume of 5 ml/kg. Treatment with the baclofen-acamprosate combination was started at 8 months of age (i.e., when the disease is well established) and lasted 4 weeks until the end of functional tests. All behavioral tests were performed 2 h after treatment.
    • Morris Water Maze (MWM) Acquisition Task
  • Mice were tested for acquisition and working memory. Briefly, swimming was recorded using a Videotrack software (Viewpoint, Champagne-au-Mont-d'Or, France), with trajectories being analysed as latencies and distances. The software divides the pool into four quadrants. Training (Acquisition) consisted of 4 swims per day for 4 days. The latency, expressed as mean±s.e.m., was calculated for each training day. A probe test was performed 24 h after the last swim (retention phase). The platform was removed and each animal was allowed a free 60 s swim. The time spent in each quadrant was then determined. After the training test, animals were tested for spatial working memory. Working memory was specifically assayed by changing the platform location every day (four swims per day during 2 days) and by using a training inter-trial time of 2 min. The swimming times to find the platform of the first (swim1), second (swim2), third (swim3) and fourth trial (swim4) of Day 2 were calculated and averaged.
    • Statistical Analyses
  • A mixed ANOVA with Dunnett's test, including fixed effect terms for treatment, time and the treatment by time interaction, and a random effect term for animals was applied. Treatment effect was assessed for each time point and for combined time points (global effect). Tests were conducted at a 5% significance level.
    • Results
  • At the age of 8 months, when hAPPSL transgenic mice's cognition was already impaired and diseased installed, a one-month treatment with the baclofen-acamprosate combination is found to substantially improve cognitive deficits as they had been assessed in the MWM acquisition and working memory tests (FIGS. 24 A) and B) respectively).
  • Thus, notwithstanding the extensive in vitro results, the results obtained in two different in vivo models confirm the efficacy of the combination in counteracting the toxicity of Aβ and its behavioural effects as well as its effects on brain physiology.
  • Several neurological functions impaired in numerous neurological disorders, including neurodegenerative disorders such as Alzheimer's disease and related disorders, have been protected and symptoms retarded or reduced by the combination of baclofen-acamprosate.
  • C. Baclofen-Acamprosate Combination Therapies have Positive Effects in Human Subjects
  • The particular efficiency of the compositions of the invention in different in vitro and animal models for AD, together with the possibility of acting not only on a single but on a group of phenomena described as being at the origin of the disease, have prompted the inventors to test it in aged people, in a model of chemically induced amnesia that is commonly used in clinical trials for AD, and also in people suffering from mild AD. More particularly, baclofen-acamprosate combination efficacy in improving memory or memory related mental functions and in improving electrophysiological features underlying working memory has been assessed through clinical trials.
  • The studies were conducted in compliance with the following protocols and in accordance with Good Clinical Practice (GCP) as required by the European Medicines Agency ICH-E6 (RI) guideline recommendations and the French law No. 2004-806, Aug. 9, 2004 relative to public health law.
  • 1. Improvement in Memory and Related Functions in Humans Subjected to Chemically-Induced Cognitive Impairment.
  • AD patients show the signs of diminished cholinergic synaptic activity, with diminished levels of acetylcholine. The pharmacological model of this phenomenon consists of treating the subjects with scopolamine, a blocker of muscarinic receptors. This drug thereby induces a transitory and reversible cognitive impairment upon administration [64]; it is therefore currently used as a pharmacologic model for induced dementia.
    • Experimental Design
  • Twenty-one healthy male volunteers aged from 20 to 40 years were enrolled in the study, which is a randomized, 2-way cross-over, double blind, placebo-controlled study. The study had two distinct periods, P1 and P2, each consisting of 40 hours hospitalization and being spaced from each other by 7 days as a wash-out period. During both these periods, the baclofen-acamprosate combination is administered orally, the drugs being administered concomitantly. Results were compared to those of placebo treatment. A dose designated as bid (bis in die) means that said dose is administered twice daily.
  • During P1, subjects were administered according to the following treatment.
      • at Day 1: baclofen (6 mg) and acamprosate (0.4 mg) mix, or placebo, orally, in a sub-acute administration, bid.
      • at Day 2 (test day), H3 just before scopolamine injection: single dose of baclofen (6 mg) and acamprosate (0.4 mg) mix or placebo, orally.
      • at Day 2, H3: a sub-cutaneous injection of 0.5 mg of scopolamine.
  • According to the same above dosage schedule, subjects who had received baclofen-acamprosate treatment in P1 received placebo during P2, while those administered with placebo in P1 were treated with the baclofen-acamprosate mix in P2.
    • Cognitive Test
  • Effects on impaired cognition were explored by measuring the following features in the Cognitive Groton Maze Learning Task (GMLT) test:
      • the efficiency of performance: mps,
      • the total number of errors: ter, and
      • the duration of task: dur.
  • The GMLT test was performed for each treatment period on Day 1 (2 training sessions), on Day 2 (test day) HO, H2.5, H4, H5.5, H7 and H9 and on Day 3 H24.
    • Data Analyses
  • The data from the GMLT test were pooled together in a “composite” GMLT score. Comparison between treatment groups for the two periods was performed on change from baseline value by using a mixed Analysis of Covariance (ANCOVA) model with SAS® Mixed procedure (see Worldwide Website sas.com), including fixed effect terms for period treatment, time and the treatment by time interaction, a random effect term for subject and the baseline value as covariate. Treatment effect was assessed for combined time points (global effect) and for each time point.
    • Results: Baclofen-Acamprosate Combination Improves the Cognitive Deficit Induced by Scopolamine.
  • For each of the periods P1 and P2, similar data were obtained for each of mps, ter and dur components of the GMLT test. The resulting “composite” GMLT score is presented in FIG. 25.
  • Scopolamine is known to act as early as 30 min after its administration, its effect lasting for approximately 6 hours. Its Tmax is known to be of about 3 hours [64]. These data correspond to the transient collapse of performances in the GMLT test observed in placebo-treated subjects (FIG. 25, circles, dotted line).
  • An improvement of cognitive performances was observed for baclofen-acamprosate treated subjects (FIG. 25 squares, grey line) compared to placebo dosed subjects. This improvement is particularly significant in the time period around H5.5 that corresponds to the Tmax of baclofen-acamprosate (FIG. 25, darkest area in the pharmacokinetic scale of mix compounds).
  • Hence, the baclofen-acamprosate combination is efficient in counteracting scopolamine induced cognitive impairment. Hence, besides being considered as of interest in the cases of provoked amnesia, combinations of the invention can also be considered as of particular interest in reversing memory impairment related to conditions implying diminished cholinergic synaptic activity. Baclofen-acamprosate combinations are thus of particular interest for the treatment of AD and related diseases.
  • 2. Baclofen-Acamprosate is Effective in Mild AD Patients.
  • Another part of the studies performed on human subjects consists of a three-month clinical study that is currently performed on patients diagnosed with mild AD with the aim of exploring the effect of baclofen-acamprosate combinations on cognitive and behavioural impairments related to the disease. This study is a 12-week, prospective pilot single-blind and placebo sequential controlled, multi-center trial which assesses the effects of different doses of the baclofen-acamprosate combination. It is a “challenge/de-challenge/re-challenge” (CDR) type study, which means that the baclofen-acamprosate combination is administered on a given time period, then withdrawn, and then re-administered. During the withdrawal (de-challenge) phase, the medication is allowed to wash out of the organism. Then, an improvement of the disease's symptoms during the challenge and re-challenge phases, together with no improvement or a worsening in the de-challenge phase, would be considered as a signature of the efficiency of the combination. This study is conducted in an open way and was single-blind for the patients and the neurophysiologist assessor. Preliminary results obtained for 29 patients are presented herein.
    • Experimental Design
  • Cognitive and behavioural impairments of the subjects are measured by psychometric assessments during visits to a neurophysiologist set at the beginning and the end of each of the 3 phases of the CDR study:
  • Visit 1 (V1) holds on the beginning of the challenge phase, which lasts 4 weeks, and at the end of which performances of subjects are evaluated during visit 2 (V2); then the de-challenge phase of 4 weeks runs and ends with visit 3 (V3), after which the re-challenge phase lasts 4 weeks more, to be ended by the last evaluation of the subjects by the neurophysiologist during visit 4 (V4). At each of visits V1-V4, ADAS cog tests (Alzheimer's Disease Assessment Scale-cognitive subscale) are performed to evaluate the changes in cognition performances of the subjects.
  • In this study, three doses, administered twice daily (once in the morning and once in the evening), of the mix of baclofen-acamprosate are tested:
      • Dose 1: 0.4 mg acamprosate and 6 mg baclofen, given concomitantly;
      • Dose 2: 1 mg acamprosate and 15 mg baclofen, given concomitantly; and
      • Dose 3: 20 mg acamprosate and 12 mg baclofen, given concomitantly.
    Subject Recruitment
  • 29 patients diagnosed as suffering from mild AD, i.e., displaying a Mini Mental State Examination (MMSE) score between 20 and 26, were enrolled in the study (clinical characteristics of the cohort, Table 7) for the testing of doses 1 and 2.
  • TABLE 7
    n = 29 patients
    Age +/− sem 71.8 +/− 1.33 years
    Gender
    13 Females
    16 Males
    MMSE +/− sem 23.4 +/− 0.389
    ADAS Cog. at V1 +/− sem 11.9 +/− 0.661
    sem: standard error of the mean;
    MMSE: Mini Mental State Examination;
    ADAS cog: Alzheimer's Disease Assessment Scale-cognitive subscale
  • Depending on the subjects, the screening/recruitment sessions were held from 1 to 2 weeks before V1.
  • At V1, the 29 patients were randomized into two groups:
      • 15 patients in group 1 receiving dose 1, and
      • 14 patients in group 2 receiving dose 2.
  • ADAS cog score assessed at V1 is taken as the baseline to evaluate changes in performances of the subjects assessed during subsequent visits V2, V3 and V4.
  • Each patient is their own control for the 3 successive sequences of the CDR study.
  • The effect of the mix is assessed on the changes of ADAS cog score at the end of each period in comparison with the previous visit and the treatment periods are compared to the placebo period.
  • The mean changes from baseline to the end of the first 4-week active treatment period and the mean changes observed between each visit are assessed.
  • The change of each endpoint is measured between each visit:
      • from baseline (V1) to the end of the first 4-week active treatment period (V2),
      • from V2 to the end of the 4-week placebo period (V3),
      • from V3 to the end of the second 4-week active treatment period (V4), and
      • from V1 to V4.
  • Differences between V1 and V2 or V1 and V4 are statistically tested using a one-tailed paired test of Student at a 10% significance level.
    • Dosing of Plasmatic Concentrations of Baclofen and Acamprosate
  • To evaluate the overall exposure of the patients to the drugs, baclofen and acamprosate plasmatic concentration has been measured at the end of the study (V4), in the morning just before drug administration (on an empty stomach, assumed to be the lowest drug concentration) and two hours after the dosing, which roughly corresponds to the Tmax of the drugs (assumed to be the highest concentration). Actual plasmatic concentration of the drugs to which the patient is exposed thus oscillates during the treatment between these lowest and highest drug concentrations.
  • The plasmatic concentration of a given drug can be determined using any method well-known by biopharmacists. Briefly, an LC-MS/MS analysis has been performed on samples with the material detailed in Table 8, but any equivalent material can be used.
  • TABLE 8
    acamprosate quantification baclofen quantification
    Chromatograph Shimadzu LC-20AD liquid Shimadzu LC-20AB liquid
    chromatography system chromatography system
    SIL-20AC-HT autosampler SIL-20AC autosampler
    Matrix C18 stationary phase Phenyl-hexyl stationary
    phase
    Mass API5500 (AB-Sciex) A TSQ Quantum Ultra
    spectrometer mass (Thermo Electron
    Corporation)
    Electrospray Negative Positive
    Ionisation
    mode
    Reference Acamprosate calcium Baclofen
    standard
    Internal Acamprosate-D12 calcium Baclofen-D4
    standard trihydrate
  • Watson® LIMS 7.2 (Thermo Electron, Philadelphia, Pa.) software was used for regression, calculation, and statistical calculations.
  • Analyst 1.5.2 (AB-Sciex) and LCQuan 2.5 (Thermo Electron Corporation) software was used for LC-MS/MS instrument control, data acquisition and integration. Any other software can be used as a function of the mass spectrometer to be used.
  • Samples are human plasma samples collected during the clinical trial. Blank plasma samples were used to prepare calibration.
  • For acamprosate quantification, sampling volume was 100 μl and proteins have been precipitated, and for baclofen, sampling volume was 200 μl and samples were submitted to solid phase extraction.
    • Mini Mental State Examination (MMSE) Score
  • The MMSE is widely used to assess the cognitive functions and the mnesic abilities [65] in the frame of the diagnosis of AD and of the assessment of the severity of the disease. The test comprises a series of 30 questions addressing 5 different areas (orientation, registration, attention calculation, recall, and language) with the final score being graded out of 30 points. A final score below or equal to 26 points corresponds to a dementia diagnosis. Normal scores range from 30 to 26, whereas a score between 26 and 20 indicates mild dementia, a score between 19 and 10 indicates moderate dementia, and a score below 10 is considered as indicating severe dementia. A variation of 2 points of the score is usually considered as clinically relevant.
    • ADAS Cog Score
  • ADAS cognitive subscale deals with memory, language, construction and praxis orientation and is commonly considered as a standard for the evaluation of mild to moderate AD patients in the clinical trials. It consists of 11 tasks which measure the disturbances of memory, language, praxis, attention and other cognitive abilities which are often referred to as the core symptoms of AD. It generally shows good test-retest and inter-rater reliability and performs satisfactorily against more detailed measures of cognitive function.
  • Score range varies from 0 to 70. The more mistakes made, the higher the score. A normal score is defined as a score lower than 10. A 70-point score is a sign of severe dementia [66].
  • a) Combination Therapies Improve Cognitive Performances of Mild AD Patients.
  • Results presented herein were obtained from an intermediate analysis of the ADAS cog data for the 24 first subjects to complete the study who were treated by doses 1 or 2.
  • As shown in FIG. 26, the evolution of performances in the ADAS cog tests all along the study shows a clear correlation with the CDR design of the study, either when considering the whole set of patients (i.e., whatever the dosage, FIG. 26), or considering separately patients treated with dose 1 or dose 2 (not shown). It clearly appears that treatment with baclofen-acamprosate during the challenge and re-challenge phases results in an improvement of the subject's cognitive performances at the end of both phases when compared to those measured at the beginning of each phase. This positive effect of the treatment is emphasized by the clear worsening of the score during the de-challenge phase, wherein a placebo is administered.
  • A strongly significant improvement of performances of patients in the ADAS cog test is observed between V1 and V2 (p<0.01). The three-month study led finally to a global significant improvement of patient condition despite the dividing de-challenge phase (p<0.05).
  • b) Baclofen-Acamprosate Combination Acts on the Electrophysiological Features of Cognition in Mild AD Patients.
  • Alterations in brain functions can be detected by electrophysiological techniques such as electroencephalography (EEG). Event related potentials (ERPs) are observed within the EEG recordings in response to an experimental condition, and represent the corresponding activated cognitive phenomena such as perception, attention, decision-making process, answering, memory process, language, etc. ERP characteristics and their components can vary as a function of various factors such as stimulus relevance, task performed, lesions of the nervous system, the use of drugs and so on.
  • ERPs have been found to be altered in patients suffering from AD, vascular dementia or dementia associated with Parkinsonian symptoms. Numerous research studies have helped to establish ERPs as a useful cognitive biomarker for the diagnosis of dementia, tracking disease progression, and evaluating the pro-cognitive effect of therapeutics. More particularly ERP measures allow pointing out alteration of cognitive function at an early stage, and can contribute to the diagnosis of AD with good sensitivity and specificity.
  • The most frequently recorded potential in clinical practice is P300 which comprises P3 and N2 subcomponents:
      • P3 (or late positive complex) is a large centroparietal positivity in the ERP that occurs with a latency of approximately 300 ms after a discordant stimulus. P3 can be divided in the two subcomponents P3a and P3b. P3a is generally considered to be related to the degree of focal attention whereas P3b is supposed to index the working memory update. P3 amplitude notably refers to selective attention stimulus occurrence probability motivation and vigilance.
      • N2 is a negative wave which precedes P3 and which might be linked to the detection of the target stimulus and be the reflection of the selective attention processes coming into action.
  • Turning back to AD, a P3b latency increase and amplitude decrease are the most consensual objective parameters observed in AD patients. It is useful for the monitoring of AD progression, and even for assessing AD treatment response. Generally speaking, latency refers to the time necessary for the making of a decision and amplitude refers to the difficulty of the task, probability of occurrence of the stimulus, or emotional state.
  • Recording of ERPs
  • ERP assessment is done at visits V1-V4 of the above clinical trial.
  • Recording of cognitive ERPs is done according to the auditory oddball paradigm. Patients lay down on an “examination bed,” with eyes opened, in a soundproof, darkened room. Tones (60 dB SPL, 100-ms duration) were presented binaurally through a headset up to a total of 150 stimuli. Patients were instructed to identify the odd 2000 Hz high-pitched stimuli (target sounds), which had a 20% occurrence probability among the standard 1000 Hz low-pitched stimuli (common sounds). The cognitive task required paying attention to the odd stimuli and counting them. The stimulus order of appearance was random and there was at least a 1140-ms gap between each stimulus. Three tests were recorded with a 2-minute pause followed by repeated instructions. The test was stopped once the 90 (3×30) target stimuli have been played out and the patient was asked to give out his/her count of the oddest sounds. Separate averaging of single records corresponding to frequent and rare stimuli were processed online. Grand average of the evoked potentials was calculated from the three trials for Fz (frontal vertex), Cz (Central vertex) and Pz (Parietal vertex) electrodes.
  • Evoked potential amplitudes were measured relative to the prestimulus baseline from the records collected at Fz, Cz and Pz:
      • P3 was the most positive wave after N2 between 279 and 440 ms.
      • N100 wave was the most negative peak in the range 75 to 150 ms.
      • N200 wave was the most negative peak between 196 and 300 ms.
  • In Alzheimer's disease latencies are hugely delayed and amplitudes are reduced.
  • Latencies and amplitudes of the P3a and P3b subcomponents of P3 and N200 were taken from the signals recorded from Fz, Cz and Pz electrodes and used for statistical analyses. Delta of amplitudes between N2 and P3a and delta of amplitudes between N2 and P3b were also calculated during statistical analyses. ASCII-format files were also recorded for PCA statistical analyses.
  • All these 24 latencies/amplitudes/deltas-of-amplitudes parameters and the PCA analysis were assessed for each period (challenge, de-challenge, re-challenge) and compared across all these 3 periods.
  • The analysis was computed with R. All quantitative parameters of the ERPs were presented in terms of mean, standard deviation, median, extreme values, Q1, Q3, number of patients and missing data.
    • Case Study: Baclofen-Acamprosate Combinatorial Treatment Significantly Corrects ERP Features in an AD Subject
  • Results presented in FIG. 27 represent ERP measures gathered from all three electrodes all along the CDR study for patient 601.
  • Patient 601 is a 74-year-old female Caucasian subject with no known antecedent of familial dementia. She was diagnosed as suffering from probable AD since June 2012, and presents a moderate hypotrophy of the hippocampus together with a global cerebral hypotrophy in neuroimaging, which ascertains the diagnosis. At V0 she obtained a MMSE score of 24 She was administered with the low dose (dose 1) of the combination.
  • ERPs obtained at V1 for this patient are characterized by a substantial delay of P3, around 900 ins for this subject (FIG. 27).
  • As soon as V2, a significant correction of both the delay (a significant decrease) and the amplitude (a significant enhancement) of the P3b wave is noticed. This positive effect of the mix seems to be maintained even during the de-challenge phase: P3b at V3 is found shifted to the left when compared to the one of V2 and also presents a greater amplitude. Improvement of latency is still observed at V4 at the end of the re-challenge phase. These results suggest that the mix is efficient in improving working memory update in AD patients. Noteworthy, an improvement is also observed regarding the P3A and N2 components, which are more related to the attention processes.
  • Hence, the baclofen-acamprosate combination is efficient in correcting the alterations of brain electrophysiological functions which are observed in mild AD subjects.
  • c) Conclusion—Clinical Trial
  • Results of clinical trials performed in humans show the effectiveness of combinations of the invention in treating AD and related disorders as shown by the observed protection against memory process degradation both in a chemically induced amnesia model and in patients diagnosed with mild AD. The correction of memory processes in patients is asserted by electrophysiology data that show a correction in brain functioning upon treatment in mild AD patients.
  • A great variability is commonly observed in plasmatic concentrations of a given drug in response to the same dosing regimen in different subjects. This can be due notably to variations in the efficiency of metabolism of drugs within each patient. Despite this, it is noteworthy that during the clinical trial patients have been exposed to plasmatic concentrations of drugs of the same order of magnitude as the concentrations of baclofen and acamprosate that have been shown to simultaneously protect neurons from death and protect synaptic and endothelial functions (Table 9).
  • TABLE 9
    Baclofen Acamprosate**
    (ng/ml) (ng/ml)
    In vitro ranges for a simultaneous 17.1-213.7 0.058-0.725
    protection of neurons, synaptic and
    endothelial functions (FIG. 23)
    Plasmatic ranges observed in patients 57.6-261.4 0.58-1.20
    after one month of treatment*
    *The lower value corresponds to the mean concentration observed in patients through clinical trial after one month of treatment on an empty stomach, just before administration of the composition; the higher value corresponds to the mean concentration of the drugs observed at Tmax.
    **Acamprosate calcium
    • D. Treatment of Age-Associated Memory Impairment.
  • Memory is known as one of the earliest cognitive functions to decline through the aging process in humans and rodents [67, 68].
  • Inventors have evaluated the efficacy of the compositions of the invention in treating AD-related diseases such as age-associated memory impairment. Working memory performances were evaluated through the T-maze alternation test in treated and non-treated animals (roughly the same test as spontaneous alternation in part I.B)1)a)).
    • Animals—Treatment
  • 24-month-old C57L/6J male mice were used. Mice were held on a reversed light cycle. Each experiment was performed between 8 am and 3 pm and, therefore, under red light conditions.
  • Mice were administered by gavage, twice daily with either the combination of the invention (acamprosate 0.2 mg/kg+baclofen 3 mg/kg) or the vehicle solution all along the experiment. Working memory performances of treated and non-treated animals were assayed 17 weeks and 29 weeks after the beginning of the treatment.
  • On the day of the test, animals were treated 2 hours before the test.
    • Experimental Procedure
  • The T-maze apparatus is made of gray Plexiglas with a main stem (55 cm long×10 cm wide×20 cm high) and two arms (30 cm long×10 cm wide×20 cm high) positioned at a 90-degree angle relative to the main stem. A start box (15 cm long×10 cm wide) is separated from the main stem by a sliding door. Sliding doors are also provided to close specific arms during the forced-choice alternation task.
  • The experimental protocol consists of one single session, which starts with 1 “forced-choice” trial, followed by 14 “free-choice” trials. In the first “forced-choice” trial, the animal is confined 5 s in the start arm and then released while either the left or right goal arm is blocked by closing the sliding door. Then the animal explores the open arm and returns to the start arm. At this point, the animal has completed the forced-choice trial. Immediately after the return of the animal to the start position, the left or right goal door is opened and the animal is allowed to freely choose between the left and right goal arm (“free choice” trials). Each time that the animal has chosen a goal arm, the opposite arm is closed in order to oblige the animal to return to the start arm. Once the animal returns to the start arm, all goal doors are opened to allow another round of free choice trial begins. The animal is considered as entered in a choice arm when it places its four paws in the arm. A session is terminated and the animal is removed from the maze as soon as 14 free-choice trials have been performed or 15 min have elapsed, whatever event occurs first.
  • The apparatus was cleaned between each animal using alcohol (70°). Urine and feces were removed from the maze.
  • During the trials, animal handling and the visibility of the operator were minimized as much as possible.
    • Calculation and Statistical Analysis
  • The percent spontaneous alternation was calculated as the number of spontaneous alternations divided by the number of free-choice trials. An alternation is defined as a succession of 2 different arms over consecutive choices (e.g., the sequence right-left-right represents 2 alternations).
  • Analysis of variance (ANOVA) was performed on the results. Dunnett's test was applied to determine significance of differences.
    • Results
  • As shown in FIG. 28, composition of the invention significantly improved (by more than 50%) memory of aged mice as soon as 17 weeks after the beginning of the treatment. A significant improvement is also observed after 29 weeks of treatment (not shown).
  • Hence compositions of the invention are also efficient in counteracting AD-related disorders such as age-associated memory impairment.
  • II. Treatment of Diseases Related to Glutamate Toxicity
  • A. Prevention of Glutamate Toxicity on Neuronal Cells In Vitro
  • In this further set of experiments, candidate compounds have been tested for their ability to prevent or reduce the toxic effects of glutamate toxicity on neuronal cells. Glutamate toxicity is involved in the pathogenesis of neurological diseases or disorders such as multiple sclerosis, Alzheimer's Disease, frontotemporal dementia, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, Parkinson's Disease, Huntington's Disease, neuropathies, alcoholism or alcohol withdrawal, or spinal cord injury. The drugs are first tested individually, followed by assays for their combinatorial action.
    • Methods
  • The efficacy of drug combinations of the invention is assessed on primary cortical neuron cells. The protocol which is used in these assays is the same as described in section I.A.2 above.
    • Glutamate Toxicity Assays
  • The neuroprotective effect of compounds is assessed by quantification of the neurite network (neurofilament immunostaining (NF), which specifically reveals the glutamatergic neurons).
  • After 12 days of neuron culture, drugs of the candidate combinations are solved in culture medium (+0.1% DMSO). Candidate combinations are then pre-incubated with neurons for 1 hour before the glutamate injury. One hour after incubation, glutamate is added for 20 min, to a final concentration of 40 μM, in the presence of the candidate combinations, in order to avoid further drug dilutions. At the end of the incubation, the medium is changed with medium with the candidate combination but without glutamate. The culture is fixed 24 hours after glutamate injury MK801 (Dizocilpinehydrogen maleate, 77086-22-7-20 μM) is used as a positive control.
  • After permeabilization with saponin (Sigma), cells are blocked for 2 h with PBS containing 10% goat serum, then the cells are incubated with mouse monoclonal primary antibody against neurofilament antibody (NF, Sigma). This antibody is revealed with Alexa Fluor 488 goat anti-mouse IgG.
  • Nuclei of cells are labeled by a fluorescent marker (Hoechst solution, SIGMA), and neurite network quantified. Six wells per condition are used to assess neuronal survival in 3 different cultures.
    • Results
  • The combination of baclofen-acamprosate gives a protective effect against glutamate toxicity for cortical neuronal cells. As exemplified in FIG. 15, combinations of the invention strongly protect neurons from glutamate toxicity under the experimental conditions described above. It is noteworthy that an effective protection is noticed using drug concentrations at which the drugs used alone have a lower protective effect. Combination of baclofen and acamprosate induces an improvement of more than 200% compared to acamprosate alone and more than 47% compared to baclofen alone.
  • B. Improvement of Other Disorders Related to Glutamate Excitoxicity Using Combinations of the Invention
  • The above-mentioned in vitro protective effect against glutamate toxicity of drugs and drug combinations of the invention, combined with the protective effects exemplified herein in several AD models, prompted the inventors to test these drugs and combinations in some models of other diseases in the pathogenesis of which glutamate toxicity is also involved, such as MS, ALS and neuropathic pain.
  • 1. Protective Effect of Combinations in an In Vivo Model of Multiple Sclerosis.
  • A model in which myelin-oligodendrocyte glycoprotein-immunized (MOG-immunized) mice develop chronic progressive EAE is used to demonstrate the beneficial effect of compositions of the invention in multiple sclerosis treatment.
    • Animals and Chemicals
  • C57L/6J female mice (8 weeks old) are purchased from Janvier (France); after two weeks of habituation, female mice (10 weeks old) develop chronic paralysis after immunization with MOG (Myelin Oligodendrocyte Glycoprotein) peptide. The experimental encephalomyelitis is induced with the Hooke Kit MOG35-55/CFA Emulsion PTX (Pertussis toxin) for EAE Induction (EK-0110, EK-0115; Hooke Laboratories). The control kit is CK-0115 (Hooke Laboratories).
    • Experimental Procedure
  • Experimental encephalomyelitis is induced by following procedure:
  • On day 0, two subcutaneous injections of 0.1 ml each are performed: one in the upper back of the mouse and one in the lower back. Each injection contains 100 μg of MOG35-55 peptide (MEVGWYRSPFSRVVHLYRNGK, SEQ ID NO:1), 200 μg of inactivated Mycobacterium tuberculosis H37Ra and is emulsified in Complete Freund's Adjuvant (CFA) (Hooke Laboratories). The emulsion provides antigen needed to expand and differentiate MOG-specific autoimmune T cells.
  • Two intraperitoneal injections of 500 ng of pertussis toxin in PBS (Hooke kit) are performed 2 hours (Day 0) and 24 hours (Day 1) after the MOG injection. Pertussis toxin enhances EAE development by providing additional adjuvant.
  • Mice develop EAE 8 days after immunization and stay chronically paralyzed for the duration of the experiment. After the immunization, mice are daily observed for clinical symptoms in a blind procedure. Animals are kept in a conventional pathogen-free facility and all experiments are carried out in accordance with guidelines prescribed by, and are approved by, the standing local committee of bioethics.
    • Experimental Groups and Drug Treatment:
  • Groups of female mice as disclosed are homogenized by weight before the immunization:
      • Control group: vehicle injection in the same conditions of EAE mice (from Day −1 to Day 28, placebo is given daily),
      • EAE group: MOG injection (Day 0)+pertussis toxin injections (Day 0 and 1)−from Day −1 to Day 28, placebo is given orally daily,
      • EAE+positive control: MOG injection (Day 0)+pertussis toxin injections (Day 0 and 1)−from Day −1 to Day 28, dexamethazone is given orally daily, and
      • EAE+treatment group: MOG injection (Day 0)+pertussis toxin injections (Day 0 and 1). The treatments start one day before immunization and last until Day 28.
  • Treatments are applied into two divided doses (i.e., bid).
  • The clinical scores are measured at Days 0-5-8-9-12-14-16-19-21-23-26-28.
  • Statistical software (Statsoft Inc) is utilized throughout for statistical analysis. ANOVA analysis and Student's t-test are employed to analyse clinical disease score. P<0.05 is considered significant.
  • Delays of disease occurrence, clinical score and delay of death have been compared between each group to the reference “immu” group with Kaplan-Meier curves and a Cox model (R package “survival”). Resulting p-values are unilateral and test the hypothesis to be better than the reference “immu” group.
  • The total clinical score is composed of the tail score, the hind limb score, the fore limb score and the bladder score described as below:
    • Tail Score:
  • Score = 0 A normal mouse holds its tail erect when moving.
    Score = 1 If the extremity of the tail is flaccid with a tendency to fall.
    Score = 2 If the tail is completely flaccid and drags on the table.
    • Hind Limbs Score:
  • Score = 0 A normal mouse has an energetic walk and doesn't drag its paws
    Score = 1 Either one of the following tests is positive:
    A - Flip test: while holding the tail between thumb and index finger, flip the
    animal on its back and observe the time it takes to right itself. A healthy mouse
    will turn itself immediately. A delay suggests hind-limb weakness.
    B - Place the mouse on the wire cage top and observe as it crosses from one side
    to the other. If one or both limbs frequently slip between the bars we consider that
    there is a partial paralysis.
    Score = 2 Both previous tests are positive.
    Score = 3 One or both hind limbs show signs of paralysis but some movements are
    preserved; for example: the animal can grasp and hold on to the underside of the
    wire cage top for a short moment before letting go.
    Score = 4 When both hind legs are paralyzed and the mouse drags them when moving.
    • Fore Limbs Score:
  • Score = 0 A normal mouse uses its front paws actively for grasping and walking and holds
    its head erect.
    Score = 1 Walking is possible but difficult due to a weakness in one or both of the paws, for
    example, the front paws are considered weak when the mouse has difficulty
    grasping the underside of the wire top cage. Another sign of weakness is head
    drooping.
    Score = 2 When one forelimb is paralyzed (impossibility to grasp and the mouse turns
    around the paralyzed limb). At this time the head has also lost much of its muscle
    tone.
    Score = 3 Mouse cannot move, and food and water are unattainable.
    • Bladder Score:
  • Score = 0 A normal mouse has full control of its bladder.
    Score = 1 A mouse is considered incontinent when its
    lower body is soaked with urine.
  • The global score for each animal is determined by the addition of all the above mentioned categories. The maximum score for live animals is 10.
    • Results: Combination Therapies are Efficient in a MS Model
  • A significant improvement of global clinical score is observed in “EAE+treatment group” mice for the baclofen and acamprosate combination.
  • The combination of baclofen (30 mg/kg/day) and acamprosate (2 mg/kg/day) induced a significant protective effect against the development of chronic progressive EAE and hence confirmed the beneficial effect of the composition in multiple sclerosis treatment (FIG. 18). With more than 30% reduction of the symptoms, the results clearly show that the combination induces a significant reduction of disease development from Day 13. This result confirms the remarkable positive effect of the baclofen-acamprosate combination on neuronal protection including demyelination and its implications.
  • Taken together, these results show that this combination enables effective protection of neurons against many stresses involved in the development of neurological disease such as β amyloid, BBB breakdown, glutamate excitotoxicity or demyelination.
  • 2) Protective Effects of Combinations in Models of ALS.
  • The effect of combination therapies according to the present invention on ALS have been demonstrated in vitro, in a co-culture model, and in vivo, in a mouse model of ALS. Protocols and results are presented in this section.
  • a) Protective Effect Against Glutamate Toxicity in Primary Cultures of Nerve-Muscle Co-Culture
    • Primary Cocultures of Nerve and Muscle Cells
  • Human muscle is prepared according to a previously described method from portions of a biopsy of a healthy patient [69]. Muscle cells are established from dissociated cells (10,000 cells per well), plated in gelatin-coated 0.1% on 48-well plates and grown in a proliferating medium consisting of a mix of MEM medium and M199 medium.
  • Immediately after satellite cell fusion, whole transverse slices of 13-day-old rat Wistar embryos' spinal cords with dorsal root ganglia (DRG) attached are placed on the muscle monolayer, 1 explant per well (in center area). DRG are necessary to achieve a good ratio of innervations. Innervated cultures are maintained in mixed medium. After 24 h in the usual co-culture, neuritis are observed growing out of the spinal cord explants. They make contacts with myotubes and induce the first contractions after 8 days. Quickly thereafter, innervated muscle fibres located in proximity to the spinal cord explants are virtually continuously contracting. Innervated fibres are morphologically and spatially distinct from the non-innervated ones and could easily be distinguished from them.
  • One co-culture is done (6 wells per condition).
    • Glutamate Injury
  • On day 27, co-cultures are incubated with candidate compounds or Riluzole one hour before glutamate intoxication (60 μM) for 20 min. Then, co-cultures are washed and candidate compounds or Riluzole are added for an additional 48 h. After this incubation time, unfixed cocultures are incubated with α-bungarotoxin coupled with Alexa 488 at a concentration of 500 nmol/L for 15 min at room temperature. Then, co-cultures are fixed by PFA for 20 min at room temperature. After permeabilization with 0.1% of saponin, co-cultures are incubated with anti-neurofilament antibody (NF).
  • These antibodies are detected with Alexa Fluor 568 goat anti-mouse IgG (Molecular Probes). Nuclei of neurons are labeled by a fluorescent marker (Hoechst solution).
  • Endpoints are (1) Total neurite length, (2) Number of motor units, and (3) Total motor unit area, which are indicative of motor neuron survival and functionality.
  • For each condition, 2×10 pictures per well are taken using InCell Analyzer™1000 (GE Healthcare) with 20× magnification. All the images are taken in the same conditions.
    • Results
  • The baclofen and acamprosate combination effectively protects motor neurons and motor units in the coculture model.
  • b) Combination Therapies are Efficient in ALS Mouse Model
  • Experiments are performed on male mice. Transgenic male B6SJL-Tg(SOD1)2Gur/J mice and their control (respectively SN2726 and SN2297 from Jackson Laboratories, Ben Harbor, USA, distributed by Charles River in France) are chosen in this set of experiments to mimic ALS.
  • Diseased mice express the SOD1-G93A transgene, designed with a mutant human SOD1 gene (a single amino acid substitution of glycine to alanine at codon 93) driven by its endogenous human SOD1 promoter. Control mice express the control human SOD1 gene.
    • Randomisation of the Animals
  • The group assignation and the randomisation of the animals are based on body weight; for each group, the randomisation is done one day before the first treatment
    • Drug Administration
  • Mice are dosed with candidate drug treatment diluted in a vehicle from the 60th day after birth till death. Diluted solutions of drug candidates are prepared with water at room temperature just before the beginning of the administration.
  • In Drinking Water:
  • Riluzole is added in drinking water at a final concentration of 6 mg/ml (adjusted to each group's mean body weight) in 5% cyclodextrin. As a mouse drinks about 5 ml/day, the estimated administrated dose is 30 mg/kg/day, which is a dose that was shown to increase the survival of mice.
  • Cyclodextrin is used as vehicle at the final concentration of 5%, diluted in water at room temperature from stock solution (cyclodextrin 20%).
  • Oral Administration (Per Os):
      • Drug combinations are administrated per os, daily.
      • Cyclodextrin is used as a vehicle at the final concentration of 5%, diluted in water at room temperature from stock solution (cyclodextrin 20%).
    Clinical Observation
  • The clinical observation of each mouse is performed daily, from the first day of treatment (60 days of age) until death (or sacrifice). Clinical observation consists of studying behavioural tests: onset of paralysis, “loss of splay”, “loss of righting reflex”, and general gait observation:
      • Onset of paralysis: The observation consists of paralysis observation of each limb. Onset of paralysis corresponds to the day of the first signs of paralysis.
      • The loss of splay test consists of tremors or shaking notification and the position of hind limb (hanging or splaying out) when the mouse is suspended by the tail.
      • The loss of righting reflex test evaluates the ability of the mouse to right itself within 30 sec of being turned on either side. The righting reflex is lost when the mouse is unable to right itself. The loss of righting reflex determines the end stage of disease, the mouse unable to right itself is euthanized.
    Results: Combination Therapies are Efficient in ALS In Vivo Model
  • An improvement of the disease is observed for the diseased animals treated with for the baclofen and acamprosate combination.
  • 3. Protective Effect of Combinations in Oxaliplatin-Induced Neuropathy as an In Vivo Model for Neuropathic Pain.
  • Combinatorial therapies of the present invention are tested in vivo, in suitable models of peripheral neuropathy, i.e., an acute model of oxaliplatin-induced neuropathy and a chronic model of oxaliplatin-induced neuropathy. The animals, protocols and results are presented in this section.
    • Animal Husbandry
  • Sprague-Dawley rats (CERJ, France), weighing 150-175 g at the beginning of the experiment of the oxaliplatin treatment (Do) are used. Animals are housed in a limited access animal facility in a temperature (19.5° C.-24.5° C.) and relative humidity (45%-65%) controlled room with a 12 h-light/dark cycle, with ad libitum access to standard pelleted laboratory chow and water throughout the study. Animals are housed 4 or 5 per cage and a one week-acclimation period is observed before any testing.
    • Experimental Design
  • Five following groups of rats are used in all experiments:
    • Control Groups:
  • Group 1: vehicle of oxaliplatin (distilled water), i.p./Vehicle of candidate combination(s) (distilled water), p.o. daily.
  • Group 2: oxaliplatin (distilled water), i.p./Vehicle of candidate combination(s) (distilled water), p.o. daily.
  • Group 3: oxaliplatin 3 mg/kg i.p./single drug in distilled water, p.o. daily×9.
    • Tested Composition Groups:
  • Group 4: oxaliplatin 3 mg/kg i.p./candidate combination(s) in distilled water, p.o. daily×9.
  • Group 5: oxaliplatin 3 mg/kg i.p./gabapentin (100 mg/kg) in distilled water, p.o. on testing days (i.e. D1 & D8).
  • Vehicle and test items are delivered daily from D−1 to D7 (the day before the last testing day) whereas gabapentin is administered on testing days (120 minutes before the test).
  • All treatments are administered in a coded and random order when possible. Doses are expressed in terms of free active substance.
    • Neuropathy Induction
  • Acute neuropathy is induced by a single intraperitoneal injection of oxaliplatin (3 mg/kg).
  • Chronic peripheral neuropathy is induced by repeated intraperitoneal injections of oxaliplatin (3 mg/kg, i.p.) on days 0, 2, 4 and 7 (CD=12 mg/kg, i.p.). Chronic neuropathy in humans is cumulative as well and is most commonly seen in patients who have received total doses of oxaliplatin > or =540 mg/m2 which corresponds to ˜15 mg/kg as a cumulative dose in rats [70].
  • The oxaliplatin-induced painful neuropathy in rat reproduces the pain symptoms in oxaliplatin-treated patients:
      • The thermal hyperalgesia is the earliest symptom. It can be measured with the acetone test or with the tail-immersion test.
      • The mechanical hyperalgesia appears later. It can be quantified with the Von Frey test or the paw pressure test.
    Animal Dosing and Testing
  • All drug combinations are administered from the day before the first intraperitoneal injection of oxaliplatin 3 mg/kg (D−1) and pursued daily orally until D7. During the testing days (i.e., D1 and D7), the drug combinations are administered after the test. Animals from the reference-treated group (gabapentin) are dosed only during the testing days.
    • Acetone Test
  • Cold allodynia is assessed using the acetone test by measuring the responses to thermal non-nociceptive stimulation on D1 (around 24 h after the first injection of oxaliplatin 3 mg/kg (acute effect of oxaliplatin), and D8 (chronic effect of oxaliplatin).
  • In the acetone test, latency of hindpaw withdrawal is measured after application of a drop of acetone to the plantar surface of both hindpaws (reaction time) and the intensity of the response is scored (cold score). Reaction time to the cooling effect of acetone is measured within 20 sec (cut-off) after acetone application. Responses to acetone are also graded by the following 4-point scale: 0 (no response); 1 (quick withdrawal, flick of the paw); 2 (prolonged withdrawal or marked flicking of the paw); 3 (repeated flicking of the paw with licking or biting).
  • For each experimental group, results are expressed as:
      • The reaction time, defined as the time expressed in sec required to elicit paw reaction (mean of 6 measures for each rat together t SEM).
      • The cumulative cold score, defined as the sum of the 6 scores for each rat together±SEM. The minimum score is 0 (no response to any of the 6 trials) and the maximum possible score is 18 (repeated flicking and licking or biting of paws on each of the six trials).
    Statistical Analyses
  • Student test, unilateral, type 3 is performed. The significance level is set as p<0.05; all the groups are compared to the diseased+vehicle group (oxaliplatin-treated group). Means and standard error means are shown on the figures.
    • Results
  • Oxaliplatin induced a significant decrease in reaction time of paw withdrawal after acetone application (diseased group+vehicle) during the time course. This decrease is progressive and significant from Day 1 (acute model of oxaliplatin-induced neuropathy) to Day 8 (chronic model) as compared to the vehicle group.
  • Anti-allodynic effect in acute model and chronic model of oxaliplatin-induced neuropathy: the baclofen and acamprosate combination is tested in both models of oxaliplatin-induced neuropathy. It induces a significant decrease in the cumulative cold score and a significant increase in reaction time as compared to the oxaliplatin-vehicle treated group. In conclusion, this drug combination protects from chronic and acute neuropathy.
    • REFERENCES
    • 1 Crook R, Verkkoniemi A, Perez-Tur J, Mehta N, Baker M, Houlden H, Farrer M, Hutton M, Lincoln S, Hardy J, Gwinn K, Somer M, Pactau A, Kalimo H, Ylikoski R, Poyhonen M, Kucera S & Haltia M (1998) A variant of Alzheimer's disease with spastic paraparesis and unusual plaques due to deletion of exon 9 of presenilin 1. Nat. Med. 4, 452-5
    • 2 Houlden H, Baker M, McGowan E, Lewis P, Hutton M, Crook R, Wood N W, Kumar-Singh S, Geddes J, Swash M, Scaravilli F, Holton J L, Lashley T, Tomita T, Hashimoto T, Verkkoniemi A, Kalimo H, Somer M, Paetau A, Martin J J, Van Broeckhoven C, Golde T, Hardy J, Haltia M & Revesz T (2000) Variant Alzheimer's disease with spastic paraparesis and cotton wool plaques is caused by PS-1 mutations that lead to exceptionally high amyloid-beta concentrations. Ann. Neurol. 48, 806-8.
    • 3 Kwok J B, Taddei K, Hallupp M, Fisher C, Brooks W S, Broe G A, Hardy J, Fulham M J, Nicholson G A, Stell R, St George Hyslop P H, Fraser P E, Kakulas B, Clarnette R, Relkin N, Gandy S E, Schofield P R & Martins R N (1997) Two novel (M233T and R278T) presenilin-1 mutations in early-onset Alzheimer's disease pedigrees and preliminary evidence for association of presenilin-1 mutations with a novel phenotype. Neuroreport 8, 1537-42.
    • 4 Verkkoniemi A, Kalimo H, Paetau A, Somer M, Iwatsubo T, Hardy J & Haltia M (2001) Variant Alzheimer disease with spastic paraparesis: neuropathological phenotype. J. Neuropathol. Exp. Neurol. 60, 483-92.
    • 5 Citron M (2004) Strategies for disease modification in Alzheimer's disease. Nat. Rev. Neurosci. 5, 677-85.
    • 6 Suh Y-H & Checler F (2002) Amyloid precursor protein, presenilins, and alpha-synuclein: molecular pathogenesis and pharmacological applications in Alzheimer's disease. Pharmacol. Rev. 54, 469-525.
    • 7 Blacker D, Albert M S, Bassett S S, Go R C, Harrell L E & Folstein M F (1994) Reliability and validity of NINCDS-ADRDA criteria for Alzheimer's disease. The National Institute of Mental Health Genetics Initiative. Arch. Neurol. 51, 1198-204.
    • 8 Rossor M N, Fox N C, Freeborough P A & Harvey R J (1996) Clinical features of sporadic and familial Alzheimer's disease. Neurodegeneration 5, 393-7.
    • 9 Glenner G G, Wong C W, Quaranta V & Eanes E D (1984) The amyloid deposits in Alzheimer's disease: their nature and pathogenesis. Appl. Pathol. 2, 357-69.
    • 10 Ballatore C, Lee V M-Y & Trojanowski J Q (2007) Tau-mediated neurodegeneration in Alzheimer's disease and related disorders. Nat. Rev. Neurosci. 8, 663-72.
    • 11 DiLuca M, Bell K F S & Claudio Cuello A (2006) Altered synaptic function in Alzheimer's disease. Eur. J. Pharmacol. 545, 11-21.
    • 12 Hardy J A & Higgins G A (1992) Alzheimer's disease: the amyloid cascade hypothesis. Science 256, 184-5.
    • 13 Braak H & Braak E (1991) Neuropathological staging of Alzheimer-related changes. Acta Neuropathol. 82, 239-59.
    • 14 Golde T E (2005) The Abeta hypothesis: leading us to rationally-designed therapeutic strategies for the treatment or prevention of Alzheimer disease. Brain Pathol. 15, 84-7.
    • 15 Hardy J & Selkoe D J (2002) The amyloid hypothesis of Alzheimer's disease: progress and problems on the road to therapeutics. Science 297, 353-6.
    • 16 Selkoe D J (2000) The genetics and molecular pathology of Alzheimer's disease: roles of amyloid and the presenilins. Neurol. Clin. 18, 903-22.
    • 17 Zlokovic B V (2008) The blood-brain barrier in health and chronic neurodegenerative disorders. Neuron 57, 178-201.
    • 18 Budd Haeberlein S L & Lipton S A (2009) Excitotoxicity in neurodegenerative disease. In Encyclopedia of neuroscience (Squire L R, ed), pp. 77-86. Elsevier.
    • 19 Hughes J R (2009) Alcohol withdrawal seizures. Epilepsy Rehav. 15, 92-7.
    • 20 Kim A H, Kerchner G A & Choi D W (2002) CNS Neuroprotection (F. W. Marcoux and D. W. Choi, eds.) Springer Berlin Heidelberg, Berlin, Heidelberg.
    • 21 Hama A & Sagen J (2011) Antinociceptive effect of riluzole in rats with neuropathic spinal cord injury pain. J. Neurotraunma 28, 127-34.
    • 22 McGleenon B M, Dynan K B & Passmore Aβ (1999) Acetylcholinesterase inhibitors in Alzheimer's disease. Br. J. Clin. Pharmacol. 48, 471-480.
    • 23 Parsons C G, Danysz W & Quack G (1999) Memantine is a clinically well tolerated N-methyl-D-aspartate (NMDA) receptor antagonist—a review of preclinical data. Neuropharmacology 38, 735-67.
    • 24 Malgouris C, Bardot F, Daniel M, Pellis F, Rataud J, Uzan A, Blanchard J C & Laduron P M (1989) Riluzole, a novel antiglutamate, prevents memory loss and hippocampal neuronal damage in ischemic gerbils. J. Neurosci. 9, 3720-7.
    • 25 Wahl F, Allix M. Plotkine M & Boulu R G (1993) Effect of riluzole on focal cerebral ischemia in rats. Eur. J. Pharmacol. 230, 209-14.
    • 26 Wahl F, Renou E, Mary V & Stutzmann J M (1997) Riluzole reduces brain lesions and improves neurological function in rats after a traumatic brain injury. Brain Res. 756, 247-55.
    • 27 Ettmayer P, Amidon G L, Clement B & Testa B (2004) Lessons learned from marketed and investigational prodrugs. J. Med Chem. 47, 2393-404.
    • 28 Beaumont K, Webster R, Gardner I & Dack K (2003) Design of ester prodrugs to enhance oral absorption of poorly permeable compounds: challenges to the discovery scientist. Curr. Drug Metab. 4, 461-85.
    • 29 Heimbach T, Oh D M, Li L Y, Rodriguez-Hornedo N, Garcia G & Fleisher D (2003) Enzyme-mediated precipitation of parent drugs from their phosphate prodrugs. Int. J. Pharm. 261, 81-92.
    • 30 Yang C Y, Dantzig A H & Pidgeon C (1999) Intestinal peptide transport systems and oral drug availability. Pharm. Res. 16, 1331-43.
    • 31 Steffansen B, Nielsen C U, Brodin B, Eriksson A H, Andersen R & Frokjaer S (2004) Intestinal solute carriers: an overview of trends and strategies for improving oral drug absorption. Eur. J. Pharm. Sci. 21, 3-16.
    • 32 Stella V J (2007) Prodrugs: challenges and rewards. (A. Press and Springer, eds.) Springer Singapore Pte. Limited, New York.
    • 33 Wermuth C G (2003) Designing prodrugs and bioprecusrors. In The Practice of Medicinal Chemistry (Hardbound, ed), 2nd ed, pp. 561-585 Academic Press.
    • 34 Pezron I, Mitra A K, Duvvuri S & Tirucherai G S (2002) Prodrug strategies in nasal drug delivery. Expert Opin. Ther. Pat. 12, 331-340.
    • 35 Stella V J (2004) Prodrugs as therapeutics. Expert Opin. Ther. Pat. 14, 277-280.
    • 36 Stella V J & Nti-Addae K W (2007) Prodrug strategies to overcome poor water solubility. Adv. Drug Deliv. Rev. 59, 677-94.
    • 37 Higuchi T & Stella V J (1975) Pro-drugs as Novel Drug Delivery System, ACS Sympos American Chemical Society, Washington, D.C.
    • 38 Roche E B (1977) Design of biopharmaceutical properties through prodrugs and analogs: a symposium, American P The Academy, Washington, D.C.
    • 39 Lal R, Sukbuntherng J, Tai E H L, Upadhyay S, Yao F, Warren M S, Luo W, Bu L, Nguyen S, Zamora J, Peng G, Dias T, Bao Y, Ludwikow M, Phan T, Scheuerman R A, Yan H, Gao M, Wu Q Q, Annamalai T, Raillard S P, Koller K, Gallop M A & Cundy K C (2009) Arbaclofen placarbil, a novel R-baclofen prodrug: improved absorption, distribution, metabolism, and elimination properties compared with R-baclofen. J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 330, 911-21.
    • 40 Xu F, Peng G, Phan T, Dilip U, Chen J L, Chernov-Rogan T, Zhang X, Grindstaff K, Annamalai T, Koller K, Gallop M A & Wustrow D J (2011) Discovery of a novel potent GABA(B) receptor agonist. Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. 21, 6582-5.
    • 41 Leach A R & Gillet V J An Introduction to Chemoinformatics (Springer-Verlag New York Inc, ed.).
    • 42 Rahman S A, Bashton M, Holliday G L, Schrader R & Thornton J M (2009) Small Molecule Subgraph Detector (SMSD) toolkit. J. Cheminform. 1, 12.
    • 43 Stahl H & Wermuth C G (2011) Pharmaceutical salts: Properties, selection, and use. 2nd ed (Wiley-VCH, ed.).
    • 44 Hanafi R, Mosad S, Abouzid K, Niess R & Spahn-Langguth H (2011) Baclofen ester and carbamate prodrug candidates: a simultaneous chromatographic assay, resolution optimized with DryLab. J. Pharm. Biomed. Anal. 56, 569-76.
    • 45 Raboisson P, Breitholtz-Emanuelsson A, Dahllöf H, Edwards L, Heaton W L, Isaac M, Jarvie K, Kers A, Minidis A B E, Nordmark A, Sheehan S M, Slassi A, Ström P, Terelius Y, Wensbo D, Wilson J M, Xin T & McLeod D A (2012) Discovery and characterization of AZD9272 and AZD6538-Two novel mGluR5 negative allosteric modulators selected for clinical development. Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. 22, 6974-9.
    • 46 Suzuki G, Kimura T, Satow A, Kaneko N, Fukuda J, Hikichi H, Sakai N, Maehara S, Kawagoe-Takaki H, Hata M, Azuma T, Ito S, Kawamoto H & Ohta H (2007) Pharmacological characterization of a new, orally active and potent allosteric metabotropic glutamate receptor 1 antagonist, 4-[1-(2-fluoropyridin-3-yl)-5-methyl-1H-1,2,3-triazol-4-yl]-N-isopropyl-N-methyl-3,6-dihydropyridine-1 (2H)-carboxamide (FTIDC). J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 321, 1144-53.
    • 47 Kohara A, Nagakura Y, Kiso T, Toya T, Watabiki T, Tamura S, Shitaka Y, Itahana H & Okada M (2007) Antinociceptive profile of a selective metabotropic glutamate receptor 1 antagonist YM-230888 in chronic pain rodent models. Eur. J. Pharmacol. 571, 8-16.
    • 48 Dekundy A, Gravius A, Hechenberger M, Pietraszek M, Nagel J, Tober C, van der Elst M, Mela F, Parsons C G & Danysz W (2011) Pharmacological characterization of MRZ-8676, a novel negative allosteric modulator of subtype 5 metabotropic glutamate receptors (mGluR5): focus on L: -DOPA-induced dyskinesia. J. Neural Transm. 118, 1703-16.
    • 49 Goeldner C, Ballard T M, Knoflach F, Wichmann J, Gatti S & Umbricht D (2013) Cognitive impairment in major depression and the mGlu2 receptor as a therapeutic target. Neuropharmacology 64, 337-46.
    • 50 Jaeschke G, Wettstein J G, Nordquist R E & Spooren W (2008) mGlu5 receptor antagonists and their therapeutic potential. Expert Opin. Ther. Pat. 18, 123-142.
    • 51 Carroll F1 (2008) Antagonists at metabotropic glutamate receptor subtype 5: structure activity relationships and therapeutic potential for addiction. Ann. N.Y. Acad Sci. 1141, 221-32.
    • 52 Emmitte K A (2013) mGlu5 negative allosteric modulators: a patent review (2010-2012). Expert Opin. Ther. Pat. 23, 393-408.
    • 53 Froestl W, Muhs A & Pfeifer A (2012) Cognitive enhancers (nootropics). Part 1: drugs interacting with receptors. J. Alzheimers. Dis. 32, 793-887.
    • 54 Hemstapat K, Da Costa H, Nong Y, Brady A E, Luo Q, Niswender C M, Tamagnan G D & Conn P J (2007) A novel family of potent negative allosteric modulators of group II metabotropic glutamate receptors. J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 322, 254-64.
    • 55 Maksay G, Nemes P, Vincze Z & Biró T (2008) Synthesis of (nor)tropeine (di)esters and allosteric modulation of glycine receptor binding. Bioorg. Med. Chem. 16, 2086-92.
    • 56 Yevenes G E & Zeilhofer H U (2011) Allosteric modulation of glycine receptors. Br. J. Pharmacol. 164, 224-36.
    • 57 Paris D, Ait-Ghezala G, Mathura V S. Patel N, Quadros A, Laporte V & Mullan M (2005) Anti-angiogenic activity of the mutant Dutch A(beta) peptide on human brain microvascular endothelial cells. Brain Res. Mol. Brain Res. 136, 212-30.
    • 58 Singer C A, Figueroa-Masot X A, Batchelor R H & Dorsa D M (1999) The mitogen-activated protein kinase pathway mediates estrogen neuroprotection after glutamate toxicity in primary cortical neurons. J. Neurosci. 19, 2455-63.
    • 59 Harrison N L (1990) On the presynaptic action of baclofen at inhibitory synapses between cultured rat hippocampal neurones. J. Physiol. 422, 433-46.
    • 60 LOEWE S (1953) The problem of synergism and antagonism of combined drugs Arzneimittelforschung. 3, 285-90.
    • 61 Grabovsky Y & Tallarida R J (2004) Isobolographic analysis for combinations of a full and partial agonist: curved isoboles. J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 310, 981-6.
    • 62 BLISS C I (1939) THE TOXICITY OF POISONS APPLIED JOINTLY 1. Ann. Appl. Biol. 26, 585-615.
    • 63 Meunier J, Ieni J & Maurice T (2006) The anti-amnesic and neuroprotective effects of donepezil against amyloid beta25-35 peptide-induced toxicity in mice involve an interaction with the sigma1 receptor. Br. J. Pharmacol. 149, 998-1012.
    • 64 Snyder P J, Bednar M M, Cromer J R & Maruff P (2005) Reversal of scopolamine-induced deficits with a single dose of donepezil, an acetylcholinesterase inhibitor. Alzheimers. Dement. 1, 126-35.
    • 65 Folstein M F, Folstein S E & McHugh P R (1975) “Mini-mental state”. A practical method for grading the cognitive state of patients for the clinician. J. Psychiatr. Res. 12, 189-98.
    • 66 Gool W A van (2000) Het effect van rivastigmine bij de ziekte van Alzheimer: houdt rivastigmine het alledaagse gewoon? Geneesmiddelenbulletin 34, 17-22.
    • 67 Barnes C A Aging and the physiology of spatial memory. Neurobiol. Aging 9, 563-8.
    • 68 Dember W N & Fowler H (1958) Spontaneous alternation behavior. Psychol. Bull. 55, 412-28.
    • 69 Braun S, Croizat B, Lagrange M C, Warter J M & Poindron P (1996) Neurotrophins increase motoneurons' ability to innervate skeletal muscle fibers in rat spinal cord—human muscle cocultures. J. Neurol. Sci. 136, 17-23.
    • 70 Cersosimo R J (2005) Oxaliplatin-associated neuropathy: a review. Ann. Pharmacother. 39, 128-35.

Claims (15)

We claim:
1. A composition comprising (i) baclofen, (ii) acamprosate, and (iii) idalopirdine, or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, derivatives or prodrugs thereof.
2. The composition of claim 1, wherein the compounds are in admixture with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient.
3. The composition of claim 1, which comprises a dose of baclofen of less than 150 mg.
4. The composition of claim 1, which comprises a dose of acamprosate of less than 1000 mg.
5. The composition of claim 1, which comprises a dose between 0.4 mg and 50 mg of acamprosate and between 6 and 15 mg of baclofen.
6. The composition of claim 1, which comprises baclofen, acamprosate and idalopirdine as the only active agents.
7. The composition of claim 1, which is a solid formulation suitable for oral administration.
8. A method for treating Alzheimer in a human subject in need thereof, comprising administering to said subject and effective amount of baclofen, acamprosate and idalopirdine, or pharmaceutical acceptable salt(s) or derivative(s) thereof.
9. The method of claim 8, wherein the compounds are in admixture with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or excipient.
10. The method of claim 8, wherein baclofen, or the pharmaceutically acceptable salt or derivative thereof, is administered at a dose of less than 150 mg.
11. The method of claim 8, wherein acamprosate, or the pharmaceutically acceptable salt or derivative thereof, is administered at a dose of less than 1000 mg.
12. The method of claim 8, wherein acamprosate, or the pharmaceutically acceptable salt or derivative thereof, is administered at a dose between 0.4 mg and 50 mg, and baclofen, or the pharmaceutically acceptable salt or derivative thereof, is administered at a dose between 6 mg and 15 mg, twice daily.
13. The method of claim 8, wherein baclofen, acamprosate and idalopirdine, or the pharmaceutically acceptable salt(s) or derivative(s) thereof, are the only agents administered for treating Alzheimer disease.
14. The method of claim 8, wherein baclofen, acamprosate and idalopirdine, or the pharmaceutically acceptable salt(s) or derivative(s) thereof, are formulated or administered together, separately or sequentially.
15. The method of claim 8, wherein baclofen, acamprosate and idalopirdine, or the pharmaceutically acceptable salt(s) or derivative(s) thereof, are administered orally.
US16/694,231 2011-03-01 2019-11-25 Baclofen and acamprosate based therapy of neurological disorders Abandoned US20200085790A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US16/694,231 US20200085790A1 (en) 2011-03-01 2019-11-25 Baclofen and acamprosate based therapy of neurological disorders

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP11305217 2011-03-01
EP11305687 2011-06-06
US14/479,614 US9144558B2 (en) 2011-03-01 2014-09-08 Baclofen and acamprosate based therapy of neurological disorders
US14/861,169 US9636316B2 (en) 2011-03-01 2015-09-22 Baclofen and acamprosate based therapy of neurological disorders
US15/494,732 US20170231958A1 (en) 2011-03-01 2017-04-24 Baclofen and acamprosate based therapy of neurological disorders
US16/694,231 US20200085790A1 (en) 2011-03-01 2019-11-25 Baclofen and acamprosate based therapy of neurological disorders

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US15/494,732 Continuation US20170231958A1 (en) 2011-03-01 2017-04-24 Baclofen and acamprosate based therapy of neurological disorders

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20200085790A1 true US20200085790A1 (en) 2020-03-19

Family

ID=46758335

Family Applications (7)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US14/002,429 Active 2032-04-24 US9820978B2 (en) 2011-03-01 2012-03-01 Treatment of cerebral ischemia
US13/691,981 Active US8865769B2 (en) 2011-03-01 2012-12-03 Baclofen and acamprosate based therapy of neurological disorders
US13/706,907 Active US8741886B2 (en) 2011-03-01 2012-12-06 Baclofen and acamprosate based therapy of neurological disorders
US14/479,614 Active US9144558B2 (en) 2011-03-01 2014-09-08 Baclofen and acamprosate based therapy of neurological disorders
US14/861,169 Expired - Fee Related US9636316B2 (en) 2011-03-01 2015-09-22 Baclofen and acamprosate based therapy of neurological disorders
US15/494,732 Abandoned US20170231958A1 (en) 2011-03-01 2017-04-24 Baclofen and acamprosate based therapy of neurological disorders
US16/694,231 Abandoned US20200085790A1 (en) 2011-03-01 2019-11-25 Baclofen and acamprosate based therapy of neurological disorders

Family Applications Before (6)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US14/002,429 Active 2032-04-24 US9820978B2 (en) 2011-03-01 2012-03-01 Treatment of cerebral ischemia
US13/691,981 Active US8865769B2 (en) 2011-03-01 2012-12-03 Baclofen and acamprosate based therapy of neurological disorders
US13/706,907 Active US8741886B2 (en) 2011-03-01 2012-12-06 Baclofen and acamprosate based therapy of neurological disorders
US14/479,614 Active US9144558B2 (en) 2011-03-01 2014-09-08 Baclofen and acamprosate based therapy of neurological disorders
US14/861,169 Expired - Fee Related US9636316B2 (en) 2011-03-01 2015-09-22 Baclofen and acamprosate based therapy of neurological disorders
US15/494,732 Abandoned US20170231958A1 (en) 2011-03-01 2017-04-24 Baclofen and acamprosate based therapy of neurological disorders

Country Status (26)

Country Link
US (7) US9820978B2 (en)
EP (5) EP2796132B1 (en)
JP (2) JP5987008B2 (en)
KR (2) KR101937782B1 (en)
CN (2) CN103596562B (en)
AU (2) AU2012222351B2 (en)
BR (1) BR112013022112B1 (en)
CA (1) CA2828765C (en)
CY (3) CY1115074T1 (en)
DK (3) DK2727588T3 (en)
EA (2) EA023277B1 (en)
ES (5) ES2665569T3 (en)
HR (1) HRP20140131T1 (en)
HU (1) HUE038653T2 (en)
IL (2) IL228177B (en)
LT (2) LT2796132T (en)
MX (2) MX373746B (en)
PL (3) PL2560631T3 (en)
PT (1) PT2560631E (en)
RS (3) RS53227B (en)
SG (2) SG192968A1 (en)
SI (3) SI2727588T1 (en)
SM (3) SMT201800618T1 (en)
TR (1) TR201809351T4 (en)
WO (2) WO2012117076A2 (en)
ZA (1) ZA201306039B (en)

Families Citing this family (42)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP2065038A1 (en) 2007-11-30 2009-06-03 Pharnext New therapeutic approaches for treating Charcot-Marie-Tooth disease
EP2135607A1 (en) 2008-06-18 2009-12-23 Pharnext Combination of pilocarpin and methimazol for treating Charcot-MarieTooth disease and related disorders
EP2263665A1 (en) 2009-06-02 2010-12-22 Pharnext New compositions for treating CMT and related disorders
US9393241B2 (en) 2009-06-02 2016-07-19 Pharnext Compositions for treating CMT and related disorders
US9387206B2 (en) 2009-11-03 2016-07-12 Pharnext Therapeutic approaches for treating Alzheimer's disease
EP2322163A1 (en) 2009-11-03 2011-05-18 Pharnext New therapeutics approaches for treating alzheimer disease
US10010515B2 (en) 2011-03-01 2018-07-03 Pharnext Therapeutic approaches for treating Parkinson's disease
CN108057033A (en) * 2011-03-01 2018-05-22 法耐斯特公司 For treating the new compositions of amyotrophic lateral sclerosis
ES2665569T3 (en) 2011-03-01 2018-04-26 Pharnext Treatment of cerebral ischemia
US9867837B2 (en) 2011-03-01 2018-01-16 Pharnext Compositions for treating neurological disorders
EP2705842A1 (en) * 2012-09-05 2014-03-12 Pharnext Therapeutic approaches for treating parkinson's disease
UA115968C2 (en) * 2011-03-01 2018-01-25 Фарнекст NEW COMPOSITIONS FOR THE TREATMENT OF NEUROLOGICAL DISEASES
US9241933B2 (en) 2011-03-01 2016-01-26 Pharnext Compositions for treating amyotrophic lateral sclerosis
US9248111B2 (en) 2011-03-01 2016-02-02 Pharnext Therapeutic approaches for treating parkinson's disease
US9931326B2 (en) 2011-03-29 2018-04-03 Pharnext Composition comprising torasemide and baclofen for treating neurological disorders
GB2501457A (en) 2012-02-10 2013-10-30 Rational Intellectual Holdings Ltd Assigning player positions in an online table game
EA031331B9 (en) * 2012-03-01 2019-02-28 Фарнекст Combination of acamprosate, baclofen and riluzole for treating amyotrophic lateral sclerosis and a related disorder
AU2013224959B2 (en) * 2012-03-01 2017-12-07 Pharnext New compositions for treating amyotrophic lateral sclerosis
EP2874617B1 (en) * 2012-07-18 2019-02-27 Pharnext Baclofen and acamprosate based therapy of macular degeneration disorders
EP2705841A1 (en) 2012-09-05 2014-03-12 Pharnext Combinations of nootropic agents for treating cognitive dysfunctions
GB201300684D0 (en) 2013-01-15 2013-02-27 Apitope Int Nv Peptide
MX367210B (en) 2013-06-05 2019-08-08 Pharnext Stable oral solutions for combined api.
RU2685502C2 (en) 2013-06-19 2019-04-19 Сом Инновейшен Биотех, С.Л. Therapeutic agents for use in preventing and/or treating hyperkinetic motor disorders
KR102206745B1 (en) * 2013-07-12 2021-02-03 경상대학교산학협력단 Therapeutic agent for treating neurological disorders comprising anthocyanin and GABAB receptor agonist
US10220008B2 (en) 2013-08-14 2019-03-05 Stc.Unm Treatment and prevention of stroke and other neurological disorders
WO2015063140A1 (en) * 2013-10-30 2015-05-07 Pharnext Compositions, methods and uses for the treatment of diabetes and related conditions by controlling blood glucose level
SG11201606275WA (en) * 2014-02-11 2016-08-30 Pharnext Combination of baclofen, acamprosate and medium chain triglycerides for the treatment of neurological disorders
PT3220891T (en) * 2014-11-21 2019-10-31 Biohaven Pharm Holding Co Ltd Sublingual formulation of riluzole
IL255343B2 (en) 2015-05-04 2024-10-01 Confluence Pharmaceuticals Llc Essay formulations of acamprosate
EP3156050A1 (en) * 2015-10-16 2017-04-19 Universitat Autònoma De Barcelona New combination therapies for treating neurological damage
US11026942B2 (en) 2015-12-29 2021-06-08 Kyoto University Agent for preventing and/or treating Alzheimer's disease
CA3012900A1 (en) * 2016-02-05 2017-08-10 Pharnext Novel combinatorial therapies of neurological disorders
US10383870B2 (en) 2016-06-10 2019-08-20 Pharnext Early treatment of CMT disease
JP7065880B2 (en) * 2017-04-24 2022-05-12 ファーネクスト Idalopyrdin combination therapy for Alzheimer's disease
IL270654B2 (en) 2017-05-17 2024-07-01 Confluence Pharmaceuticals Llc Formulations of homotaurines and their salts
AU2018310881C1 (en) 2017-07-31 2021-12-16 Novartis Ag Use of mavoglurant in the reduction of cocaine use or in preventing relapse into cocaine use
JP2020529978A (en) 2017-07-31 2020-10-15 ノバルティス アーゲー Use of Maboglulanto to reduce alcohol use or prevent relapse of alcohol use
AU2019211135A1 (en) * 2018-01-29 2020-08-06 Pharnext Baclofen and acamprosate based therapy of alzheimer's disease in patients having lost responsiveness to acetylcholinesterase inhibitor therapy
CN112791078B (en) 2019-11-13 2022-12-06 润佳（苏州）医药科技有限公司 Use of isotopically enriched 3-amino-1-propanesulfonic acid and derivatives thereof
US20250134902A1 (en) * 2022-02-09 2025-05-01 Univesrity Of North Texas Health Science Center Drug repurposing for delayed treatment of ischemic stroke
CN115350172A (en) * 2022-08-12 2022-11-18 昆明医科大学 Application of Gabapentinin in AD scene memory improvement
WO2025095099A1 (en) * 2023-11-02 2025-05-08 株式会社ケイファーマ Therapeutic agent for frontotemporal lobar degeneration and therapeutic composition

Family Cites Families (42)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5721263A (en) 1993-06-07 1998-02-24 Takeda Chemical Industries, Ltd. Pharmaceutical composition for angiotensin II-mediated diseases
US6573251B2 (en) 1994-03-30 2003-06-03 Denis Barritault Drug and pharmaceutical composition for the treatment of lesions of the nervous system and fractions enriched in heparan sulfate
US6391922B1 (en) 1998-01-13 2002-05-21 Synchroneuron, Llc Treatment of posttraumatic stress disorder, obsessive-compulsive disorder and related neuropsychiatric disorders
AU3173301A (en) 2000-02-11 2001-08-20 European Molecular Biology Laboratory Methods and compositions for treatment of alzheimer's disease by enhancing plasmin or plasmin-like activity
UA76475C2 (en) 2001-07-19 2006-08-15 Pharmacia Corp Combination of eplerenon and hmg co-a reductase inhibitor and its use for treatment and/or prophylaxis of pathologic condition in cardiovascular system
AU2002316231A1 (en) 2002-02-19 2003-09-29 Xenoport, Inc. Methods for synthesis of prodrugs from 1-acyl-alkyl derivatives and compositions thereof
AU2003222009A1 (en) 2002-03-18 2003-10-08 Pharmacia Corporation Combination of an aldosterone receptor antagonist and nicotinic acid or a nicotinic acid derivative
US20040102525A1 (en) 2002-05-22 2004-05-27 Kozachuk Walter E. Compositions and methods of treating neurological disease and providing neuroprotection
WO2004032965A1 (en) 2002-10-10 2004-04-22 Ono Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Endogenous repair factor production promoters
WO2005019163A2 (en) 2003-08-20 2005-03-03 Xenoport, Inc. Acyloxyalkyl carbamate prodrugs, methods of synthesis and use
JP4927563B2 (en) 2003-12-30 2012-05-09 ゼノポート，インコーポレイティド Synthesis of acyloxyalkyl carbamate prodrugs and intermediates
US20080025962A1 (en) 2004-11-30 2008-01-31 Angesmg,Inc. Remedy for Alzheimer's Disease
US20080188510A1 (en) 2005-05-23 2008-08-07 Eisai R & D Management Co., Ltd. Novel methods using zonisamide
US20070112017A1 (en) 2005-10-31 2007-05-17 Braincells, Inc. Gaba receptor mediated modulation of neurogenesis
WO2008006070A2 (en) 2006-07-06 2008-01-10 Roskamp Research Llc Compounds and combinations thereof for inhibiting beta-amyloid production and methods of use thereof
ES2365574T3 (en) 2007-01-11 2011-10-07 Xenoport, Inc. ORAL DOSAGE FORMS FOR CONTINUOUS RELEASE OF A R-BACLOFEN PROPHARM AND TREATMENT PROCEDURES.
US20100298375A1 (en) 2007-05-22 2010-11-25 Heii Arai medicament comprising a carbostyril derivative and donepezil for treating alzheimer's disease
WO2009033079A1 (en) 2007-09-07 2009-03-12 Xenoport, Inc. Externally masked neopentyl sulfonyl ester cyclization release prodrugs of acamprosate, compositions thereof, and methods of use
TW200924747A (en) 2007-09-07 2009-06-16 Xenoport Inc Simple pantoic acid ester neopentyl sulfonyl ester cyclization release prodrugs of acamprosate, compositions thereof, and methods of use
TW200932734A (en) 2007-10-15 2009-08-01 Xenoport Inc Internally masked neopentyl sulfonyl ester cyclization release prodrugs of acamprosate, compositions thereof, and methods of use
US20090118365A1 (en) * 2007-11-06 2009-05-07 Xenoport, Inc Use of Prodrugs of GABA B Agonists for Treating Neuropathic and Musculoskeletal Pain
WO2009096985A1 (en) 2008-02-01 2009-08-06 Xenoport, Inc. Sustained release particulate oral dosage forms of (r)-baclofen prodrugs and methods of treatment
US20100137442A2 (en) 2008-02-01 2010-06-03 Xenoport, Inc. Sustained Release Particulate Oral Dosage Forms of (R)-Baclofen and Methods of Treatment
PT2282779E (en) 2008-04-29 2013-05-28 Pharnext New therapeutic approaches for treating alzheimer disease and related disorders through a modulation of cell stress response
LT2282778T (en) * 2008-04-29 2017-06-26 Pharnext New therapeutic approaches for treating alzheimer disease and related disorders through a modulation of angiogenesis
WO2009133128A1 (en) * 2008-04-29 2009-11-05 Pharnext Combination compositions for treating alzheimer disease and related disorders with zonisamide and acamprosate
EP2135607A1 (en) 2008-06-18 2009-12-23 Pharnext Combination of pilocarpin and methimazol for treating Charcot-MarieTooth disease and related disorders
CN102227427B (en) 2008-11-27 2014-04-02 国立大学法人香川大学 Cyclobutyl purine derivative, angiogenesis promoting agent, lumenization promoting agent, neurocyte growth promoting agent, and drug
PL2378883T3 (en) * 2008-12-04 2016-06-30 Intec Pharma Ltd Zaleplon gastroretentive drug delivery system
CN102341099A (en) 2009-03-03 2012-02-01 什诺波特有限公司 Sustained release oral dosage forms of an R-baclofen prodrug
JP2012524065A (en) 2009-04-17 2012-10-11 ゼノポート，インコーポレーテッド Γ-aminobutyric acid derivatives as GABAB receptor ligands
US9393241B2 (en) 2009-06-02 2016-07-19 Pharnext Compositions for treating CMT and related disorders
EP2263665A1 (en) 2009-06-02 2010-12-22 Pharnext New compositions for treating CMT and related disorders
US9387206B2 (en) 2009-11-03 2016-07-12 Pharnext Therapeutic approaches for treating Alzheimer's disease
EP2322163A1 (en) 2009-11-03 2011-05-18 Pharnext New therapeutics approaches for treating alzheimer disease
US10010515B2 (en) 2011-03-01 2018-07-03 Pharnext Therapeutic approaches for treating Parkinson's disease
US9867837B2 (en) 2011-03-01 2018-01-16 Pharnext Compositions for treating neurological disorders
ES2665569T3 (en) 2011-03-01 2018-04-26 Pharnext Treatment of cerebral ischemia
US9248111B2 (en) 2011-03-01 2016-02-02 Pharnext Therapeutic approaches for treating parkinson's disease
US9241933B2 (en) 2011-03-01 2016-01-26 Pharnext Compositions for treating amyotrophic lateral sclerosis
UA115968C2 (en) 2011-03-01 2018-01-25 Фарнекст NEW COMPOSITIONS FOR THE TREATMENT OF NEUROLOGICAL DISEASES
US9931326B2 (en) 2011-03-29 2018-04-03 Pharnext Composition comprising torasemide and baclofen for treating neurological disorders

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
KR20140038378A (en) 2014-03-28
US9636316B2 (en) 2017-05-02
ES2450074T3 (en) 2014-03-21
ES2845204T3 (en) 2021-07-26
HRP20140131T1 (en) 2014-05-09
KR101918745B1 (en) 2018-11-15
US20130085122A1 (en) 2013-04-04
US8865769B2 (en) 2014-10-21
EA201300974A1 (en) 2014-01-30
AU2012222351B2 (en) 2017-05-18
KR20180043844A (en) 2018-04-30
JP2017193562A (en) 2017-10-26
EP2680835A2 (en) 2014-01-08
MX340568B (en) 2016-07-14
HK1182615A1 (en) 2013-12-06
JP6416328B2 (en) 2018-10-31
CA2828765C (en) 2019-07-30
BR112013022112B1 (en) 2021-09-28
AU2012222351A1 (en) 2013-08-29
IL261725A (en) 2018-10-31
US20160000736A1 (en) 2016-01-07
SG192968A1 (en) 2013-09-30
US20140378440A1 (en) 2014-12-25
TR201809351T4 (en) 2018-07-23
AU2017210501B2 (en) 2018-11-01
LT2727588T (en) 2019-01-25
HUE038653T2 (en) 2018-11-28
MX373746B (en) 2020-05-20
ES2678794T3 (en) 2018-08-17
DK2796132T3 (en) 2018-07-23
SMT201800618T1 (en) 2019-02-28
JP2014510069A (en) 2014-04-24
PL2727588T3 (en) 2019-04-30
ES2698927T3 (en) 2019-02-06
DK2560631T3 (en) 2014-02-10
PT2560631E (en) 2014-02-24
CY1120369T1 (en) 2019-07-10
US20170231958A1 (en) 2017-08-17
JP5987008B2 (en) 2016-09-06
EA201891833A1 (en) 2019-01-31
SI2560631T1 (en) 2014-06-30
SI2796132T1 (en) 2018-09-28
PL2560631T3 (en) 2014-06-30
SMT201400029B (en) 2014-07-07
CY1120925T1 (en) 2019-12-11
DK2727588T3 (en) 2018-12-10
KR101937782B1 (en) 2019-01-11
SMT201800327T1 (en) 2018-09-13
ZA201306039B (en) 2014-10-29
AU2017210501A1 (en) 2017-08-17
RS57426B1 (en) 2018-09-28
MX2013010043A (en) 2014-02-11
EP2560631A2 (en) 2013-02-27
EP2560631B1 (en) 2014-01-15
CY1115074T1 (en) 2016-12-14
RS58114B1 (en) 2019-02-28
CN105997969A (en) 2016-10-12
WO2012117075A3 (en) 2012-12-13
SI2727588T1 (en) 2019-03-29
CN103596562B (en) 2016-06-01
ES2665569T3 (en) 2018-04-26
US8741886B2 (en) 2014-06-03
WO2012117076A3 (en) 2012-10-26
EA023277B1 (en) 2016-05-31
CA2828765A1 (en) 2012-09-07
EP3332781A1 (en) 2018-06-13
RS53227B (en) 2014-08-29
EP2680835B1 (en) 2018-02-07
IL228177B (en) 2018-01-31
EP2727588B1 (en) 2018-08-29
SG10201610587SA (en) 2017-02-27
PL2796132T3 (en) 2018-10-31
US9144558B2 (en) 2015-09-29
EP2796132B1 (en) 2018-05-02
CN103596562A (en) 2014-02-19
US20130090307A1 (en) 2013-04-11
WO2012117075A2 (en) 2012-09-07
BR112013022112A2 (en) 2018-06-26
WO2012117076A2 (en) 2012-09-07
CN105997969B (en) 2022-03-25
US20140080873A1 (en) 2014-03-20
EP2796132A1 (en) 2014-10-29
EP2727588A1 (en) 2014-05-07
LT2796132T (en) 2018-10-10
HK1203158A1 (en) 2015-10-23
US9820978B2 (en) 2017-11-21
NZ614184A (en) 2015-08-28

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20200085790A1 (en) Baclofen and acamprosate based therapy of neurological disorders
AU2012222348B2 (en) New compositions for treating neurological disorders
US9931326B2 (en) Composition comprising torasemide and baclofen for treating neurological disorders
US10799499B2 (en) Combinatorial therapies of neurological disorders
IL256992A (en) Baclofen and acamprosate based therapy of neurogical disorders
HK1203158B (en) Baclofen and acamprosate based therapy of neurological disorders
HK1197729A (en) Baclofen and acamprosate based therapy of neurological disorders
NZ614184B2 (en) Baclofen and acamprosate based therapy of neurogical disorders
HK1197729B (en) Baclofen and acamprosate based therapy of neurological disorders
HK1182615B (en) Baclofen and acamprosate based therapy of neurogical disorders
EP3411025A1 (en) Novel combinatorial therapies of neurological disorders

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: PHARNEXT, FRANCE

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:COHEN, DANIEL;CHUMAKOV, ILYA;NABIROCHKIN, SERGUEI;AND OTHERS;SIGNING DATES FROM 20140917 TO 20140930;REEL/FRAME:051106/0305

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: RESPONSE TO NON-FINAL OFFICE ACTION ENTERED AND FORWARDED TO EXAMINER

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: RESPONSE TO NON-FINAL OFFICE ACTION ENTERED AND FORWARDED TO EXAMINER

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: FINAL REJECTION MAILED

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION